DRAFT User Guide

AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Disclaimer
Information of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries disclaim any and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law. Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd, or any of its subsidiaries, shall be liable to any person or entity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information, particulars, or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also not reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution. The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited. First published September 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd, and its subsidiaries 2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom

Trademarks
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trade mark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.

DRAFT User Guide

DRAFT User Guide

Contents

Page

DRAFT
Introducing DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
What does DRAFT do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 DRAFT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Who Should Read this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 Organisation of the DRAFT User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

General and Database Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Saving Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 Seeing Changes Made by Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Database Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Cross-Database Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 Switching Between Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 Updating Symbol Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3

Miscellaneous Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3

Audible Error Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Text Output Off (DEVICE TTY only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging the Alpha Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Output of Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 2:3 2:4 2:4

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

Entering DRAFT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 Leaving DRAFT... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Getting Work... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Update Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audible Error Trace.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Output of Current Element Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling and Logging the Alpha Display... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppressing Warning Messages... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2:5 2:5 2:5 2:5 2:6 2:6 2:6 2:6

Drawing the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Introducing the DRAFT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Creating a Drawing, a Sheet and a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Defining the Contents of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3

Defining View Contents Using the AUTO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 Defining VIEW Contents Using Id Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Adding Elements to 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective Additions to the Id List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spatial Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Limits of the View Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Up Id Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying Id Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 3:5 3:6 3:6 3:7 3:7

Changing the Picture by Changing VIEW Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7

VIEW Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 View Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 View Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9 View Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 Orientation of View Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 Perspective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Looking Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Representation Ruleset Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 Hatching Ruleset Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 Change Ruleset Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 Arc Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 View Gap Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12

More on the AUTO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 Hidden Line Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 2D Symbolic Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

ii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Scaling Design Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17 Orienting Design Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17

Querying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17

Querying View Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17 Querying Whether an Element Appears in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18 Querying the Nearest Side to an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18

Background Process Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initiating and Using the BPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Jobs using the Background Process Manager Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At Id List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At DRWG and below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying Contents of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19 3:20 3:20 3:22 3:23 3:24 3:25 3:27 3:27

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:23

Graphical Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Representation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Representation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Representation Rules for 2D Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective Style Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 4:6 4:7 4:8 4:8

Automatic Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Hatching Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Which Elements can be Hatched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Hatching Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 The Hatch Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11

Querying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11

Querying Rulesets and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11 Querying Hatching Rulesets and Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12

At Representation Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

iii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

At Representation Style . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12 At Hatching Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:13 At Hatching Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14

Section Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Creating and Using Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Perpendicular Plane (PPLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4 Flat Plane (FPLA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5 Stepped Plane (SPLA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7

Altering Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9 Plane Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11

Setting Plane Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For SPLAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Section Plane Points Directly . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Retain/Discard Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Section Plane Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Section Plane Points . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the VIEW to Accept Section Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane Erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11 5:11 5:11 5:11 5:12 5:12 5:12 5:12 5:13 5:13

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

Identifying Elements Using the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Picking P-points and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
P-point Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3

Picking Structural Elements and P-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3 Querying Position Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4 Snapping 2D Points to a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4 Highlighting Displayed Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Cursor Identification/Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-point Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highlighting Elements... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapping 2D Points to a Grid.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7 6:7 6:7 6:8 6:8

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

iv

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Extended Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Standard DXF Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Creating the DXF File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF File Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Migration to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Header Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoding of Multi-Byte Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling .............................................................. 7:4 7:4 7:5 7:6 7:6 7:6

Configurable DXF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7

Configuration Datasets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7 Switches and BLOCK Rules to Control DXF Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:9 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:14

Configurable DGN Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:15

Configuration Datasets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Features of Option Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File-Related and Miscellaneous Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line/Colour Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level-Related Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Related Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Validation feature and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of Switches and Rules to Control DGN Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting DRAFT Drawings Containing PDMS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing PDMS Fonts into MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping the Installed Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDMS Font File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colours ............................................................. Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:15 7:17 7:19 7:21 7:23 7:25 7:27 7:28 7:28 7:28 7:31 7:31 7:31 7:32 7:35 7:35 7:36 7:37

Guidelines for Importing DGN Files from DRAFT into MicroStation. . . . . . . . 7:31

Colours and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6

System-Defined Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6 User-Defined Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7 Glyphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10 Using Glyphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14

Fill Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15

System-Defined Fill Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15 User-Defined Fill Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18 Using Fillstyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19

Marker Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19 Graphical Feedback Style and Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Circulation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2 Drawing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
At Circulation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4 At Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4

Change Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1 Design Change Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2 Annotation Change Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2 Change Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3
Design Change Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3 Annotation Change Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4

Attribute Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:4 Comparison Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5 UPDATE Command, SHOW CHANGES Option and Error Messages . . . . . . . 10:6 Querying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:7
Querying Change Rulesets and Design or Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:7

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8

At Design Change Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8 At Design Change Style . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8 At Annotation Change Rule . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:9 At Annotation Change Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

vi

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introduction to Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1

Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Dimension and Label Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2 Intelligent Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2 Design Symbol Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3

Autoblanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1 Dimension Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1 Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2
Linear Dimensions and How to Create Them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2 Multi-valued Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:6 Principal Attributes of Linear Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:8 Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:12

Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:21

Creating Radial Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of Radial Dimensions - Specific Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of Radial Dimensions - General Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of Radial Dimensions - Ancillary Graphics Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Radial Dimensions using the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Radial Dimensions through Graphical Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:24 12:24 12:30 12:31 12:32 12:32

Pitch Circle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32

Creating Pitch Circle Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:33

Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:34

Angular Dimensions and How to Create Them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:34 Principal Attributes of Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:38 Detail Attributes of Angular Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:39

Identifying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:39 Suppressing the Display of Dimension and Projection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:39 Dimensioning Skewed Pipe in Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:40 Updating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:40 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:41
Creating Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the Dimension Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Dimension Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Modifying Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:41 12:41 12:41 12:42

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

vii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Creating Pitch Circle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Dimension Line and Dimension Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Projection Line and Projection Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Gaps . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Operations on Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Unwanted Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12:42 12:43 12:43 12:44 12:45 12:45 12:46 12:47 12:48

Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1 Creating and Manipulating Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Creating Labels and Label Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2 Labelling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 Positioning and Orienting Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 Label Frame Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:6 Hiding Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7 Label Text Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7 Leader Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10 Varying the Leader Line Connection Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:13 Leader Line Gaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:14 Modifying Labels through Graphical Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:14

Special Labels and Label Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:15

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Labels and Text Label Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Labels and Symbol Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling and Mirroring Special Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLAB Leaderline Connection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Autotagging Hierarchy and Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Label Appearance and Elements to be Tagged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracking the Autotagging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Editing and Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Rule Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DATAL Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:15 13:15 13:16 13:16 13:17 13:18 13:19 13:20 13:20 13:21 13:22 13:23 13:23 13:23 13:24

Autotagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:18

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

viii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Label Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27

Setting Label Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning the Label Text . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Label Frame Attributes . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading Label Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Label Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Leader Line Attributes (GLABs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Leader Line Attributes (SLABs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Gaps . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting unwanted Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27 13:27 13:27 13:28 13:28 13:29 13:30 13:30 13:30 13:31 13:31

Intelligent Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1 Codewords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1 Accessing Data from the DESIGN or Catalogue Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:2
P-point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:2 P-line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:3 Accessing Data in Catalogue Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:4

Accessing Data from the DRAFT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:5 Accessing Dimensioning Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:6 Accessing UDA Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:6 Accessing Administrative Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:7 Codewords with Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:8
Template Codeword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab Generator Codeword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Line Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . # Character. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emboldening and Italicising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:8 14:8 14:9 14:9 14:9 14:9

Substrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:10
String Definition by Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:10 Substring Definition by Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:10

Array Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:11 Transforming Position/Direction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:12

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

ix

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Extracting Attribute Data from any Specified Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:13 Distance, Position and Bore Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:14
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:14 Mixed Units within Intelligent Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:15 Controlling the Precision of the Generated Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:16

Position Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:16

POSFOR (Positional Code Word Format) Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17 GRSYS (Grid System) Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17

Customizing Error Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:18 Intelligent Text Syntax - Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:18 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:19
14:20 14:20 14:21 14:21 14:21 14:21 14:22 14:22 14:22 14:22 14:23 14:23 14:23 14:24 14:24

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:20

Design World Hash Codes (examples)... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAFT Drawing World Hash Codes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Characters... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hash Code Delimiters... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub-Strings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Array Indexing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforming Position/Direction Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attribute Navigation... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extraction of P-line Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Units (at LAYE)... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Precision of the Generated Output... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Position Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Grid System (for GRIDLIN search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous Text Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1

True Type Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1 PDMS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1 Multiple Fonts within Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Alternative Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2

Editing Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:3 Querying Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:5 Assigning Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:5 Character Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:6

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1

Basic Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1 3D Position from a P-line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1 3D Direction from a P-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:2 Angle from a P-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:2 P-line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:3
P-line Design Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-line Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-line Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-line Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-line Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-line Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:3 16:3 16:4 16:4 16:4 16:4

Representation of SCTN Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:5

Underlays and Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1 Using Plotfiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1 Database Elements for Underlays and Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2 Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:4
Underlays... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:4 Overlays... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:4 Manipulating Overlays... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:4

2D Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1 Where 2D Drafting is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Backing and Overlay Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1 Symbol Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3

The Drafting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:4 2D Drafting Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:5

Creating and Manipulating Drafting Primitives - Common Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6 Re-use of Drafting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:14 Visibility of Drafting Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 Enhancing Drafting Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 Creating and Manipulating Drafting Primitives - Specific Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:16

Text Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:35

Entering Text from DRAFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:35

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

xi

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Displaying Text from a File on the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:36

Summary of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:36

Creating Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting the Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Individual Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Individual Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring Individual Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Groups of Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Querying Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Primitives . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketching Drafting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhancing Display of Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:36 18:36 18:37 18:37 18:37 18:37 18:38 18:38 18:38 18:39 18:39

ISODRAFT Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1

Creating ISODRAFT Symbol Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Attributes of ISODRAFT Symbol Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:2 Wildcards in SKEYs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:3 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:3

Outputting ISODRAFT Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4 Querying ISODRAFT Symbol Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4

Point and Line Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1 X, Y Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:2 Construction of 3D Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4 Midpoint Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4
Midpoint of Two Defined Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4 Midpoint of an Existing Straight Line or Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4

Quadrant Point Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:5 Endpoint Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:6 Centre or Focus Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:7 Nearest To Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:8 Intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:9 Tangency Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:11 Tangent Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12 Perpendicular Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:13

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

xii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Reflected Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Fillet Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Constructed Lines, Ray Lines and Bisector Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15
Constructed Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Ray Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16 Bisector Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16

Chamfer Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:17 Non-Drafting Applications of Point Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:17

Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overlay Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Non-Drafting uses of Point Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Construction Option Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:17 20:17 20:18 20:18 20:18 20:18

DRAFT Database Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1

Basic Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1

Picture File Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B:1

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

xiii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

xiv

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introducing DRAFT

Introducing DRAFT
Note: The term DRAFT is used in this document to refer to both the Plant 2D drafting module (called DRAFT) and the Marine 2D drafting module (called Outfitting DRAFT). This functionality is the same for both. The term PDMS (Plant Design Management System) is used in a number of places in this document. This refers to the AVEVA Plant design environment; the functionality described also applies to AVEVA Marine.

1.1

What does DRAFT do?

DRAFT produces fully annotated scale drawings showing selected parts of the design model created in DESIGN. DRAFT is fully integrated with DESIGN. A model can be viewed from any direction, with hidden detail automatically removed or shown in a different linestyle, as required. A drawing may contain more than one view of a 3D model; for example, a plan view, a front elevation and an isometric view may be displayed simultaneously. In DRAFT an annotated drawing is made up of different types of graphics: Graphics that represent the 3D model. Graphics to provide backing and overlay sheets which will be common to a number of drawings. Graphics providing annotation, including not only dimensioning and text but also such items as leader lines and label boxes.

All the graphic items exist as, or are defined by, elements in the DRAFT database.

1.2

DRAFT Database
The DRAFT database (DB) contains a complete definition of a DRAFT drawing. The DRAFT database does not contain information describing the geometry of the graphics that make up a drawing, but gives a description of how those graphics should be presented on a drawing. From this database definition (together with the DESIGN and Catalogue databases which describe the appropriate 3D model) a drawing is generated which reflects the state of the design at that particular time. The drawing can be displayed on the screen and processed to produce a hard copy plotfile.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

1:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introducing DRAFT

1.3

Who Should Read this Manual

This is a command-level manual, written for people who are writing or customising their own graphical user interface. It describes all the DRAFT commands, with worked examples where appropriate. It is assumed that you are familiar with the normal way of using DRAFT, through the supplied Graphical User Interface (GUI). For an introduction to using DRAFT via the GUI, see Drawing Production User Guide. For information about DRAFT System Administration, see the AVEVA DRAFT Administrator Application User Guide. For general information about customising the graphical user interface, see the Software Customisation Guide and Software Customisation Reference Manual.

1.4

Organisation of the DRAFT User Guide

The DRAFT User Guide manual is divided into the following chapters: General and Database Commands, describes some general commands, common to several Plant/Marine modules, which are available in DRAFT. Drawing the Design, describes how to create a DRAFT picture without annotations. It describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores the main administrative and graphical elements and how to create them. It also describes Views, which are the areas used to display Design elements, and how to define their content. Graphical Representation, describes how Design elements are defined and drawn using Representation Rules. It describes how Representation Rules are defined and describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores the Representation Rules. It also describes Hatching Rules, used for the automatic hatching of faces of Design elements. Section Planes, describes how you can construct sections through Design items, using Planes in DRAFT, which can be displayed at VIEW level. Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments, describes how, with many DRAFT commands, you can use the cursor to identify an element in the graphics window by using the ID command followed by an @. Plotting and Drawing Output, describes how you can generate, at any time during the drawing process, a plotfile consisting of a single Sheet, View, or the content of an Area View. Colours and Styles, defines the attributes that are associated with pens and describes how to set these attributes. Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions, describes how to create the drawing office administrative elements; reports and circulation lists. It also describes how DRAFT handles revision numbers. Change Highlighting, describes how you use Change Rules to control how Design and Annotation elements that have been changed are drawn on a DRAFT View. It describes how Change Rules are defined and describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores the Change Rules. It also describes the concept of Comparison Dates and how these are used to determine whether Design and Annotation elements have been changed Introduction to Annotation, describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores annotation elements. Dimensioning, describes how dimensions are added to drawings in DRAFT. It also describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores dimensions. Labelling, describes labels, how they are created and the part of the DRAFT database that stores them.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

1:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introducing DRAFT

Intelligent Text, describes the use of code words to automatically extract data from the Design, Catalogue or Drawing databases. Miscellaneous Text Facilities, describes how the following text parameters can be manipulated in DRAFT; font selection, using multiple fonts within a text string, inserting symbols using the alternative character set, editing text attributes, text quality, character height. Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT, describes how to label and dimension structural elements, and how to use structural elements in 2D drafting. It also describes how to apply 3D data to annotation elements. Underlays and Overlays, describes the use of underlays and overlays on a Sheet to add standard elements such as borders, title blocks, keyplans, etc. 2D Drafting, describes DRAFT's two-dimensional drafting facilities and explains how these can be used to complement its main drawing production facilities. ISODRAFT Symbols, describes how ISODRAFT Symbols can be created in DRAFT and exported to an ISODRAFT Symbol File. Point and Line Construction, describes how a drafting position can be defined by reference to other positions rather than explicitly. DRAFT Database Hierarchy provides a graphical representation of the DRAFT database structure. Picture File Naming Conventions, describes the structure of picture file names.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

1:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introducing DRAFT

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

1:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

General and Database Commands

This Chapter describes some general commands, common to several Plant/Marine modules, and some useful database commands. For information on using commands relating to multiple and multiwrite databases, refer to the AVEVA Database Reference Manual.

2.1
2.1.1

Saving
Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status
If the intention is to leave DRAFT for a short period only the RECREATE/INSTALL facility allows the display setup (including the full forms and menus set) to be saved, for restoration later.

Example:

RECREATE /DS1
saves the display status in file /DS1.

RECREATE /DS1 OVER

as above, but an existing file /DS1 is overwritten.

RECRE DISPLAY /DS2

saves modal settings, e.g. changes from default Style/Colour configuration, units, text quality etc. Read back in using $M/name.

INSTALL SETUP /DS1

restores the display definition stored in file /DS1. (Refers to file saved by RECREATE, not RECREATE DISPLAY.) Note: Forms resized or moved using the cursor will be INSTALLed to their original size.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

2.1.2

Saving Work
The command: SAVEWORK saves the current DRAFT additions or modifications without leaving DRAFT. It is good practice to use this command on a regular basis during a long DRAFT session to ensure maximum data security.

2.1.3

Seeing Changes Made by Other Users

The command: GETWORK updates the DRAFT database with the changes made by other users, if the database has been opened in multi-write mode.

2.2
2.2.1

Database Commands
Cross-Database Referencing
The functionality described in this section exists in order to minimise problems of crossdatabase referencing when Design databases are deleted and rebuilt from macros. All DRAFT elements with DDNM, IDLN, or IDNM reference attributes also have system text attributes DDNX, IDLX, and IDNX respectively. These three attributes can be queried but not set by the user. DRAFT will always use the DDNM, IDLN and IDNM attributes; values in DDNX, IDLX and IDNX will be ignored. Setting a DDNM, IDLN or IDNM attribute will also cause the associated system text attribute (i.e. DDNX, IDLX and IDNX respectively) to be set to the name of the Design element referenced, so long as it is named. The following UPDATE commands exist to aid updating of a DRAFT database following rebuilding of an associated Design database: UPDATE element_identifier REFS UPDATE element_identifier NAMES The first of these will change the DDNM, IDLN, and IDNM attributes of element_identifier, and all elements below it in the DRAFT database hierarchy, to match the values obtained from the associated text attributes. This means that if a DESIGN database is deleted and rebuilt then, so long as those elements referenced from DRAFT databases are all named, references in DRAFT databases can easily be kept up to date. The second command will change the DDNX, IDLX, and IDNX attributes to match the values obtained from the associated reference attributes. This option has been included primarily to allow a full set of these new text attributes to be generated for existing DRAFT databases. In each case no change will occur if a value cannot be obtained from the name/ reference encoding/decoding process. The element_identifier can be omitted, in which case the current element will be assumed. During the updating process warning messages will be output whenever an attribute is changed or when DRAFT attempts to change an attribute but is unable to generate the required name or reference to do so. These messages will be of the form:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

VSEC 2 of /VIEW2: IDLN attribute updated to /ZONE1.PIPES GLAB 1 of /D1/S1/V1/LAYER1: unable to update DDNX attribute

2.2.2

Switching Between Databases

You can switch between the DESIGN, DRAFT and Catalogue Databases using the command: SWITCH If the current element is in the DESIGN database, SWITCH will make the element last selected in the DRAFT database current. Similarly, giving the SWITCH command when in the DRAFT database will return to the element last selected in the Design database. If the current element is a Catalogue Component, SWITCH will return to the last Design element accessed. You can go directly to the DRAFT database or DESIGN Database using the commands: CONTEXT DRAWING CONTEXT DESIGN

2.2.3

Updating Symbol Instances

The command: UPDATE INSTANCES (valid at SHEE, BACK, OVER, SYLB, LALB or above) scans the database hierarchy and updates all those parts of picture files which use the graphics instancing mechanism. For example, a SYMB is an instance of a SYTM. OLAY and BACK elements are in the same category.

2.3
2.3.1

Miscellaneous Facilities
Audible Error Trace
When a macro error occurs, there is an audible alarm at the workstation to signal that the error has occurred. Occasionally, macro errors can be anticipated and no audible warning is required. This command allows the audible warning to be switched on or off either interactively or via a macro. If the audible warning is ON, it will sound whenever an error alert is displayed.

ALARM ON
sets the audible tone to be on.

ALARM OFF
suppresses the audible tone until it is turned on again.

2.3.2

Switching Text Output Off (DEVICE TTY only)

The TRACE command is only relevant in TTY mode. It controls the automatic output of the Current Element name. With TRACE set to ON, the name of an element is displayed as it is accessed. With Trace set to OFF, the element name is not displayed. When macros are being run, TRACE is always set to OFF automatically.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

Example:

TRACE OFF TRACE ON

stops the automatic name output. (default) restarts automatic output of Current Element name.

2.3.3

Logging the Alpha Display

The ALPHA command allows you to log commands and responses displayed in the Command Input & Output window. Examples of the ALPHA LOG command are: ALP LOG /LF1 ALP LOG /LF1 OVER ALP LOG END log displayed alpha information in file /LF1 as above, but overwrite existing file /LF1 finish logging information

ALPHA FILE will only record commands you give, not the system's responses.

2.3.4

Controlling Output of Warning Messages

The WARNINGS command allows you to suppress the output of warning messages: WARNINGS OFF WARNINGS ON suppress the output of warnings enable the output of warnings (default).

2.4
2.4.1

Summary of Commands
Entering DRAFT...
DRAFT enters DRAFT

2.4.2

Leaving DRAFT...
QUIT leaves DRAFT without saving database changes. QUIT module_name switches to named module, without saving database changes. module_name switches to named module, saving database changes.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

2.4.3

Saving and Restoring the Current Display Status...

RECREATE name [OVERWRITE] saves the display status in the named file. (OVERWRITE option overwrites existing file of the same name) RECREATE DISPLAY name OVERWRITE] saves modal settings, e.g. changes from default pen configuration, units, text quality etc. Read back in using $M/name. INSTALL SETUP name restores the display definition stored in the named file. (Refers to file saved by RECREATE, not RECREATE DISPLAY.)

2.4.4

Saving and Getting Work...

SAVEWORK saves the current DRAFT additions or modifications without leaving DRAFT GETWORK updates drawings with any changes made to the PADD database by other users.

2.4.5

System Update Commands

UPDATE element_identifier REFS changes the DDNX, IDLX and IDNX attributes of element_identifier, and all elements below it in the DRAFT database hierarchy, to match the values obtained from the associated text attributes. UPDATE element_identifier NAMES changes the DDNX, IDLX and IDNX attributes to match the values obtained from the associated reference attributes. UPDATE INSTANCES (valid at SHEE, BACK, OVER, SYLB, LALB or above) scans the database hierarchy and updates all those parts of picture files which use the graphics instancing mechanism.

2.4.6

Database Switching
SW switch Design/Drawing contexts CONT DRAW switch to Drawing context CONT DES switch to Design context

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

General and Database Commands

2.4.7

Audible Error Trace...

ALARM ON, ALARM OFF turns audible error trace ON or OFF.

2.4.8

Text Output of Current Element Name

TRACE OFF, TRACE ON stops or starts automatic name output.

2.4.9

Controlling and Logging the Alpha Display...

ALP LOG /LF1 log displayed alpha information in file /LF2 ALP LOG /LF1 OVER as above, but overwrite existing file /LF1 ALP LOG END finish recording alpha information

2.4.10

Suppressing Warning Messages...

WARNINGs OFF suppress the output of warnings WARNINGs ON enable the output of warnings (default).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

2:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Drawing the Design

This Chapter describes how to create an unannotated DRAFT picture. It describes the part of the DRAFT database that stores the main administrative and graphical elements, and how to create them. It then describes Views, which are the areas used to display design elements, and how to define their contents. Note: Throughout this manual, view (lower case letters) means an area view, alpha view or plot view, whereas VIEW (upper-case letters) refers to the VIEW database element. All other database elements are also named using four upper-case letters (e.g. DRWG, SHEE, LIBY), but may also be referred to in unabbreviated form with just a leading upper-case letter (e.g. Drawing instead of DRWG).

3.1

Introducing the DRAFT Database

The top-level graphical elements in the DRAFT Database hierarchy are shown below.

DRAWING SHEET VIEW

Figure 3:1. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Principal Graphic Elements

The principal element is the Drawing (DRWG), which is the Database equivalent of the traditional paper drawing. All the elements below DRWG in the hierarchy are used to store the information required to completely define the Drawing. A Drawing can own one or more Sheet (SHEE) elements, which correspond to the sheets of a paper drawing (Sheet 1 of 3, Sheet 2 of 3 etc). A Drawing can consist of a single Sheet. A Sheet is the highest-level element that may be displayed within a view. A Sheet may own one or more VIEW elements. These are projections of parts of the Design Database. A VIEW element has attributes that: define the viewing parameters (looking direction, through point, scale, etc) define the size, position and orientation of the region on the Sheet that the View occupies

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

refer to another DRAFT database element that contains a list of the Design (or Catalogue) elements that make up the VIEW picture.

The full DRAFT database hierarchy is illustrated in DRAFT Database Hierarchy.

3.2

Creating a Drawing, a Sheet and a View

The top-level element in a database is the World. Users cannot delete or create the World. Starting with the World as the current element, you can create the hierarchy under the World using a command sequence such as:

NEW NEW NEW NEW NEW

DEPT /PIPES REGI /PIPREG DRWG /PD101 SHEET /SHEET1 VIEW /PLAN

You can omit all commands except for NEW DRWG and NEW VIEW if there is only Department, one Registry and one Sheet on the Drawing. If the administrative elements do not exist they will be created automatically. Departments (DEPT) and Registries (REGI) are administrative elements. Departments own Registries, as shown in the following diagram.

WORLD

DEPT

REGI

DRWG LIBY SHEE

DLLB

REPO

(or to a DESIGN database element) VIEW

DESIGN Database

IDLI

IDLN

ADDE
Figure 3:2.

REME

Top part of the DRAFT Database Hierarchy

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Note: You can have several VIEWs on a Sheet. Each VIEW can contain a picture of a different part of the Design model, or different views of the same part of the model. See Changing the Picture by Changing VIEW Attributes for details of manipulating the contents of a VIEW.

3.2.1

Defining the Contents of a View

There are two methods of specifying the contents of a VIEW: Specifying the contents directly, by referencing a single Design database element. See Defining View Contents Using the AUTO Command. Specifying the contents indirectly, by referencing a DRAFT database element, which can be set up so as to refer to a set of Design database elements. See Defining VIEW Contents Using Id Lists.

3.3

Defining View Contents Using the AUTO Command

The AUTO command adds a specified design element to the View. For example:

AUTO /ZONE1
This command carries out the following operations: The VIEWs IDLN (ID List Name) attribute is set to the name of the Design element to be displayed (/ZONE1 in our example). The VIEWs THPO (Through Point) attribute is set to the Site coordinates corresponding to the centre of interest of the view. The VIEWs VSCA (VIEW Scale) attribute is set to a value calculated such that the defined picture will fit within the VIEW.

Note: AUTO only sets the IDLN attribute if it has not already been set. A second AUTO command will not change the IDLN. The AUTO command by itself will use the existing IDLN setting. The projection of the Design model must now be created before a picture can be produced. This is done by typing: UPDATE DESIGN SAVEWORK Note: The UPDATE command creates the VIEW graphics in a central picture store within the computer's memory. The SAVEWORK command is not necessary but it is recommended. It will save the graphics in the central picture store to picture files in the picture file directory. In a subsequent DRAFT session, the graphics will be read from the picture file without the need for the UPDATE command. If you leave DRAFT via a QUIT command the graphics in the central picture store will not be saved and any existing picture files will not be updated. Leaving DRAFT by switching to another module will perform an implicit SAVEWORK, and so graphics in the central picture store will be saved to picture files. Where it is known that the Update Design operation will take a considerable time, you may wish to initiate it as a Background Process (see Background Process Manager).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.4

Defining VIEW Contents Using Id Lists

You can add many elements to a VIEW by displaying the contents of an Id List (IDLI element). The Id List contains a list of the elements to be displayed. Id Lists are contained within Drawing List Libraries (DLLB elements). Starting at World level, the library part of the database is set up as in the following example:

NEW LIBY /LIB1 NEW DLLB /DLB1 NEW IDLI /ID1

(See the left-hand part of Figure 3:2.: Top part of the DRAFT Database Hierarchy) Library (LIBY) elements can appear at four positions in the hierarchy (see Appendix A). They are administrative elements used to group together several types of sublibrary. The type of sub-library of interest here is the Drawing List Library (DLLB). The DLLB is used to group together Id List (IDLI) elements.

The Id List is constructed by using ADD and REMOVE commands as in the following examples:

ADD /ZONE.PIPES2-1 ADD /ZONE.EQUI2-1 REMOVE /PIPE2-1-12 REM /PUMP2-1-12

ADD and REMOVE may be combined on a single line, for example:

ADD /ZONE1.EQUIP, /ZONE1.PIPES REMOVE /VESS1, BRAN 2 OF /PIPE3

The ADD and REMOVE commands automatically create the Add Entry (ADDE) and Remove Entry (REME) elements shown in Figure 3:2.: Top part of the DRAFT Database Hierarchy, also setting those ADDE and REME attributes which refer to (in this example) appropriate elements in the DESIGN database. Other Id Lists may be added or removed in the same way. For example:

NEW ADD ADD REM

IDLI /LIST1 /ZONE1 /LIST2 /LIST3

Note: When evaluated individually both /LIST2 and /LIST3 must define a set of design elements which are then added to/removed from /LIST1, respectively. In particular if / LIST3 is being used to remove a number of Branches (say) from /LIST1 then it should be defined as:

ADD /BRAN1, /BRAN2, /BRAN3

and NOT as:

REM /BRAN1, /BRAN2, /BRAN3

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

If an Id List has Remove entries then the member list order is important. For an entry to be removed it must have been (implicitly) added previously. Hence a Remove Entry should never be the first element in an Id List. Consider the command sequences: Sequence 1 Sequence 2

ADD /ZONE.PIPES ADD /PIPE1-1 REM /PIPE1

ADD /ZONE.PIPES REM /PIPE1 ADD /PIPE1-1

In Sequence 1 the final command removes all branches owned by /PIPE1 - including / PIPE1-1 which has been added by the second command (and implicitly by the first). In Sequence 2 these commands have been reordered so that having removed all branches in /PIPE1 (second command) the required Branch (/PIPE1-1) is added by the final command. Having created an Id List it can be used to define the contents of a VIEW by setting the VIEW's IDLN attribute directly:

IDLI /ID1
or indirectly:

AUTO /ID1
as described in Defining View Contents Using the AUTO Command.

3.4.1

Adding Elements to 3D View

The DESADD and DESREMOVE commands allow for the addition and removal of Design elements to a 3D view. The syntax is similar to the ADD and REMOVE commands described above. For example:

DESADD /ZONE.PIPES2-1 DESADD /ZONE.EQUI2-1 DESREMOVE /PIPE2-1-12 DESREM /PUMP2-1-12

This sequence of commands adds elements /ZONE.PIPES2-1 and /ZONE.EQUI2-1 to a 3D View, and removes /PIPE2-1-12 and /PUMP2-1-12. This is normally activated by the interface.

3.4.2

Selective Additions to the Id List

The Selection syntax can be used to generate Id Lists. For example:

ADD ALL EQUI FOR /SITE/99 REM ALL BRAN WITH (HBOR LT 25 AND TBOR LT 25) FOR /ZONE/PIPES ADD ALL FROM !COLLECTION
where !COLLECTION is a local variable containing a list of Design element references. In the above examples the Selection criteria are not stored in the database but expanded, and the resulting list of elements stored. This can result in very long Id Lists. You can define criteria, which are stored in the database, and only expanded at the time of an UPDATE DESIGN command using the RULE keyword. For example :

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

ADD RULE ALL ZONE WITH ( FUNC EQ 'PIPING') REM RULE ALL BRAN WITH (HBOR LT 25 AND TBOR LT 25)
You must be sure to use the RULE keyword in these cases, otherwise the criterion will be evaluated when the Rule is defined, and very many ADDEs and REMEs may be created. These forms of the ADD and REMOVE commands set the CRIT attribute of the ADDE and REME elements. The CRIT attribute can also be set directly, for example:

NEW ADDE CRIT ALL BRAN WITH (PSPE EQ /RF300)

In this case the RULE keyword is not required.

3.4.3

Spatial Map
The ADD ... WITHIN variation of the ADD command uses the PDMS spatial map. The spatial map is a simplified geometric representation of the design model. For example:

ADD /ZONE99 WITHIN E5000 N5000 U5000 TO W1000 S1000 U0 REMOVE WITHIN E2500 N1000 U500 TO E0 N0 U0
The first example would create a list of ADD entries, one for each significant element that is in /ZONE99 and which overlaps the specified volume. The second example would generate a list of REMOVE entries, one for each significant element in the current MDB that overlaps the specified volume. Note: If the spatial map is not up-to-date the list of elements generated may not be correct. The ADD ... WITHIN method may produce very long Id Lists. These are liable to become out-of-date as elements are added to, and removed from, the Design databases. Better results may be yielded by setting the IDLIs LIMI attribute (see Command Summary section at the end of this Chapter) to define the required volume and only ADD the relevant SITEs and ZONEs to the Id List.

3.4.4

Changing the Limits of the View Contents

The display of Design elements within a VIEW can be changed without affecting the Id List by changing the LIMI attribute of the IDLI element. This is done using the LIMITS command. Example:

LIMITS E1000 N8000 U1000 TO E5000 N1000 U900

Define limits explicitly.

LIMITS @ TO @
Set limits as 3D coordinates using the cursor.

LIMITS ID @ ID @
Set limits as 3D coordinates via Design elements selected with the cursor.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.4.5

Cleaning Up Id Lists
Id Lists may be purged of unknown references by the command: DELETE NULL IDLIstmembers This command scans down the database hierarchy from the current position and deletes all ADDE and REME elements whose IDNM attribute is null or references an unknown element.

3.4.6

Querying Id Lists
Q FOR /design_element_name At an IDLI, or at a VIEW. Q IDLN FOR /design_element_name A series of Design element names may be specified, separated by spaces or commas These commands will output information on whether the named element is wholly included in the named Id List (i.e. in the Id List and no member elements REMOVEd), partially included in the named Id List (i.e. in the Id List but some member elements REMOVEd), or absent from the named Id List. The Id List name/VIEW name is not required if the current element is the Id List itself or a related VIEW. Q IDLN DESC (at a VIEW) outputs Id List members and limits. Note that querying the Id List in the usual way will list its ADDE and REME elements; a more comprehensive output can be obtained by: Q DESCRIPTION (at IDLI, ADDE or REME elements) Other querying commands relating to Id Lists are: Q MAP Lists status of spatial maps in the current MDB Q VOLUME identifier Gives encompassing volume of given element Q WINDOW volume Lists significant elements in the given volume

3.5

Changing the Picture by Changing VIEW Attributes

This section describes the effects of changing the VIEW attributes. Attributes can be set explicitly in the usual way, and the effect on an elements attributes of giving the various DRAFT commands can be seen by giving a QUERY ATTRIBUTES command for the element concerned.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.5.1

VIEW Frame
LFRA controls the visibility of the VIEW frame. The frame will be drawn using the Views NLSTYLE/NLCOLOUR attributes. See Colours and Styles for a description of colours and styles. LFRA TRUE (or FRAME ON) turns the frame on, LFRA FALSE (or FRAME OFF) turns the frame off. The frame is OFF by default.

3.5.2

View Size
SIZE is the paper size of the VIEW rectangle. Changing the size by a command such as

SIZE 400 400

leaves the scale of the VIEW contents unaffected, but moves the point at the centre of the picture to the centre of the new VIEW frame. The SIZE attribute is also be changed by the VREGION command, which may be used to resize and reposition the VIEW. For example: Example:

VREGION FROM @ TO @
Opposite corners of VIEW defined by cursor

VREG X100 Y100 TO X500 Y500

Opposite corners of VIEW defined explicitly

VREG AT @
Centre of VIEW defined by cursor

VREG corner AT @
Specified corner of VIEW defined by cursor: TL top left TR top right BL bottom left BR bottom right C centre The default size is that of the owning Sheet. The VREGION command also affects the XYPS attribute (see View Centre). The SIZE command can also be used at SHEE level to change the Sheet size.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.5.3

View Centre
XYPS controls the position of the centre of the VIEW on its owning Sheet. This attribute takes two numeric values, which are the coordinates of the centre of the VIEW relative to the bottom left corner of the Sheet. The attribute can be set directly by commands such as

AT @
Nominate new XYPS with cursor

XYPS 350 250

Change attribute directly See Figure 3:3.: Changing VIEW XYPS. The default XYPS is at the centre of the Sheet.

Figure 3:3.

Changing VIEW XYPS

ONPOS is the position of the centre of the VIEW contents, relative to the centre of the VIEW. VIEW contents are centred within the VIEW by default, so this attribute takes the default values x0 y0. ONPOS is set directly, for example:

ONPO 45 -25
See Figure 3:4.: Changing VIEW ONPOS. Changing ONPOS will make the existing VIEW graphics out-of-date, so an UPDATE DESIGN command must be given.

ONPO
Figure 3:4. Changing VIEW ONPOS

ONPO

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.5.4

View Scale
VSCA controls the scale of the VIEW contents. The scale will normally be set automatically to a value which ensures that the VIEW contents fit comfortably within the VIEW boundary (see the AUTO command), but can be changed if necessary, e.g.

VSCA 0.05
The larger the VSCA value, the larger are the displayed objects. VIEW scale may be expressed in terms of a ratio using the VRAT (VIEW Ratio) attribute, for example: VRAT 1 TO 75 VRAT 1/16in TO 1ft Two positive values have to be specified but the TO may be omitted. Setting VRAT will cause the existing VIEW scale (VSCA attribute) to be recalculated. Setting VSCA directly causes VRAT to be unset. The AUTO command calculates and sets VSCA directly so this will also cause VRAT to be unset. Care should be taken when changing VSCA, as it is easy to move the VIEW contents over the VIEW frame. The AUTO command takes the ONPOS value into consideration when it calculates the VSCALE.

3.5.5

Orientation of View Contents

ADEG controls the orientation of the VIEW contents. The attribute has a default value of 0, and can be set to any angle. ADEG can be set directly or by using the TURN command, for example:

TURN 60 ADEG -120

A positive value results in an anticlockwise rotation. Figure 3:5.: Changing Orientation of VIEW Contents illustrates the effect of changing ADEG.

ADEG 0
Figure 3:5. Changing Orientation of VIEW Contents

ADEG 90

Note that the degree of rotation produced is relative to an ADEG value of 0, not to the last value of ADEG.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Varying RCOD (rotation code) produces a similar effect to varying ADEG, except that the VIEW is rotated as well. RCOD may be set to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT, corresponding to the direction of the top of the VIEW region relative to the top of the screen. Default is UP.

3.5.6

Perspective
PERS (perspective) can be used to give a perspective projection, the value taken by the PERS attribute being related to the view angle. The default value of 0 gives a parallel projection, which would be the normal setting for drawings. If PERS is changed, an UPDATE DESIGN command must be given to change the picture.

3.5.7

3D View
A 3D View can be generated from a 2D View using the GENERATE MODEL command. This view can be amended using the user interface. Elements can be added using the DESADD command (see Adding Elements to 3D View).

3.5.8

Looking Direction
The Views line of sight is fully defined by any two of: Looking Direction From Point Through Point

which are defined by the attributes DIR, THPO and FRPO. Setting one of these will unset one of the other two, assuming they are both already set. DIR (Direction) specifies the Looking Direction, down by default. This attribute is set by commands such as

LOOK E LOOK N45W ISO3 PLAN ELEVATION N IR D

Note that the picture produced by changing the Looking Direction may not necessarily fit into the VIEW frame. The THPO (Through Point) attribute is set to the Design coordinates corresponding to the centre of interest of the view. These will be calculated automatically from the VIEWs related Id List by the AUTO command. FRPO (the From Point) is the position (in Design coordinates) at which the observer is deemed to be. The Through Point and From Point may be set explicitly by commands such as:

LOOK LOOK FRPO THPO

THROUGH N53426 W632764 U2125 FROM N53426 W632764 U2125 N125671 E67342 U11254 N125671 E67342 U11254

Changing the Direction, Through Point or From Point will make the existing VIEW graphics out of date, so this must be updated by typing

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

UPDATE DESIGN
before any change in the picture will be seen. The 3D view direction equivalent to 2D Sheet direction may be queried using Query VIEWDIRection <sheet-dir> where <sheet-dir>is Left, Right, Up or Down. This command gives an error when the VIEW has Perspective or the current database position is not at or below a VIEW. For example, in a plan VIEW with RCODE UP (the default), then the query

Q VIEWDIR LEFT
would give:

Viewdirection Left W
However, for a plan VIEW with RCODE LEFT, the result would be:

Viewdirection Left N
and for a plan VIEW with ADEG 120 (and RCODE UP) the result would be:

Viewdirection Left E 30 N

3.5.9

Representation Ruleset Reference

The RRSF (Representation Ruleset Reference) attribute refers to elements that control the representation style to be used. See Representation Rules.

3.5.10

Hatching Ruleset Reference

The HRSF (Hatching Ruleset Reference) attribute refers to elements that control the representation style to be used for hatching. See Automatic Hatching.

3.5.11

Change Ruleset Reference

The CRSF (Change Ruleset Reference) attribute refers to elements that control the representation styles to be used for changed design items and annotations. See Change Highlighting.

3.5.12

Arc Tolerance
The ATOL attribute controls the Arc Tolerance (the difference between the true and the facetted representation of curves) of the graphical output for the VIEW, being set in units of hundredths of a millimetre on the drawing. (Default value 15.)

3.5.13

View Gap Length

The VGAP attribute allows you to define the size of the gap that DRAFT inserts in View lines where they are crossed by non-solid primitives such as Plines, centrelines, DRAWIs, etc. The default value is 1.5mm.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.6

More on the AUTO Command

Previous sections have described the use of the AUTO command to add Design elements to views. There are two other uses of AUTO: AUTO LIMITS OF /idlist_name Here the VIEWs VSCA and THPO attributes are calculated using only the LIMI attribute of the referenced Id List, ignoring any Design items in the VIEW. If the Id List name is omitted, the Id List relevant to the VIEW is assumed.

AUTO FROM position TO position

The VIEWs VSCA and THPO attributes are calculated from the box defined by the two 3D coordinates given. The position may be specified using the cursor (3D point or p-point), explicit p-point reference, origin of a named element, or an explicit 3D coordinate.

3.7

Hidden Line Representation

The VTYP (view type) command controls the hidden-line representation of displayed pictures. Five possible VTYP settings are provided. These give progressively greater graphical accuracy at the expense of increasing processing requirements. This facility allows you to produce preliminary and intermediate drawings (where graphical accuracy may be of secondary importance) quickly, leaving only finished drawings to incur the greatest processing overhead. The default VTYP setting is WIRELINE, which gives a conventional wireline picture as shown in Figure 3:6.: Typical Wireline Picture.

Figure 3:6.

Typical Wireline Picture

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Modelled Wireline representation gives slightly greater realism by blending the intersection of primitives, but without incurring the computational overheads of removing hidden lines. Figure 3:7.: Typical Modelled Wireline picture shows a modelled wireline display.

Figure 3:7.

Typical Modelled Wireline picture

Local Hidden Line representation gives a picture where hidden lines are removed from individual significant elements (EQUI, SUBS etc), but not from items hidden behind them. This gives a picture as shown in Figure 3:8.: Typical Local Hidden Lines Removed picture.

Figure 3:8.

Typical Local Hidden Lines Removed picture

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Global Hidden Line representation gives a picture where all hidden lines are removed, giving a picture as shown in Figure 3:9.: Typical Global Hidden Lines Removed picture.

Figure 3:9.

Typical Global Hidden Lines Removed picture

Universal representation (see Figure 3:10.: UNIVERSAL VIEW Type) gives a picture where all hidden lines are removed (as in Global HLR), but in addition intersection lines between clashing significant elements (e.g. EQUI and STRU or SUBS and SUBS) are generated. Whether you will need to use this View type will depend on the way in which you have created the model. The need for VTYP UNIVERSAL will be greater if the model is composed of a large number of significant elements each with a small number of primitives, rather than vice versa. It is also more likely to be needed in non-orthogonal Views, where missing intersection lines are most noticeable.

Global hidden line

Universal hidden line (each primitive must be owned by a different significant element)

Figure 3:10. UNIVERSAL VIEW Type

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Alternative methods of setting VTYP are as follows:

VTYP WIRE VTYP MWIR VTYP LOCAL VTYP GLOBAL VTYP UNIV

wireline (default) modelled wireline local hidden lines removed global hidden lines removed global hidden lines removed and intersection lines generated

3.8
3.8.1

2D Symbolic Representation
Introduction
DRAFT allows design elements to be represented symbolically in a 2D View when the UPDATE DESIGN command is executed. Symbolic representation may either replace or be in addition to the normal geometric representation of the elements. Design symbols can consist of geometrical elements or text or can be a combination of both, including DRAFT Intelligent Text hash-codes. Design symbols can be scaled and oriented as required. Graphic representation of design elements are controlled by Representation Rules; these are described in Representation Rules. The 2D symbols are generated from templates stored in the DRAFT database. These are the Symbol Templates (SYTM) and the Text Label Templates (TXTM), used for generation of geometric elements or text elements, respectively. Refer to Basic Hierarchy for a diagram of the DRAFT database hierarchy. The data defining which templates to use for a given design element, and under which circumstances, is stored in the Catalogue database. This allows several templates to be associated with a design element so that it can be represented differently in different types of Views. The representation of a light fitting, for example, could depend on both the View direction (i.e. plan or elevation) and the View classification (e.g. Room Design, Cabling, etc). The design symbols are created as Design Symbol (DESSYM) database elements. DESSYM is a soft-type variant of the Special Label (SLAB) element. The DESSYM elements are added as members of a Design Symbol Layer (DSLAYE) element, which is a soft-type variant of the Layer (LAYE) element, and is therefore a member of a View. Only one occurrence of DSLAYE will be created per View during the UPDATE DESIGN process, and the DSLAYE will be removed if it subsequently ceases to own any child DESSYMs. From the above it can be seen that 2D symbols are created as part of the annotation of the View, rather than design graphics. DSLAYEs and DESSYMs are created and deleted automatically by DRAFT, with no user control over these operations. DESSYMs will not be created for any design item whose origin falls outside the View rectangle or whose origin (or datum point) is excluded by the action of section planes. Where only a symbolic representation is required (i.e. when a normal geometric representation is not required in addition to design symbols), DRAFT will not attempt to determine whether the design items would have been hidden by the action of the Hidden Line Removal process.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.8.2

Scaling Design Symbols

2D symbols can be specified as scaled or non-scaled. The size of a scaled symbol depends upon the View Scale (VSCA attribute of the View), and will therefore change correspondingly when the View Scale changes (and after an UPDATE DESIGN command). Non-scaled symbols are a fixed size, irrespective of View Scale and paper size. The Scaling Flag (SCALFG) of a design element has the value 1 when the design symbol can be scaled within a view and zero it is non-scaled. For non-scaled design symbols which reference a symbol template (SYTM), the array elements of the XY scaling (XYSC) attribute of the design symbol are set equal to the NSIZE attribute of the referenced SYTM. For a scaled design symbol which references an SYTM, the actual size on the sheet will depend on the View Scale. The NSIZE attribute is used to scale the symbol to its actual size on the sheet and, by setting the array elements of the XYSC attribute equal to the VSCALE attribute of the View, this will adjust the symbol to the appropriate size for the View (uniform scaling). Setting and X and Y scaling factors of XYSC independently on the Design Symbol Link (DRSYLK) element enables non-uniform scaling of the design symbol. This enables the design symbol (DESSYM) held in the PADD database to be scaled to the correct size for the design element that it is intended to replace in the DRAFT View, regardless of the aspect ratio of that design element.

3.8.3

Orienting Design Symbols

The correct orientation of a DESSYM in a DRAFT View is obtained by copying the value of the P-point Direction (PPDI) attribute from the Symbol Template (SYTM) or Text Label Template (TXTM) to the PPDI attribute of the DESSYM. This allows the 2D Symbology functionality to use the direction of the P-point, which is determined by the P-point direction (PTCD) attribute on the P-point element, to align the X-axis of the SYTM or TXTM. SYTMs and TXTMs are created and modified in DRAFT Administration Mode. In addition the system administrator must associate the SYTM and TXTM with orientation of the component in the Catalogue that the DESSYM will represent. This is achieved either by selecting an existing P-point on the Catalogue component, or by creating a new P-point. Then the value of the PPDI attribute on the SYTM or TXTM is set to the value of the P-point Number (%NUM) attribute on the Catalogue component.

3.9
3.9.1

Querying Commands
Querying View Contents
You can query which Design elements are visible in a specified DRAFT View using the Q VSCAN command. You can: Request a list of all significant elements that are visible in a View. Q VSCAN SIGNIFicant IN view_id For example:

Q VSCAN SIGNIF IN /VIEW-01

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Specify a significant design element and request a list of all its primitives that are visible in a View. Q VSCAN design_id IN view_id For example:

Q VSCAN /PIPE100-B-1-B1
Specify selection criteria to determine matching design elements visible in a View. Q VSCAN FOR selection_criteria IN view_id For example:

Q VSCAN FOR ALL (VALVE VTWAY VFWAY) WITH (ABOR GE 50)

In the above examples, design_id must refer to a Design significant element, which is EQUI, SUBE, STRU, SUBS, FRMW, SBFR, TMPL, BRAN, or HANG. The IN view_id may be omitted if your current database position is at or below a View. DRAFT determines whether design items are visible by scanning the data in the picture, not by scanning the IDList. Thus elements hidden by the hidden-line-removal process will not be found. This command cannot determine how much of the element is visible. Note: A significant Design element will not be found in a View if it only owns other significant elements. It must own visible primitives. This affects EQUI, STRU and FRMW elements; they will not be found unless they own visible primitives.

3.9.2

Querying Whether an Element Appears in a View

You can query whether low-level design elements and their owners appear in a given View using the command: Q FIND gid IN view where gid is the general identifier of the element and view is the view identifier. For example:

Q FIND /BOX99 IN /SH1/V1 Q FIND /VESS-05 IN VIEW Q FIND ILEAVE TUBE OF /VALVE-24 IN /VIEW/02
The view identifier can be omitted if it is the current element. For example:

Q FIND /BRANCH-01
Possible answers are:

FOUND MISSING INVALID ELEMENT

Note: A significant Design element will not be found in a View if it only owns other significant elements. It must own visible primitives. This affects EQUI, STRU and FRMW elements; they will not be found unless they own visible primitives.

3.9.3

Querying the Nearest Side to an Item

You can query the nearest side of a View to a given P-point, proportional distance along a Pline, or origin of a Design element in the current View using the command: Q VSIDE [ROTated] OF 3d_point_definition

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

For example:

Q Q Q Q

VSIDE VSIDE VSIDE VSIDE

OF OF OF OF

/VESS-99 PPO2 OF /VALVE-100 PPLINE TOS OF /SCTN-101 START PPLINE MEML OF /SCTN-101 PROP 0.5

The ROTATED option allows the rotation (i.e. the VIEWs RCOD attribute) to be considered if required. The response will be the nearest and next-nearest sides, and also whether the item is inside or outside the View. For example, Point 1 in Figure 3:11.: Querying the nearest side to an item will be LEFT UP OUTSIDE.

Figure 3:11.

Querying the nearest side to an item

3.10
3.10.1

Background Process Manager

Introduction
A facility is provided to allow updating a design to take place as a background process. This allows you to carry on with your work while updating is performed. When required, other views can be worked on, including Views in the same Sheet, while the background process is running. Background processes are managed using the Background Process Queue Manger (BPM). The foreground design session and the BPM do not need to be active at the same time. For example, the design session could submit any number of design updates as background processes, before the BPM is even started. The two processes are completely independent; the queue manager can run overnight, for example. Background processes are run one at a time. Once a background process has been completed, you will be notified. A design session must then be started in order to refresh the updated Design view, as picture files are not updated directly by the process. Each BPM job updates a single VIEW, or multiple VIEWs contained in a SHEET, or the total set of VIEWs contained in multiple SHEETs of a DRAWING. Since the output is a set of individual VIEW files, they may be imported to refresh existing VIEWs selectively, or collectively for the owning SHEET or DRAWING. Facilities are provided to cancel and delete jobs as well as purging unwanted files.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.10.2

Prerequisites
Certain environment variable settings must be defined before the BPM can be used: PDMSEXE, since it contains the module to be executed in the background. PDMSWK, since it contains the job XML file, the PDMS macro, the regenerated VIEW files and the DRAFT log file. It also contains the BPM log file. The project environment variables XXX000, XXXISO, XXXMAC and XXXPIC must be defined for each project XXX to which the BPM is applied.

A batch file BPM.bat is supplied to enable the above environment variables automatically and to start the BPM in much the same way as PDMS.bat enables to PDMS environment variables.

3.10.3

Initiating and Using the BPM

The actions to initiate a background process are as follows: 1. In the DRAFT module, navigate to the VIEW (or SHEET or DRAWING) to be updated. 2. Set and save the viewing parameters, using a SAVEWORK command. 3. Issue an UPDATE applicationware. DESIGN NOWAIT command, normally via associated

4. The system then creates an entry in the BPM queue and returns immediately for the next action. 5. Once started, the BPM reads the next entry in the queue and creates a hidden DRAFT session running in the background to run the job. To avoid unlimited multiple copies of DRAFT being initiated, a process only starts after the previous one has finished. (How to start the BPM is described below.) 6. For each job the background DRAFT session performs a special UPDATE DESIGN command that generates and stores each new VIEW in a separate intermediate view file or IVF. This is a picture file prefixed with the letter X instead of the standard M. 7. Once the process has finished, a notification is raised, which is signalled by an icon in the Windows notification toolbar. Each background DRAFT session started by the BPM writes a standard PDMS log file to the PDMSWK folder. The log file has the same name as the initiating XML job file but with the .log extension. 8. You may then re-enter foreground DRAFT and navigate back to the original VIEW (SHEET or DRAWING) to load the new picture. Each VIEW updated by the BPM will generate its own IVF. This enables you to refresh selected VIEWs only (or a SHEET or a DRAWING). 9. Issue an UPDATE REFRESH command to refresh the current VIEW (SHEET or DRAWING). 10. If the refreshed VIEWs are acceptable, you may save them permanently using a SAVEWORK, as usual. Note: If a refreshed VIEW is unacceptable, you should NOT issue a SAVEWORK to save it permanently. Instead, the original SHEET should be re-selected to re-load the old contents. Be careful to save any outstanding changes to other VIEWs in the same SHEET before refreshing another VIEW. To start and use the Background Process Manager: 1. Initiate the BPM by invoking the BPM.bat start-up file.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

2. The Background Process Manager form then appears, which displays details of each job together with its Status of Not Started or Finished and an exit code showing success or failure. See Managing Jobs using the Background Process Manager Form for details of the Background Process Manager form. 3. Processing of Not Started jobs is initiated from the Background Process Manager form. The form shows the job currently running and provides facilities to start job processing or stopping the current job, as required. 4. When one or more jobs appear in the job list, click on the Start manager hyperlink to start the processing of jobs with Status Not Started. Note that the hyperlink changes to Stop manager at this point. The Background Process Manager form may be iconised at this point. 5. Once the process for a job has finished, the Background Process notification icon appears in the notification area on the Windows task bar. 6. The Background Process Manager form may then be restored, if necessary, to view the updated Status and Exit Codes. An exit code of Success means that the updated VIEW (SHEET or DRAWING) can be refreshed into the foreground DRAFT session. 7. The Background Process Manager form can then be minimised and the Background Process notification icon cleared by right-clicking on it and then selecting the Clear Item option. 8. The next waiting job is then started automatically. 9. Once the BPM is in the Stopped state it may be exited using the File>Exit menu selection. A log file of the processing is saved to the PDMSWK folder and is called

BPM_ddmmyyyy_hhmmss.log
where: ddmmyyyy is the standard date and hhmmss is the standard time that the process was started. The log file should contain a record of all processing in the Background Process session, including errors.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

3.10.4

Managing Jobs using the Background Process Manager Form

Tabbed Windows
The Manager log tabbed window contains the BPM log of jobs processed. The Job tabbed window is used to display the log file of the finished job. To select a finished job double-click on the appropriate row in the job list table or right-click on View log (see below).

Cancel, Delete and Purge

Jobs may be managed collectively by using the File pull-down menu (see below) or individually by selecting the job from the table of jobs and selecting from the right-mouse button menu.

Managing Jobs Collectively

The File pull-down menu is used for this. The options are: Start manager starts the processing of the jobs currently listed - changes to Stop Manager. Stop manager stops the processing of the jobs currently listed - changes to Start Manager. Purge finished jobs purges all jobs with status Finished and deletes corresponding XML, MAC and LOG files.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Refresh refreshes the job list table, i.e. clears it and then repopulates it from scratch. Delete all jobs deletes all jobs irrespective of their status. Exit exits the BPM.

Managing Jobs Locally

The right-mouse button menu options on a row in the job list table are used for this. View log displays the log file of the selected job in the Manager log tabbed window. Cancel job cancels the selected job. Restart job restarts the selected job. Delete job deletes the selected job.

3.11
3.11.1

Summary of Commands
At Id List . . .
ADD design_element_identifier [design_element_identifier...] adds Design element to Id List. REM design_element_identifier [design_element_identifier...] removes Design element from Id List ADD ALL design_element_identifier FOR design_element_identifier REM ALL design_element_identifier WITH ( selection_criteria ) FOR design_element_identifier DESADD design_element_identifier [design_element_identifier...] adds Design element to 3D View. DESREMOVE design_element_identifier [design_element_identifier...] removes Design element from 3D View ADD ALL design_element_identifier FOR design_element_identifier LIMITS E value N value U value E value N value U value removes Design elements from ID List that are not wholly or partially contained within defined limits box. LIMITS @ TO @ set limits as 3D coords with the cursor LIMITS ID @ ID @ set limits as 3D coords via Design elements using the cursor

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

DELETE ENTRY number delete either an ADDE or REME from the Id List members - the number is the member list number DELETE ADD number delete an Add item, number corresponding to number of the element out of the Adds only DELETE REM number delete a Remove item, number corresponding to the number of the element out of the Removes only

3.11.2

At DRWG and below . . .

UPDATE DESIGN updates picture to latest VIEW and Design parameters UPDATE DESIGN IGNORE as UPDATE DESIGN, but deleted design elements (specified in Id List) ignored (and UPDATE process does not abort) UPDATE DESIGN NOWAIT initiates a Background Process (see Background Process Manager). Full syntax is: UPDATE DESIGN [IGNORE] [SHOW CHANGES | NOCHECK] NOWAIT UPDATE REFRESH refreshes the current view after a Background Process (see Background Process Manager). UPDATE ANNO updates Drawing annotation (including Backing Sheets) to latest Design data and VIEW attributes UPDATE BSHEETS updates Backing Sheets. Ensures that the latest version of the referenced BACK is used. Also, will re-evaluate hash codewords on it. UPDATE ALL updates annotation, tag rules and Design graphics (but only for that part of the picture file determined by the level in the hierarchy at which the command is used). UPDATE ALL IGNORE as above, but deleted design elements (specified in Id List) ignored (and UPDATE process does not abort) Full syntax is: UPDATE [IGNORE] [OVERWRITE] [SHOW CHANGES | NOCHECK] NOWAIT (The above commands can be given from anywhere in the hierarchy if an appropriate element identifier is inserted after the UPDATE keyword.)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

The UPDATE DESIGN, UPDATE ANNO and UPDATE ALL commands can be specified with the option SHOW CHANGES, for example UPDATE DESIGN SHOW CHANGES. Database changes will be shown in the manner defined by the View's Change Ruleset. For more information see Change Highlighting. This option is only valid at View elements or above, it cannot be used for a Layer, say. UPDATE PICTURE regenerates Sheet level picture. Updates annotation graphics (but not Design graphics). Use only when the picture file is corrupted. DRAFT will prompt the user when this is necessary. Use at Sheet level or equivalent.)

3.11.3

At VIEW . . .
SIZE xvalue yvalue set VIEW size in mm with origin at default i.e. centre of Sheet. Min, Max, x,y values are 1 mm, 3276 mm respectively. SIZE paper_size set VIEW size to a standard paper size, e.g. SIZE A2 VREGION @ set VIEW size and position using cursor VREGION FROM X value Y value TO X value Y value set VIEW size and position explicitly VREGION corner move VIEW using specified corner to position: TL top left TR top right BL bottom left BR bottom right C centre VREGION VERTICAL direction set VIEW (vertical axis) orientation: U up D down L left R right AT @ position VIEW origin in Sheet using cursor AUTO design_element_identifier set VIEW Scale and Through Point through design_element_identifier and scale to fit AUTO idlist_name set VIEW Scale, Through Point and Id List reference. If idlist_name is omitted the IDLI relevant to the VIEW is assumed.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:25

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

AUTO LIMITS OF /idlist_name use limits box of Id List to define VIEW AUTO FROM position TO position use specified limits box to define view. The VIEWs VSCA and THPO attributes are calculated from the box defined by the two 3D co-ordinates specified by position. (position includes cursor specification of a 3D point or p-point, explicit p-point reference, origin of a named element, or an explicit 3D coord.) VSCALE value set Scale of VIEW THPO E value N value U value (or LOOK THROUGH ...) set Through Point of VIEW in 3D coords THPO ID @ (or LOOK THROUGH ...) set Through Point as Design element p-point (converted to 3D coord) FRPO E value N value U value (or LOOK FROM ...) set From Point of VIEW in 3D coords FRPO @ (or LOOK FROM ...) set From Point in 3D coords with cursor FRPO ID @ (or LOOK FROM ...) set From Point as Design element p-point (converted to 3D coord) ONPO xvalue yvalue position the Through Point relative to the VIEW origin ONPO @ position the Through Point relative to the VIEW origin using the cursor TURN value (or ADEG value) rotate VIEW anticlockwise VTYP option set VIEW type. Options: WIRE, MWIR, LOCAL, GLOB, UNIV LOOK value (or DIR value) set VIEW direction ISO value set isometric VIEW direction

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:26

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

PLAN set plan VIEW direction ELEV option set elevation VIEW direction options: N, E, S and W PERSPECTIVE angle set VIEW perspective ATOL value set arc tolerance RRSF name set reference to Representation Ruleset (RRST) element RCOD option set rotation code. Options: UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT (default UP) Q VIEWDIR option query 3D view direction equivalent to 2D Sheet direction LFRA option set visibility of VIEW frame FRAME option Options: TRUE or FALSE (LFRA) ON or OFF (FRAME). LVIS FALSE makes the VIEW invisible LVIS TRUE makes the VIEW visible (default) Q VLIMITS gives 3D limits of View (View must be orthogonal, with no perspective)

3.11.4

Anywhere . . .
DELETE NULL IDLI deletes all ADDE and REME elements whose IDNM attribute is null or which references an unknown element

3.11.5

Querying Contents of a View

Q FIND gid IN view queries whether a design element appears in a given View Q VSCAN SIGNIFicant IN view_id Outputs a list of all significant elements that are visible in a View

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:27

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Drawing the Design

Q VSCAN design_id IN view_id Specify a significant design element and request a list of all its primitives that are visible in a View. Q VSCAN FOR selection_criteria IN view_id Specify selection criteria to determine matching design elements visible in a View Q VSIDE [ROTated] OF 3d_point_definition queries the nearest side, nextnearest side, and whether the item is inside or outside the View. 3d_point_definition can be p-point, proportional distance along a pline, or origin of a Design element in the current View. The ROTATED option allows the VIEW rotation (i.e. the VIEWs RCOD attribute) to be considered if required.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

3:28

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

4
4.1

Graphical Representation
Introduction
Representation Rules control how Design elements are drawn. Each Rule can specify a given type or types of element, or named elements. Representation Rules refer to Styles. The attributes of a Style define a series of drawing styles and colours, for example, for frontface, backface and centreline, and whether items such as p-lines and obstruction volumes are shown. For more information about styles and colours see Colours and Styles. Representation Rules also control which design elements are to be replaced by symbols when a 2D View is created. For a description of 2D symbology, refer to 2D Symbolic Representation. Representation Rules can be created in a Library and be referred to from a VIEW, or they can be owned directly by a VIEW, in which case they are known as local rules. Local Rules override Library Rules. See Local Rules for more information about the order in which Rules are applied. Representation Rules (RRUL) are stored in Representation Rulesets (RRST), which in turn are owned by Representation Libraries (RPLB). RPLBs are also used to store STYLs. The reference from an RRUL to a STYL is made by setting the STYF attribute of the RRUL. When a View references a RRST, the reference is made by setting the RRSF attribute of the View.

Figure 4:1.

Representation Rules Database Hierarchy

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

This Section also describes Hatching Rules, which are used for automatic hatching of faces of Design elements. See Automatic Hatching. For details of how changes to design elements can be shown see Change Highlighting.

4.2

Representation Styles
The Representation Style (STYL) defines the appearance of the elements specified by a RRUL that references it. The STYL attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Tube flag Centreline flag Piping Symbol flag Obstruction flag Insulation flag Profile flag P-line flag Drawing Level Frontface Style/Colour Centreline Style/Colour Backface Style/Colour Obscured Style/Colour P-line Style/Colour Member line Style/Colour TUBEF CLIN PSYM OBSTF INSU PRFG PLFG DLEV FFSTYLE/FFCOLOUR CLSTYLE/CLCOLOUR BFSTYLE/BFCOLOUR OBSTYLE/OBCOLOUR PLNSTYLE/PLNCOLOUR MLNSTYLE/MLNCOLOUR OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0 SOLID/1 CHAIN/1 OFF OFF LDASH/1 OFF

TUBEF, CLIN, PRFG, PLFG, PSYM, OBSTF and DLEV are standard PDMS display representation controls and are not described here. (See the DESIGN Reference Manual for details.) If INSU is ON, Piping Component Insulation will be drawn using the frontface style and colour (FFSTYLE/FFCOLOUR). The outline of the piping Components will be hidden by the insulation in hidden-line views. If insulation and Components are required to be displayed, two similar views (that use different Styles) will need to be defined and superimposed. The style/colour attributes allow different parts of chosen items to be drawn differently, and are used as follows: Frontface Style/Colour. In wireline VIEWs these attributes control the style and colour to be used to represent all edges. All edges are shown, except for holes that will be drawn with a dashed line of the same colour as the FFCOLOUR. Set directly, for example:

FFSTYLE SOLID M FFCOLOUR 1

Use a SOLID line of MEDIUM thickness and Colour 1 for the frontface

FFSTYLE may be set to OFF to allow special effects.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

Centreline Style/Colour. These attributes control the style and colour to be used for representing centrelines. Also used for drawing LINE elements of Catalogue Components. When drawing pipework with TUBEF ON, CENTRELINE ON, the centreline will not be obscured by the piping Components. (Unlike FFSTYLE, it is not necessary to superimpose two VIEWs with different Styles.

DRAWI elements owned by EQUI, SUBE, STRU, SUBS, or PTRA will be drawn using the centreline style/colour of the STYL specified. For these DRAWIs the setting of the STYLs centreline flag (CLFG) will be ignored even though the centreline style/colour is used; the LEVEL attribute should be used to control whether the DRAWI appears on the drawing. Set directly, e.g.

CKSTYLE DASHED CLCOLOUR 1

Use a DASHED line of minimum thickness and Colour 1 for centrelines

Backface Style/Colour. In hidden line VIEWs, these attributes control the style and colour to be used to draw the rear edges of items (set to OFF by default). Set directly, e.g.

BFSTYLE DOT BFCOLOUR 1

Use a DOTTED line of minimum thickness and Colour 1 for the backface

BFSTYLE would normally be set OFF for hidden line VIEWs, but if required can be used to set the style and colour to be used for drawing the rear edges of items. These attributes have no effect in wireline views. See Figure 4:2.: Use of Backface Style/Colour (shown dotted) for an example of the use of the Backface Style/Colour.

Figure 4:2.

Use of Backface Style/Colour (shown dotted)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

Obscured Style/Colour. In global hidden line VIEWs, these attributes control the style and colour to be used to draw the front-facing edges of items that would otherwise be obscured by other objects (set to OFF by default). Set directly, e.g.

OBSTYLE DOT OBCOLOUR 1

use a DOTTED line of minimum thickness and Colour 1 for obscured front facing edges

These attributes have no effect in wireline and local hidden line VIEWs. See Figure 4:3.: Use of the Obscured Style/Colour (shown dotted) for an example of the use of the Obscured Style/Colour.

Figure 4:3.

Use of the Obscured Style/Colour (shown dotted)

P-line Style/Colour. This attribute controls the style and colour to be used to draw plines. Set directly, for example:

PLNSTYLE CHAINED PLNCOLOUR 1

Use CHAINED lines of minimum thickness and Colour 1 for p-lines

PLNSTYLE may be set to OFF. Member line Style/Colour. These attributes control the style and colour to be used to draw SCTN and GENSEC member lines. Set directly, for example:

MLNSTYLE SOLIDT MLNCOLOUR 1

Use a SOLID line of thickness 0.4mm and Colour 1 for member lines

MLNSTYLE may be set to OFF.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

P-line and member line styles and colours apply only to drawing steelwork Section elements. See Colours and Styles for a description of colour and linestyle functionality.

4.3
4.3.1

Representation Rules
Introduction
The Representation Ruleset owns a series of Representation Rules, each of which contains a reference to a different Representation Style. A Ruleset can therefore be used to produce several graphical representations of the same VIEW. An example of the commands for setting up a Ruleset is:

NEW RRST /RSET1 NEW RRUL /R11 USE /S2 FOR crit

- create Ruleset - create Rule - set Style reference (STYF). /S2 must already exist; crit = Design element name or selection criteria

When more than one Rule is created, the order of the command sequence is important. Consider the command sequences: Sequence 1 Sequence 2

NEW RRUL /R1 USE /S2 FOR ALL EQUIP NEW RRUL /R2 USE /S2 FOR ALL NOZZ

NEW RRUL /R1 USE /S2 FOR ALL NOZZ NEW RRUL /R2 USE /S1 FOR ALL EQUIP

Sequence 1 would result in Nozzles being drawn according to style /S1, sequence 2 would give Nozzles in style /S2. You can also assign a style reference to an individual named Design element or a series of named elements, for example:

USE /S2 FOR /PUMP1-1 /VESS1

Note: That the Design element must have a name: identifiers such as CE, FIRST EQUI, STRU 4 etc. cannot be used. Representation Rules can reference IDLIsts, using expressions if required. For example:

USE /STYLE1 FOR /LIST24 /LIST25 USE /STYLE2 FOR ALL IDLISTS WITH ( FUNC EQ 'STEAM' )
Once a Rule has been created, and a style set, the selection criteria can be changed without specifying the style by giving the command:

USE FOR crit

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

Example:

USE FOR ALL BRAN WITH ( HBORE LE 80 )

Alternatively, the CRIT attribute can be set explicitly; Example:

CRIT ALL BRAN WITH ( HBORE LE 80 )

You can set up a rule to omit elements from a selection. For example, the following Rules (in the given order) will have the effect of drawing all Branches in Style S2 except small bore Branches, which will not be drawn at all:

NEW RRUL /SMALLBORE OMIT ALL BRAN WITH ( HBORE LE 80 AND TBORE LT 30 ) NEW RRUL /BRANCHES USE /S2 FOR ALL BRAN
Named elements can also be omitted: Example:

OMIT /EQUIP99
The OMIT command sets the OMITFG attribute of the Rule, which automatically unsets the STYF of the Rule. DRAFT determines the style to use from a particular element by scanning through the list of RRULs (in database order) until a selection criteria is matched. If DRAFT is unable to find a relevant rule for a component the default style will be used. This is:

Tube Off Centreline On Profile Off Pline On Drawing Level 0 Ffstyle SOLID Ffcolour 1 Clstyle CHAINED Clcolour 1 Other drawing styles Off

4.3.2

Representation Rules for 2D Symbology

The syntax for defining Representation Rules to control how 2D Symbology is implemented is as follows: USE SYMBOLOGY FOR crit USE SYMBOLOGY AND style-name FOR crit sets the Style Reference (STYF) attribute

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

where crit = the design element name or selection criteria style-name = the name of the style (STYL) to be used to draw the Design element Note that the & character can be used as an alternative to AND in the above. For example, to create a Representation Rule to use 2D Symbology for an office table, the following might to used: NEW RRUL /SYMB_RRUL_OFFICE_TABLE USE SYMBOLOGY &/DRA/PRJ/STYL/STEEL/NORMAL FOR /OFFICE-TABLE For a description of the use of 2D Symbology to represent Design elements, see 2D Symbolic Representation.

4.3.3

Selective Style Allocation

Style references may be applied selectively using PML expressions, for example:: USE /S3 FOR ALL BRAN WITH (PSPE EQ /RF150 ) USE S4 FOR ALL BRAN WITH ((HBORE LE 50) OR (TBORE LE 50) USE S5 FOR ALL BRAN WITH ((HBORE GT 80) AND (TBORE GT 80) USE /S6 FOR ALL BRAN WI ((PSPE EQ /RF200) AND ((HBOR GT 60) OR (TBOR GT 60))) USE /S7 FOR ALL SCTN WI (CUTL GT 5000) USE /STYLE1 FOR ALL BRAN WI (ISPE EQ NULREF) Note: For full details of using expressions, see the AVEVA DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 1 General Commands. The comparators available are: EQ, NE, LT, LE, GE, GT (although in some instances only EQ and NE are valid). Each logical expression can be preceded by NOT, for example:

WI (PSPE EQ /RF300 AND NOT BUILT)

The operands on either side of a comparator are interchangeable, for example:

WI (PSPE EQ /RF300 WI (ABORE GT 80)

is equivalent to is equivalent to

WI /RF300 EQ PSPE WI 80 LE ABORE

Note: That it is possible to apply a selection criterion to a list of class types by enclosing them in brackets, for example: USE /ST1 FOR (ALL BRAN ALL SUBS) WI (ZONE EQ /ZONE.PIPES) Without the brackets the selection criterion would only be applied to SUBS. Selection criteria should not be used unnecessarily. For example, if you wish to draw small-bore Branches in style /ST1 and the rest in style /ST2, it is only necessary to say:

USE /ST1 FOR ALL BRAN WI (HBOR LE 80 OR TBOR LE 80) USE /ST2 FOR ALL BRAN

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

As long as the criteria are defined in this order, all small-bore Branches will match the first criterion and the rest, having failed to match the first criterion, will match the second.

4.3.4

Local Rules
Local Rules may be set up as VIEW members in the same way as Library rules; the resulting graphical representation is determined as follows: Local Rules always have priority over Rules within Rulesets in Libraries. A Rules priority is determined by its position in the list; the higher in list the higher its priority, but a Local Rule will still have a higher priority than the top Ruleset Rule.

This means that you should always place the more specific rules earlier in the list.

4.3.5

Setting the VIEW

Once the Rulesets and Styles have been set up, it is just a matter of setting the VIEW attribute RRSF to point to the Ruleset that you wish to use, and updating the design.

4.4
4.4.1

Automatic Hatching
Introduction
Model faces created by section planes, and surfaces of specified Design primitives can be hatched automatically by defining and applying Hatching Rules. The hatching is carried out automatically as part of the Update Design process. For more information on Section planes see Section Planes. The Hatching Rules (HRUL elements) define the faces to be hatched, and they reference Hatching Styles (HSTYL elements). Hatching Styles define the styles and colours to be used to draw the hatching. Hatching Rules are stored in Hatching Rulesets (HRST elements). Hatching Rules and Rulesets are similar to Representation Rules and Rulesets. Hatching Styles and Rulesets are stored in RPLBs. Local Hatching Rules can be defined by creating HRULs owned directly by Views. The Local Hatching Rules directly reference Hatching Styles (HSTYL). The hierarchy of database elements for hatching is similar to the Representation Rules, and allows you to impose company or project drawing standards. Hatched areas can be auto-blanked to allow annotation placed on top of them to be legible. See Autoblanking.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

Figure 4:4.

Hatching Rule Database Hierarchy

4.4.2

Hatching Rules
Each Hatching Rule references a Hatch Style element that defines the hatch pattern to be applied. For each Hatch Rule you can specify: Whether it applies to faces created by a section plane or to primitive surfaces. The orientation of the faces to be considered for hatching. There are three options: All Directions, in which case the face will be hatched regardless of its orientation. Perpendicular Direction, in which case the face will only be hatched if it is perpendicular to the viewing direction. Specified Direction, in which case the face will only be hatched if its normal matches a specified value. The normal of a face is the vector perpendicular to it and pointing out of the solid primitive. Thus the normal of the uppermost horizontal surface of a box is Up.

The HRUL attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Hatch Style Ref Face Code Direction Code Face Normal Selection Criteria HSTYF FCODE DCODE NORM CRIT reference to HSTYL, default null Sectioned-Faces All-Directions unset unset

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

Example:

HSTYF /HSTYL1 FCODE SECTionedfaces FCODE PRIMitivefaces DCODE ALL Directions DCODE PERPendiculardirection DCODE SPECifieddirection NORM standard AVEVA direction syntax CRIT standard AVEVA selection criteria syntax
As well as the usual NEW command, an HRUL can also be defined by:

USE hstyl FOR criteria

which will set the HSTYF and CRIT attributes.

4.4.3

Which Elements can be Hatched

Significant elements (BRAN, EQUI, SUBS, FRMW, etc) are sectioned, not their primitives, and so a Hatch Rule that applies to Sectioned Faces must select on significant elements. If it selects on BOXes or VALVs (say) no hatching will be applied. For example, you could define three Hatching Rules for to a View to apply different hatching patterns to concrete and steel items cut by a section plane, and a different hatching pattern again to the top surfaces of panels representing an escape route. A Hatch Rule can only be applied to Sectioned Faces or Primitive Surfaces, not both. Only one Hatch Rule can be applied to a Design element. This means, for example, that you cannot hatch both types of face of a Design element, and it is not possible to hatch differently the three surfaces of a BOX element that are visible in an isometric View.

4.4.4

Hatching Styles
Each Hatching Style defines two style/colour pairs, either style may be set OFF. The Fill Style and Fill Colour (FSTYLE and FCOLOUR) attributes define the hatch pattern to be applied to the selected faces. The Outline Style and Outline Colour (OLSTYLE and OLCOLOUR) attributes define the lines that may be drawn around the edges of the faces. For example, it is possible to emphasise an area by drawing a thick line around it without actually hatching it. For more information about hatch-patterns see Hatching Rules. The HSTYL attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Outline Style Outline Colour Fill Style Fill Colour Pipe-end Symbol Flag OLSTYLE OLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR PIPESYM Off Colour 1 SYSTEM PATTERN 1 Colour 1 TRUE

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

By default, when a length of implied tubing or a DUCT or STRT (ducting straight) element is cut and the resulting face is circular or rectangular, DRAFT will generate a typical sectioned symbol rather than just apply the hatch pattern to the face:

Figure 4:5.

Typical Tubing Sectioned Symbols

The PIPESYM attribute of Hatching Styles allows this functionality to be suppressed and replaced by normal hatching.

4.4.5

The Hatch Pattern

The hatch pattern is composed of either Solid Fill, or one or two sets of lines all the same colour. The lines within a set are all parallel and equally spaced, and can only be straight, solid, and of a single-line thickness. Cross-hatching can be created using two sets of lines that are not parallel. Double-line hatching can be created using two sets of lines that are parallel. The parameters that define each set of lines (that is, angle, separation, offset from sheet origin) are absolute, that is, they are unaffected by factors such as Sheet size, View scale, or View orientation. For more information on hatch patterns, see Fill Styles. Note: Hatching in Isometric Views may not be entirely satisfactory. For example, there is no way of altering the hatching parameters to suit the orientation of the face hatched, and so the faces created by a stepped section plane will all be hatched at the same angle and separation for a given Design element. The hatching of two connected faces will be continuous even though the faces will have different orientations in 3D space.

4.5
4.5.1

Querying Commands
Querying Rulesets and Styles

Q DESC Q RRSF DESC QSTYF FOR /design_element identifier

- at Ruleset or Rule - at VIEW - at VIEW or Ruleset

The last example returns the Style used for the specified design element, irrespective of the element type specified at the RRUL. A list of design element identifiers may be entered, optionally separated by commas.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

4.5.2

Querying Hatching Rulesets and Styles

The querying facilities are similar to those provided for RRULs. Thus at a HRUL: Q DESCription will output a description for that HRUL with the format: USE hstyl FOR criteria At a HRST: Q DESCription will output an ordered list of descriptions - one for each of its HRULs. At a VIEW: Q HRSF DESCription will output an ordered list of descriptions starting with those of the HRULs it owns & then those of the HRST it references. At a VIEW or HRST: Q HSTYF FOR design-id will return the HRUL that is relevant for the specified design item. The <design-id> may be repeated if the HRULs for a list of design items are required.

4.6
4.6.1

Summary of Commands
At Representation Rule . . .
USE SYMBOLOGY FOR crit Causes the Design elements defined by crit to be represented by 2D symbology only USE SYMBOLOGY AND stylename FOR crit Causes the Design elements defined by crit to be represented by both 2D symbology and 3D graphics. USE stylename FOR crit set drawing style for Design generic types, see above. CRITeria crit set the CRIT attribute for the current rule OMIT elements omits the elements specified, by name or type, which may be an expression, from the representation

4.6.2

At Representation Style . . .
FFSTYLE integer/line_pattern, FFCOLOUR integer/colour_name FFSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing edges (modelled wireline VIEWs) or visible (front face) edges (hidden-line VIEWs).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

BFSTYLE integer/line_pattern, BFCOLOUR integer/colour_name BFSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing rear edges of items (no effect in modelled wire line VIEWs). OBSTYLE integer/line_pattern, OBCOLOUR integer/colour_name OBSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing frontfacing edges of items that would otherwise be obscured by other objects (global hidden-line VIEWs only). CLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, CLCOLOUR integer/colour_name CLSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing centrelines. PLNSTYLE integer/line_pattern, PLNCOLOUR integer/colour_name PLNSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing p-lines MLNSTYLE integer/line_pattern, MLNCOLOUR integer/colour_name MLNSTYLE OFF set style and colour for drawing member lines PROFile ON PROFile OFF set profile flag PLINes ON PLINes OFF set p-line flag

4.6.3

At Hatching Rule . . .
USE hstylename FOR crit set hatching style for Design generic types, see above. CRITeria crit set the CRIT attribute for the current HRUL. FCODE SECTionedfaces Sectioned faces will be hatched. FCODE PRIMitivefaces Primitive faces will be hatched. DCODE ALLDirections All faces will be hatched, regardless of direction DCODE PERPendiculardirection Faces perpendicular to the viewing direction will be hatched. DCODE SPECifieddirection Faces whose normals match the direction specified in the NORM attribute of the HRUL will be hatched. The normal of a face is the vector perpendicular to it and

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Graphical Representation

pointing out of the solid primitive. Thus the normal of the uppermost horizontal surface of a box is Up. NORM direction Standard direction syntax

4.6.4

At Hatching Style . . .
OLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, OLCOLOUR integer/colour_name Set different style and colour for drawing outline of selected faces. OLSTYLE OFF Selected faces will not be outlined. FSTYLE integer/hatch_pattern, FCOLOUR integer/colour_name Set style and colour for hatching selected faces. FSTYLE SOLidfilled Selected faces will be filled with solid colour. FSTYLE OFF Selected faces will not be hatched. PIPESYM TRUE PIPESYM FALSE Pipe end symbols (or HVAC duct end symbols) will be drawn instead of hatching. PIPESYM TRUE PIPESYM FALSE Pipe ends (or HVAC duct ends) will be hatched.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

4:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

Section Planes
Note: There are extensive graphical facilities for creating and manipulating Section Planes in DRAFTs Graphical User Interface. See the Drawing Production User Guide for details.

5.1

Introduction
DRAFT gives you the ability to construct sections through specified Design items, the results of which can be displayed at VIEW level. All Planes are database items and can therefore be used with more than one VIEW. There are three types of Plane element that can be used to define four types of section plane, namely: A Perpendicular Flat Plane passes through a specified point in the 3D design, being oriented so as to be perpendicular to the current VIEW direction. The VIEW contents that are discarded can be on either side of the plane. This type of plane would be used as either a section or a backing plane. A Flat Plane is similar to a perpendicular flat plane, but can be oriented to allow views of the section from any angle. A Stepped Plane is a folded plane (i.e. a series of non-intersecting straight line spans) that extends to infinity in both directions along a specified axis. The shape is defined by a series of points, the ends of the plane also extending to infinity. The simplest form of stepped plane would be defined by two points and would be equivalent to a Flat Plane. Any VIEW direction can be used and the VIEW contents on either side can be discarded. Note that the two end spans must not intersect each other or an inner span. A stepped plane is illustrated in Figure 5:1.: Stepped Plane. An Enclosed Plane. This is a particular form of stepped plane in which the first and last points that define it coincide to form a tube that is infinitely long along its axis. Any VIEW direction can be used and either the inside or outside of the tube can be removed. An enclosed plane is illustrated in Figure 5:2.: Enclosed Plane.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

Figure 5:1.

Stepped Plane

Figure 5:2.

Enclosed Plane

All Planes have a standard retain and discard side, depending on how the Plane is defined in the database. The Plane can be used in either standard or reverse mode, which effectively switches the Planes action without altering its definition. This allows the Plane to be used in different VIEWs both as a section or backing plane. Planes can only be used with modelled VIEWs, that is not with basic wireline views.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

5.2

Creating and Using Planes

All Planes are created and held within a Library structure, and are owned by a Planes Library (PLLB) element. The part of the DRAFT database hierarchy relating to Planes is shown in Figure 5:3.: Database Hierarchy - Plane Elements.

LIBY

VIEW

PLLB

VSEC

PLRF PPLA FPLA SPLA

WPOS

Figure 5:3.

Database Hierarchy - Plane Elements

To use a plane to produce a sectioned VIEW, you need to create a View Section (VSEC) element under a VIEW; VSEC attributes are: PLRF (Plane Reference) - the name of the plane to be used. IDLN - an Id List name for the section to operate on. If left undefined this will default to the World (i.e. /*). This means that all elements in the VIEWs Id List will be sectioned. A single Design item name can be used. PMOD - the mode in which the plane will be used to section the VIEW, i.e. the side to be retained or discarded. The default is STANDARD, which is as the plane is set-up. REVERSE switches the side to be retained or discarded. OFF switches the plane off. CLMO (centreline mode) By default this is set to ON, which has no effect on functionality. If it is set to OFF then the section will not be applied to line elements of Piping Components. This allows you to remove Components and tubing by a section plane, but leave the centreline to show the path of the Branch. All other non-solid primitives are sectioned normally and are unaffected by the value of attribute CLMO. SMOD (a View attribute) - the section mode attribute, which defines how small parts of piping components and implied tube that are cut by the front and back sectioning planes will be treated. This attribute only affects piping components and implied tube in orthogonal, non-perspective Views. If SMOD is set to STANDARD (the default), all elements will be sectioned in the usual way. If SMOD is set to OMIT FRACtional PCOMonents, the following functionality will apply when the design graphics of the View are updated: All piping components whose origins (P0) lie outside the front and back sectioning planes will be removed from the drawlist. All other piping components will be drawn completely, even if they are cut by one of the sectioning planes. All lengths of implied tube that lie outside the front and back sectioning planes will be removed from the drawlist. In this case the test for lying outside the sectioning planes will be based on the vector Parrive -> Pleave, and not on the actual volume

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

occupied by the length of tube. Lengths of tube that lie within or cross the front or back sectioning planes will be drawn completely. Where an IDList is defined by a set of piping components (for example, ADD /VALVE1 / VALVE2 /VALVE3) the functionality will not apply. The names of the items omitted can be output by the command SMODE MESSAGES ON but this will include all those piping components in the Views IDList that fall outside the clipping box and would therefore not be drawn in any case. Several VSEC elements can be used to produce as complex a section as you require, but the larger the number the slower the operation will be. After setting up the VSEC it is just a matter of updating the design (with an UPDATE DESIGN command), remembering that sectioning will only take place if the VIEW attribute VTYPE is set for Local, Global or Universal hidden line removal, or Modelled wireline.

5.2.1

Perpendicular Plane (PPLA)

A PPLA has a single attribute POS which defines the 3D point through which the plane passes, the retained side being that towards which the VIEW direction points. The orientation of the plane will always be perpendicular to the direction that you specify for the VIEW. The basic command syntax for creating a PPLA is: NEW PPLA POS @ POS ID @ POS IDP @ - create a PPLA - set POS attribute to a 3D Design position or - set POS attribute to the 3D Design position of a Design element - set POS attribute to the 3D Design position of a Design element p-point

Note: You can only input a 3D Design position on orthogonal VIEWs; the looking direction of such a VIEW will determine which coordinate is returned as zero. For example, a plan view will return U0, which you may need to alter to give the required section. Figure 5:4.: Use of the Perpendicular Plane (PPLA) illustrates the use of a perpendicular Plane, positioned at the pump coupling.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

Figure 5:4.

Use of the Perpendicular Plane (PPLA)

5.2.2

Flat Plane (FPLA)

A FPLA has an attribute POS, which defines a 3D, point through which the plane passes, and an attribute NORM which defines the vector normal to the plane. The retained side is that towards which the normal points. The basic command syntax for defining an FPLA is: NEW FPLA POS @ NORM direction

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

The NORM direction can be any standard direction, e.g. N45W, ISO2, or can be by reference to a Design element p-point, in which case the result will be stored as a 3D vector and the reference will be lost. Figure 5:5.: Use of the Flat Plane (FPLA) illustrates the use of a flat Plane, positioned at the pump coupling and with a NORM direction of N45W.

Figure 5:5.

Use of the Flat Plane (FPLA)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

5.2.3

Stepped Plane (SPLA)

A Stepped Plane can be Open or Closed, the type being determined by the setting of the SPLAs GTYP attribute. The default is GTYP OPEN. GTYP CLOSED defines a closed Stepped Plane or Enclosed Plane. The only other attribute is DIR, which determines the Planes extrusion direction. An SPLA owns WPOS elements, one per plane step, whose sole attribute is POS, the steps 3D Design position. Specifying a 3D position automatically creates a WPOS element and sets the POS attribute. The order in which the points are defined plus the direction of the planes extrusion determines which side of the plane is retained. A handy rule for determining the retain side (with PMODE STANDARD) is to hold the thumb, index finger and middle finger of the left hand mutually at right angles; if the thumb points in the extrusion direction and the index finger points towards the last step point then the middle finger will point towards the retain side - see Figure 5:6.: Defining a Stepped Plane. A similar rule applies for Enclosed Planes.

Figure 5:6.

Defining a Stepped Plane

The SPLA shown above would be created by a sequence of commands such as:

NEW SPLA DIR U GTYP OPEN STEP @ @ @ @

Define a series of points through which an SPLA will be constructed

The STEP command will invoke the cursor, which will enable 3D positions or Design ppoints to be identified, automatically creating WPOS elements. DRAFT imposes no limit on the number of steps, but in practice only four points can be defined by a single STEP

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

command due to command line length restrictions. If a plane with more than four steps is required, further STEP commands will enable additional points to be appended to the existing member list. The minimum number of points required to define an SPLA is 2, which will have the effect of a Flat Plane. WPOS elements can be created explicitly by command sequences such as:

NEW WPOS POS E120500 N236785 U0

If this syntax is used you must leave the list of WPOS elements in the correct order for the SPLA to function. Figure 5:7.: Use of the Stepped Plane (SPLA) illustrates some examples of Stepped Planes.

Figure 5:7.

Use of the Stepped Plane (SPLA)

(The pictures in the left half of Figure 5:7.: Use of the Stepped Plane (SPLA)7 illustrate the use of the SKETCH PLANE facility - see Plane Querying.) If the STEP command is used then once a series of points are entered a check is made to ensure correct SPLANE definition; if satisfactory then a message of the form:

Splane /name is satisfactory

is output. If the plane is not satisfactory then the message will indicate what the problem is. Generally, an SPLA will be incorrect if parts of the plane overlap even if extruded to infinity at the ends; Figure 5:8.: Plane Errors illustrates this situation.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

Figure 5:8.

Plane Errors

If you have defined a plane that is unsatisfactory then it will have to be manipulated. In examples A and B, the plane can be corrected by either reordering or repositioning one of the points or by adding a new point. Alternatively the plane could be made an enclosing type. In example C the plane can only be corrected by either reordering the points or by repositioning one or more of them. How to move points is discussed in the next Section.

5.3

Altering Planes
If you wish to change which side of a plane is retained or discarded, you can do this by reversing the planes orientation if it is an FPLA and by changing the DIR or reordering the WPOS points for a SPLA. The CHANGE ACTION command, for example:

CHANGE ACTION /PL2-5 CHANGE ACTION

- alter named Plane - alter current (Plane) element

will do this for you by altering either the DIR or NORM attributes depending on the plane type. A PPLA cannot have its action reversed since it does not have an orientation. Of course, changing the PMOD of the appropriate VSEC element would have the same apparent effect as a CHANGE ACTION operation in this case, but whereas the former operation only changes the view section representation, the latter operation changes the Plane database element itself. The CHANGE ACTION command is valid at any Plane element, and at WPOS element level in the case of a Stepped Plane.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

If you require a plane point to be moved, i.e. either a POS attribute for a PPLA or an FPLA, and the POS attribute of a WPOS element for an SPLA, the BY command can be used. For example:

BY N500 BY @

Move by the difference between two cursor hits on the same orthogonal VIEW

For an SPLA, the BY command will move the complete plane, i.e. the POS attribute will be changed for all of the SPLAs member WPOS elements. You can delete individual WPOS elements in the normal way but you can also delete several at once using the command: DELETE STEP number number where the number arguments define the list position range of the points to be deleted.

5.4

Plane Querying
Once a plane has been created, it can be queried in the following ways: Q DESC - at Plane level (or at WPOS elements)

The plane referred to by the PLRF attribute of the VSEC can be queried by: Q PLRF DESC - at VSEC level

It is possible to query whether a given 3D point is on the retained or discarded side by using the following: Q SIDE @ Q SIDE /plane_identifier @ Q SIDE /plane_identifier E value N value U value - at plane level - from anywhere - from anywhere

In the latter case, only two coordinates need to be given dependent on which orthogonal view direction you are working on, e.g. for a Plan view only the Easting and Northing are required. You can make any plane visible in a suitable VIEW (i.e. one that is orthogonal to the axis of the plane) by using the following commands: SKETCH PLANE IN /view_identifier SKETCH PLANE /plane_identifier SKETCH PLANE /plane_identifier IN /view_identifier - at Plane level - at VIEW level - from anywhere

Figure 5:7.: Use of the Stepped Plane (SPLA) shows the SKETCH PLANE command in use. Once the plane has been sketched then it will always be visible, irrespective of VIEW or area view manipulation. Only one plane at a time can be sketched. A plane can be erased by either of the following commands:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

ERASE PLANE ERASE PLANE IN /view_name

- at VIEW level - from anywhere

Note that the sketch facility is only a drafting aid and is not part of the VIEW annotation. Any change made to a sketched Plane will not result in a corresponding change to the displayed sketch - another SKETCH PLANE command will be needed.

5.5
5.5.1

Summary of Commands
Setting Plane Position . . .

POS @ POS IDP @ NORM direction

- Set POS attribute to a 3D Design position - Set POS attribute to the 3D Design position of a design element p-point - Set an FPLA normal direction

5.5.2

For SPLAs . . .

DIR value GTYP OPEN or CLOSED STEP @ @ @ . . . .

- Set extrusion direction Use any direction syntax e.g. N45E - Set GTYP. OPEN will define a stepped plane, CLOSED will define an enclosed plane - Define a series of points through which an SPLA will be constructed

5.5.3

Creating Section Plane Points Directly . . .

NEW WPOS POS E value N value U value

- Create WPOS element - Set position attribute

5.5.4

Switching Retain/Discard Side . . .

CHANGE ACTION /plane gid

- reverse the action of an FPLA or SPLA by reversing the direction of the NORM or DIR attributes respectively

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

5.5.5

Moving Section Plane Points . . .

BY N500 BY @

- Move the point in 3D Design World coordinates explicitly - Move by the difference between two cursor hits on the same orthogonal view

5.5.6

Editing Section Plane Points . . .

DELETE STEP value value

- where value is the list position of the point to be deleted

5.5.7

Setting up the VIEW to Accept Section Planes . . .

NEW VSEC PLRF name IDLN name

- Create a VIEW Section element under a Layer - The reference name of the plane to be used - An Id list name for the section to operate on. If left undefined will default to the Id list specified by the VIEW. The Id list can only have Added items, any Removes will be ignored. A single Design item name can also be used.

PMOD [STANdard | REVerse | OFF]

- The Mode in which the plane will be used to section the view, i.e. which side will be retained or discarded. The default is either STANDARD, which is as the plane is set up, or REVERSE, which switches which side is retained or discarded. For a SPLA or FPLA, this has the same result as using the CHANGE ACTIONS command.

5.5.8

Querying . . .
Planes Q DESC Q PLRF DESC Q SIDE @ Q SIDE /plane_name @ - At Plane level - At VSEC level Retained/Discarded side - At plane level - From anywhere

Q SIDE /plane_ name E value N value U value - From anywhere

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

5.5.9

Plane Sketching . . .

SKETCH PLANE IN /view name SKETCH PLANE /plane name SKETCH PLANE /plane name IN /view name

- At Plane level - At VIEW level - From anywhere

5.5.10

Plane Erasing . . .

ERASE PLANE ERASE PLANE IN /view name

- At VIEW level - From anywhere

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Section Planes

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

5:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

6
6.1

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

Identifying Elements Using the Cursor
With many DRAFT commands, you can use the cursor to identify an element in the graphics window by using the ID command followed by @: ID @ At this point, picking an element with the cursor will select and identify the displayed element (the lowest-level element, i.e. a primitive, will be picked). Elements down to and including DESIGN primitives or Catalogue piping components (e.g. FLANGES) may be accessed. Dimensions, Dimension Points and Labels may also be accessed in this way. Other cursor identify commands are: ID element_type @ ID VALV @ ID VALV VTWA @ ID NOZZ @ ID NOZZ @ - element_type is any Design, Catalogue or Drawing element (e.g. EQUI, SHEE) - select and identify valve - select and identify valve or VTWA - select and identify nozzle - select and identify nozzle

You can specify up to 20 element types. For example: ID VALV VFWA VTWA @ See Dimensioning, Labelling and 2D Drafting for ID commands relating to Dimensions, Labels and 2D drafting respectively. The following command can only be used as part of a command: IDP @ For example ON IDP @ You can restrict items picked to be either DESIGN database elements or DRAFT database elements by using the commands: - select and identify p-point or structural node (PNOD or SNOD

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

ID DESEL @ ID PADEL @ ID DRAEL @ Picking an element with the cursor will make the item the current element (i.e. the current position in the database will move to that item). If you select a DESIGN element (e.g. a Cylinder primitive in a vessel) you will move to the DESIGN database; if you select a Drawing element (e.g. the edge of a Sheet) you will move to that element within the DRAFT database.

6.2

Picking P-points and Nodes

P-points and structural node points (that is, PNODs and SNODs) may be picked by the cursor. The main uses are: for positioning annotation at a particular point on a primitive, for example the end of a cylinder axis for identifying primitives below EQUI, STRU or SUBS elements.

A p-point or node may be identified using Q IDP @ In addition, the p-point may be directly selected, for example ON IDP @ - attach annotation to specified p-point or node

To identify a p-point, move the cursor across the VIEW display with the left-hand mouse button held down (the cursor changes its appearance); as the cursor moves across (by default) a significant element its p-points will become visible. Moving the cursor over a p-point (with the left-hand mouse button still depressed) will cause the p-point identifier to be displayed in the Status Form; also, the appearance of the cursor will change. Selecting a p-point is achieved by releasing the mouse button with the cursor over the required point. The identifier, direction and position of the point will appear in the DRAFT Command Input & Output form and the p-point display markers will disappear. Releasing the left-hand mouse button without selecting a p-point will leave the current set of p-points visible; you will be able to zoom or pan the view, or quit out of the command line by clicking on Cancel on the Status Form. Whether the p-points for the last significant element identified or for the last primitive identified are made visible is controlled by the PPOINTS command: PPOINTS SIG PPOINTS PRIM Q PPOINTS - significant element p-points made visible - Design primitive p-points made visible - query current setting

In the latter case, identifying a length of implied tube will cause only the Branches Head and Tail p-points to be made visible. Lines generated by a section plane (see Section Planes) are assigned to the significant element and not to the primitive sectioned; picking on one of these lines will cause all the p-points of the significant element to be made visible - even when in Design primitives mode. P-points that lie outside the view rectangle will not be shown.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

6.2.1

P-point Style
P-points will be drawn for Design elements in all VIEW types. They are shown as markers. You can change the marker type and scale, see Marker Styles. You can change the colour using the SETFEEDBACK command, see Graphical Feedback Style and Colour.

6.3

Picking Structural Elements and P-lines

A p-line (or member line) may be identified by cursor hit using the commands: IDPL @ IDPE/ND @ - select and identify p-line - select and identify p-line start or end

This will return syntax to the command line in the following form: PPLINE word OF element_identifier The IDPE/ND command will generate text such as:

Pline RTOS of /SCTN-98 start Pline MEML of /SCTN-99 end

depending how far along the p-line the cursor hit was made. This may be used, for example, to position annotation at the start or end points of p-lines or to obtain the 3D coordinates of these points. For example: NEW GLAB ON IDPE @ Q IDPE @ will position a GLAB on the identified p-line at either its start or end point. will return the ENU position of the start or end point of the identified p-line.

This syntax is used for querying and to identify a p-line for direction (note that it may not appear at the beginning of a command line). The command IDPDistance @ will return the proportional distance along the identified p-line. For example a GLAB can be positioned by either of: ON IDPL @ ON IDPD @ Examples of text returned by these commands could be (respectively):

ON PPLINE BOS OF /SCTN.PN1_PN5 ON PPLINE BOS OF /SCTN.PN1_PN5 PROP 0.65

In the former case the default value for proportional distance will be used.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

6.4

Querying Position Data

There are two query commands that enable you to convert between 2D Sheet positions and 3D design data positions. To derive a 3D position from 2D data use: Q ENUPOSITION OF sheet_position (at/below a VIEW)

where sheet_position is a position on the Sheet. This position (which must be within the VIEW rectangle) may be specified by cursor. This command returns the back-projection of this position at Z=0 into the 3D world coordinate system of the current or specified VIEW, for example:

W 15500 N 10020 U 0
The specified VIEW must be axonometric without perspective. To derive a 2D position from 3D data use: Q SHPOSITION OF position (at/below a VIEW)

where position may be a 3D point or p-point, explicit p-point reference, origin of a named element, or an explicit 3D coordinate. This position or item may be specified by cursor. This command returns the projection of the explicit or implied 3D position onto the Sheet for the current VIEW. For example.

X 574 Y 200
As with the ENUPOS query command, the specified VIEW must be axonometric without perspective and the specified position must lie within the VIEW rectangle. You can query the 3D origin in World coordinates of any Design element using the command: Q IDORI @ Q IDORI sheet_position

(at/below a VIEW)

The response will be of the form:

ID =123/456 ORIGIN W 0000mm N 0000mm U 0000mm

6.5

Snapping 2D Points to a Grid

Cursor commands which request 2D points will be rounded to the nearest point on the SNAP grid (if on). The grid is defined by the SNAP command, for example:

SNAP ON SNAP OFF SNAP ON 10

- turn the snap grid on - turn the snap grid off (the default) - define a square grid, 10mm in both X and Y directions

SNAP ON SPACING X25 Y40 - define a rectangular grid

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

When the SNAP grid is ON, all 2D cursor hits (including the BY @ command) will be snapped onto the nearest grid point. This does not affect graphics picking or pseudo-3D cursor hits. Snapping only applies to cursor-generated positions; positions entered explicitly from the keyboard or via a macro are not snapped. Cursor hits will be snapped on any picture, whether or not the visible grid (see VGRID command below) is displayed. By default, the SNAP grid origin is positioned at the bottom left-hand corner of the Sheet, and is drawn parallel to the X, Y axes of the Sheet. This origin may be changed by commands such as

SNAP AT X100 Y100 SNAP AT @

- define snap origin explicitly - define snap origin with cursor

SNAP settings apply to all Sheets (and Symbol Libraries, Overlay Sheets etc) when SNAP is ON. The initial setting (on entry to DRAFT) is a square grid at the Sheet origin, with snapping switched off, i.e.

SNAP OFF AT X 0mm Y 0mm SPACING X 25mm Y 25mm

If the current units on module entry are INCH or FINCH, the initial SNAP spacing is one inch square. The snap grid may be queried using the command:

Q SNAP
The same information will also be output to file by a RECREATE DISPLAY command. Visible Grids

VGRID ON
Visible grids are not output to plotfiles. The VGRID command uses the current settings of the SNAP grid. A visible grid will be output on the current Sheet using some multiple (default 1) of the current SNAP grid. An element identifier may be specified as part of the command, for example:

VGRID /VIEW1-2 ON
This command would turn the visible grid on for the picture element (i.e. the SHEE, LALB, BACK, OVER, ISOLB or SYLB) owning the specified element. The visible grid is not maintained with changes in SNAP settings, so it is advisable to reset the grid (with another VGRID ON command) if the SNAP settings are changed. The spacing of the visible grid may be changed by commands such as

VGRID SNAP 2

- change visible grid spacing to twice that of snap grid

This command would give a less-cluttered grid display on the drawing. The default setting may be returned to by giving the command

VGRID SNAP
The following would cause a visible grid to be erased from the current Sheet (or a specified Sheet), where sheet identifier identifies a picture element or an owned element:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

VGRID [sheet identifier] OFF ERASE AIDS [IN sheet identifier] ERASE VGRID [IN sheet identifier]
The following causes all visible grids to be erased:

Module switching Entry to MDB mode

The snap multiple of the visible grid may be queried using the command:

Q VGRID
Details of the VGRID snap multiple will also be output to file by a RECREATE DISPLAY command. It is also possible to query whether a specified Sheet currently has a visible grid displayed, using.

Q VGRID sheet_identifier

6.6

Highlighting Displayed Elements

Displayed elements can be highlighted (flashed) by using the HIGHLIGHT command. The elements concerned may be Design elements (from significant element downwards, including implied Tubing and Rodding) or DRAFT annotation elements (i.e. Layers, Dimensions, Labels, 2D Drafting primitives). Overlay (OLAY) elements may also be highlighted. For example:

HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT IN /VIEW1-1 HIG IN ID VIEW @

Highlight current annotation element in all area views in which it appears Highlight current element (design or notation) in named VIEW Highlight current element in cursor-identified VIEW VIEW

HIG /1501B IN ID VIEW @ Highlight named design element in cursor-identified

HIG HIG HIG HIG

IARRIVE TUBE OF /VALVE1 IN /VIEW4 ILEAVE TUBE OF CE IN /PLAN_VIEW HEAD TUBE OF /BRAN99 IN CE TAIL TUBE OF CE IN /E_ELEVATION

Example commands for highlighting implied tubing

HIG IN _f1_v1 HIG /1501B HIG /1501B IN _f1_v1

Highlight current element in named area view Highlight named Design element in all area views in which it appears Highlight named element in named area view only

Elements may also be highlighted simply by passing the cursor over them in the display with the left-hand button held down. Note: For the permanent highlighting of 2D Drafting primitives, see the ENHANCE command in Enhancing Drafting Primitives.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

6.7
6.7.1

Summary of Commands
Cursor Identification/Selection . . .

ID @ ID element_type @ ID VALV @ ID VALV VTWA @ ID BEND ELBOW @ ON IDP @ ON IDPL @ ID NOZZ @

- select and identify any displayed element - select and identify any Design, Drawing or Catalogue element (e.g. EQUI, SHEE, PJOIN) - select and identify valve - select and identify valve or VTWA - ID BEND ELBOW @ - select and identify bends or elbows - attach annotation to specified p-point - attach annotation to specified p-line - identify a Nozzle

The following can only be used as part of a command. For example, ON IDP @: IDP @ IDPL @ IDPE/ND @ ID DESEL @ ID PADEL @ ID DRAEL @ - select and identify p-point - select and identify p-line - select and identify p-line start or end - select and identify any Design element - select and identify any Draft element

6.7.2

Querying . . .

Q ENUPOSition OF sheet_position Q SHPOsition OF position

- derives a 3D position from 2D data - derives a 2D position from 3D data

You can query the 3D origin in World coordinates of any Design element using: Q IDORI @ Q IDORI sheet_position (at/below a VIEW) returns the 3D origin in World coordinates of a Design element

6.7.3

P-point Visibility . . .

PPOINTS SIG PPOINTS PRIM

- Significant element p-points made visible - Design primitive p-points made visible

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Using the Cursor with DRAFT Comments

6.7.4

Highlighting Elements...

HIGHLIGHT HIG IN _f1_v1 HIG /1501B HIG /1501B IN _f1_v HIG /1501B IN ID VIEW @

- highlight current element in all area views in which it appears - highlight current element in named area view - highlight named DESIGN element in all area views in which it appears - highlight named element in named area view only - highlight named DESIGN element in VIEW picked by cursor

6.7.5

Snapping 2D Points to a Grid...

SNAP ON SNAP ON 10 SNAP ON SPACING X25 Y40 SNAP AT X100 Y100 SNAP AT @ VGRID ON VGRID SNAP integer VGRID SNAP Q SNAP Q VGRI

- turn snap grid on - define a square snap grid, 10mm in both X and Y directions - define a rectangular snap grid - define snap grid origin explicitly - define snap grid origin with cursor - turn visible grid on - change visible grid spacing to integer times that of snap grid - return to default visible grid spacing - query snap grid - query visible grid snap multiple

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

6:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Plotting and Drawing Output

At any time during the drawing process, you can generate a plot that consists of a single Sheet, View or the contents of an Area View.

7.1

General
Plotfiles are produced by the PLOT command, which takes the following alternative forms: PLOT uuname filename [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT /sheet_name /filename [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT SHEE FILE /filename [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT VIEW FILE /filename [papersize] [OVERWRITE] Example:

PLOT /SHEET1 /SH1.PLT PLOT VIEW FILE /VW1.PLT A3

If the paper size is not specified then it will be taken as the same as the item being plotted. Existing plotfiles will not be overwritten unless the OVERWRITE option is used. There are three additional options which may be specified between papersize and OVERWRITE: CUTMARKS. By default the rectangular limit of the plotfile will be shown; this can be suppressed by CUTMARKS OFF. The BORDER value option will cause a border to be left within the specified paper size. The image size of the item being plotted will be reduced accordingly. The FRAME option causes a frame to be drawn around the image; FRAME can only be used in concert with the BORDER option and marks the inside edge of the border. It does not control the frame around the edge of the plotfile (see CUTMARKS above).

An example of a PLOT command using its entire syntax is:

PLOT SHEE FILE /S3.PLT A1 CUT OFF BORD 25 FRAME OVER

If required, plotfile style definitions can be made different from those on the screen. Hence a line that appears as thin, solid, on the screen could be made thick, dashed, on plotfiles. See User-Defined Line Styles. You can query the size of a plotfile using the command: Query PLOTFile name SIZE The response will be the size rectangle of the plot.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.2

Extended Output Formats

The PLOT command controls the direct output of DRAFT drawings to printers, PDF files, image files and Windows Enhanced Metafiles (EMF). Support for these output formats is itself important but also enables the production of higher quality graphical output including the use of TrueType text. The command used for each of the output types includes an options string to control the drawing process. Some options apply to all output types while others are specific to a particular type. For these output forms the PLOT command takes the following alternative forms: PLOT uuname [FILE] PRINT 'Options...' [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT uuname [FILE] PDF /filename 'Options...' [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT uuname [FILE] IMAGE /filename 'Options...' [papersize] [OVERWRITE] PLOT uuname [FILE] METAFILE /filename 'Options...' [papersize] [OVERWRITE] The DRAFT commands for the extended output types are an extension of the existing PLOT command and include the output type name and a configurable option string. The following are examples of the commands: Example:

PLOT CE PRINT 'MINL 0.22,COL COLOURPLUS' A0 PLOT /PLAN1 PDF /plan.pdf 'MINL 0.22,COL BW,VIEW' A3 PLOT /PLAN2 IMAGE /plan2.png 'IMAGE PNG,MINL 0.22' A4 PLOT /PLAN3 METAFILE /plan3.pdf 'MINL 0.22' A3 OVER
The following options apply to specific output types: When printer output is used, a standard print form is displayed for the user to select a printer and set preferences. The specific options for printing cover: automatic adjustment of the drawing size to fit size and orientation of the paper with the REDUCETOFIT, EXPANDTOFIT and ROTATETOFIT options; special control of print form box for automatic drawing production in batch operation with the ONEDIALOG and NODIALOG options. Plotting a PDF file has the option to automatically launch the reader by selecting the VIEW option. The option NOVIEW is also available and is the default. The output of an image file is in one of the following standard formats: jpg, uncompressed tif, tif with LZW compression, tif-G4, png, bmp and gif. A tif image can contain a multiple pages. There are no specific options for the production of EMF file. The COLOUR option defines how colour is to be handled when the drawing is output. The default setting in the options string would be 'COLOUR STANDARD', which will use the defined colours of the drawing unchanged. By setting the option to 'COLOUR BW' all of the colours are the set to black if the background is white and white if the background is white. This ensures that there is the best contrast in the output.

The following options apply to all of the output types:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

The option 'COLOUR GRAYSCALE' converts all of the colours to an equivalent shade of gray. The option 'COLOUR COLOURPLUS' converts all gray, black and white colours to black if the background is white and white if the background is white. This adds contrast to the output drawing. The MINLINEWIDTH option specifies the minimum line width in mm. This value affects the quality of the graphical output, a typical value is 0.22 mm and would appear in the option string as 'MINL 0.22'. The FRAME option draws a thin frame around the drawing using the specified colour number. An example of this in an options string is 'FRAME 3'. The BGCOL option sets the background colour to a specified colour number. The default background colour of all of these output types is white. An example of this in an options string is 'BGCOL 15'. The ISOCOLOURS and DICTCOLOURS options select alternative colour tables and are intended to be used in tty mode when the standard colour table in not available.

The following table summarises all of the keywords and arguments that are valid in option strings. The command option strings are always specified in upper case and / is used to indicate the minimum abbreviation of an option name: Option Name and Arguments
F/RAME value IMAGE JPG IMAGE TIF IMAGE TIF_LZW IMAGE TIF_G4 IMAGE PNG IMAGE BMP IMAGE GIF COL/OUR STANDARD COL/OUR BW COL/OUR GRAYSCALE COL/OUR COLOURPLUS

Description

Output Types

Draws a thin frame around the drawing using the specified all colour number. Select the Image format, the default is TIF image

The COLOUR option allows the defined colours to be all adapted to suit output requirements. STANDARD retains the defined colours by the drawing. BW changes all colours to black or white to provide contrast with the background colour. GRAYSCALE converts all colours to an equivalent shade of gray. COLOURPLUS converts all shades of gray to black or white to provide a contrast with the background colour.

MINL/INEWIDTH value VIEW NOVIEW

Set the minimum line width to be used to draw expressed all in mm, e.g. 0.22 Launch the Adobe Reader to automatically view a PDF pdf after it has been written to file. Suppress the PDF VIEW action. pdf

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Option Name and Arguments

REDUCE/TOFIT

Description

Output Types

When a drawing size is larger than the selected paper size print and/or the page orientation is different, this option reduces and/or rotates the drawing to fit within the current paper size, as necessary. When the drawing size is smaller than the paper and/or print the page orientation is different this option will expand and/or rotate the drawing to fill the current paper size, as necessary. When the drawing does not fit on the page because their print orientation is different this option will rotate the drawing to fit the fit within the current paper size. No expansion or reduction is performed When this option is selected for printing, the normal dialog print is displayed before the print job and no further dialog will be displayed for subsequent jobs. The initial print settings including paper selection are used for subsequent prints. This is useful for automatic drawing production.

EXPAND/TOFIT

ROTATE/TOFIT

ONEDIALOG

NODIALOG

When this option is selected for printing no print dialog is print displayed. The default printer is selected with all of its user defined settings. This is useful for automatic drawing production.

ISOCOL/OURS

Use the Isodraft colour table instead of the default table. all These colours may be used in tty mode when the standard colour table is not available. Use the Dictionary colour table instead of the default table. all These colours may be used in tty mode when the standard colour table is not available. Fills the drawing background using the specified colour all number.

DICTCOL/OURS

BGCOL value

7.3
7.3.1

Standard DXF Output

Creating the DXF File
DXF format plotfiles (for use in AutoCAD) can be generated in a similar way to PDMS plotfiles simply by adding DXF to the command. For example:

PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET1.DXF PLOT /SHT1/V1 DXF /VIEW1.DXF A3 OVER

It is recommended that the CUTMARKS OFF option be used when generating DXF files.

7.3.2

DXF File Contents

The DXF file created has a brief header section, followed by the TABLES section, which defines text styles and line types, and the ENTITIES section, which contains the drawing data. The DXF BLOCK section is not used.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

The HEADER section contains two comments, giving file creator's name and the time/date of creation. The only other variables set are $LIMMIN and $LIMMAX (the limits of the drawing Sheet), $LTSCALE and $DIMSCALE. See also Sheet Migration to AutoCAD. The TABLES section defines all required text styles and line types. Two sets of text styles are available corresponding to horizontal and vertical text (paths Right and Down), and both assume the existence of font files fnnnnnnnnnn (where nnnnnnnnnn denotes a ten-digit number) that correspond to the fonts used in a DRAFT session. The line types are the standard DRAFT predefined set; they have been given names for AutoCAD use, which are the DRAFT names, prefixed by GT, e.g. GTSOLID, GTDOT etc. Lines are passed as POLYLINE entities consisting of two or more points. The available linestyles have names prefixed by GT. Line thicknesses are available. See User-Defined Line Styles. Arcs/Circles are currently passed as POLYLINE entities with bulge factors. All text strings are passed as TEXT entities in the appropriate font. For example, text in Font 21 is output in style HTX21. The corresponding set of font files is defined in the TABLES section of the DXF file. Text height and shear are supported. All text is justified to the bottom-left corner of the text string. Note that non-zero character spacing is not supported in DXF output. AutoCAD font files are provided as part of the AutoDRAFT software. Instructions for installing these can be found in the AVEVA PDMS Installation Guide. Layers are assigned to entities according to their colour definition within DRAFT. These layers are named GT_n, where n is a number that corresponds to a PDMS colour. Colours are maintained according to Layer (i.e. BYLAYER in AutoCAD). Note that the Layer colour for all DRAFT layers is white.

The ENTITIES section then follows, and is normally closed by the standard AutoCAD EOF.

7.3.3

Sheet Migration to AutoCAD

Sheets and Overlays can be converted to AutoCAD format using the command XMLEXPORT: XMLEXPORT sheet_name This process is not reversible. It sets the APICT attribute of the Sheet or Overlay to ON. Within the User Interface, this command is implemented by the Utilities>Export to Final Designer menu selection. XMLEXPORT exports the Sheet/Overlay to the <project>DWG directory as a .pdmsdwg file, naming it according to the existing naming convention (as defined by attribute ACNAME, or NAME if ACNAME is unset). The file is then loaded into AutoCAD. For Overlays, when saved an exploded model-space version of the sheet is saved as a .dwg file to the subfolder PDMS_Overlays. XMLEXPORT also exports Backing sheets and Symbols (SYTM). These are stored as .dwg files, though they may contain custom entities (such as intelligent text). They are stored in a subfolder below the <project>DWG folder. All symbol templates in a symbol library can be exported using XMLEXPORT at SYLB/LABL level. This scans all SYTMs that have ACEXPO set to OFF or REEXPORT, and export them as .dwg files, setting ACEXPO to EXPORTED. The command ACDISPLAY allows an existing AutoCAD sheet to be displayed:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

ACDISP/LAY gid (MOD/IFY) (READ/ONLY) MODIFY is optional. If the Sheet can be written to, the AutoCAD drawing can be modified. If the Sheet is loaded as READ/ONLY, it is loaded into AutoCAD as a read-only file. However, if the Draft user then modifies this Sheet it is converted to WRITE access.

7.3.4

File Header Options

DXF files may have full AutoCAD headers and Z-coordinates in the ENTITIES section. Example commands are:

PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET1.DXF ACAD ZCOOR PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET1.DXF CADC ZCOOR

- include AutoCAD headers and Z-coordinates - as above, but use AVEVA header

If no header type is specified, the brief AVEVA header is assumed. If the ACAD option is used, then the DXF file produced will contain a header, which is defined in file acadxf.hdr in the PDMS executable directory (as defined by global variable PDMSEXE). File acadxf.hdr must contain, as a minimum, the following: HEADER section (terminated by an ENDSEC keyword) TABLES section (terminated by an ENDSEC keyword) BLOCK section (optional) - (terminated by an ENDSEC keyword) ENTITIES section (optional) - Unterminated

If the ZCOORD option is used, the DXF file produced will contain Z-coordinates of value 0.000 (i.e. code 30 entries) in the $EXTMIN and $EXTMAX parameters in the header section, and in polyline vertices and TEXT entities.

7.3.5

Encoding of Multi-Byte Characters

Multi-byte characters (e.g. Japanese) may be encoded in the DXF file in one of two formats, namely Extended UNIX Code (EUC) and Shift-JIS. The format required will depend upon the machine for which the DXF file is intended. The format should be specified after the header and Z-coordinate requirements. For example:

PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET1.DXF ACAD ZCOORD EUC PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET1.DXF CADC ZCOORD SHI/FTJIS
If no encoding format is specified, EUC will be assumed. These options will have no effect if only single-byte characters are output.

7.3.6

Scaling
The output written to the DXF file can be scaled using the SCALEUP command option. If required, the scaling value should be specified after the Z coordinate and character encoding requirements. For example:

PLOT SHEE DXF /SHEET.DXF ACAD ZCOORD EUC SCALEUP 100

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

This will cause all values in the file to be increased by 100. Factors such as paper size, line thickness and character height will all be affected. This option allows the effects of VIEW scaling to be reversed to some extent.

7.4
7.4.1

Configurable DXF Output

Configuration Datasets
It is possible to control the format of DXF output using configuration datasets. The configuration dataset controls how the database information is to be mapped into DXF format. It does the following: Controls how DRAFT graphics are to be grouped as DXF Block and Group definitions. Enables database elements to be assigned to DXF layers. Maps fonts, colours and linestyles between DRAFT and DXF. Allows database attribute information to be exported from DRAFT as DXF Block attributes.

The configurable DXF facility uses loadable image (LI) applications, usable at Sheet level. The DXF export application can be executed using the LIEXEC command (which also loads the application if it has not already been loaded). The following example command uses the configuration data set MyConfigData to control the export of DXF information:

LIEXEC /Draft_DXF_LI DXFOUTR13 ConfigData MyConfigData

Here DXFOUTR13 is an application feature. At the current release of PDMS, DXFOUTR13 for producing AutoCAD Release 13 .DXF output is the only supported feature. This will create a DXF file with a name and format defined in the specified dataset for the current picture element (e.g. SHEE, SYLB, etc.). Before giving the above command, the configuration dataset must have been defined in DRAFT by typing in the configuration data at the command line or by reading in a predefined macro file. Three example macro files are provided: default_dxf.mac full_dxf.mac Defines the default configuration settings. Defines a sample set of configuration settings to produce fully blocked, grouped and layered DXF files closely mapped to the DRAFT Sheet exported. Note that blocking commands for Design graphics in this file are only intended as an example, and may require modification to suit your own requirements. Defines a configuration for graphics-only DXF files, minimal in size, which can be imported into systems, which do not support full AutoCAD Release 13 DXF file format. This provides compatibility with AutoCAD Release 12.

graphics_dxf.mac

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Other commands related to this facility are: LILIST DLICON Lists features of application(s) loaded by LILOAD/LIEXEC. Defines a named set of configuration options. For example: DLICON {configuration options} EXIT

A DRAFT Configuration Dataset is made up of a series of switches and Blocking rules. The {configuration options} will contain the BLOCK and SWITCH syntax that control the content of the DXF file produced. See Switches and BLOCK Rules to Control DXF Export for a full list of the switches and their permissible and default values. Example:

SWITCH GroupGLAB ON
Group GLABs into DXF groups

SWITCH HeaderFileName 'header.dxf'

Specify the DXF header file name The switch names are case-independent, but are shown as mixed case here to aid legibility. Standard selection syntax is used to define Blocking Rules. These specify how design elements are to be organised into DXF Blocks. Attributes can be included in block definitions. Example:

BLOCK ALL STRU, INCLUDE NAME BLOCK ALL BRAN WITH ( HBOR GE 100 OR TBOR GE 100 ) , INCLUDE NAME SPREF
Elements that can be blocked are:

SITE, ZONE, STRU, SUBS, FRMW, SBFR, EQUI, SUBE, PIPE, BRAN, HVAC, REST
The configuration options may be overridden by LIEXEC command line options; in particular the Outputfilename switch would normally be overridden by an LIEXEC option. For example:

LIEXEC /Draft_DXF_LI 'DXFOUTR13' CONFIGDATA 'MyConfigData' OutputFileName '%PDMSUSER%/new.dxf'

It is also possible to omit the CONFIGDATA, in which case the default values of all the switches will be assumed and no blocking will take place. However, in such a case a DXF header file must be specified; for example

LIEXEC /Draft_DXF_LI 'DXFOUTR13' HeaderFileName 'header.dxf'

The datasets currently defined within DRAFT can be determined by:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

DLICON LIST The definition of a specific dataset can be determined by: DLICON name DUMP The value of a specific switch within a dataset can be determined by: DLICON name CHECK SWITCH switchname Whether or not there is a blocking rule applicable to a specified Design element can be determined by: DLICON name CHECK BLOCK element_identifier

7.4.2

Switches and BLOCK Rules to Control DXF Export

Switch name PrimitiveThickness

Value (default) [ ON ]

Description Allows primitive thickness to be represented by Polyline width in AutoCAD. The PlineWidthFactor switch defines the scale of width factors used by DXF export. Prevents primitive thickness from being represented in AutoCAD. All entities are generated using Lines, Arcs and Text with no Polylines. Defines the scaling of width factors translated from DRAFT to AutoCAD. Polyline width is defined by: [( LTHICK - 1 ) * PlineWidthFactor].

OFF

PlineWidthFactor

0.1, [ 0.2 ], 0.3, 1.0

ViewNumberPrefix

ON

Adds a unique numeric view prefix value to the beginning of each AutoCAD Layer name created from DRAFT views. Suppresses any numeric layer name view prefix. Creates a unique layer for each Design ZONE and places all design information from that zone onto the layer. Suppresses zone layering. Creates a unique layer for each Design SITE, and places all design information from that site onto the layer. Suppresses site layering.

[ OFF ] LayerZone ON

[ OFF ] LayerSite ON

[ OFF ]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Switch name LayerBack

Value (default) ON

Description Creates a unique layer for the backing sheet and places the backing sheet information on that layer in AutoCAD. Suppresses backing sheet layering. Creates a layer for each overlay and places the overlay information on that layer in AutoCAD. Suppresses overlay layering. Creates a layer for each note and places the note information on that layer in AutoCAD. Suppresses note layering. Creates an equivalent layer in AutoCAD matching DRAFT annotation layers and places information from the DRAFT layers onto subsequent AutoCAD layers. Suppresses DRAFT layer to AutoCAD layer mapping. Maps DRAFT text styles using AutoDRAFT equivalent AutoCAD font styles. Uses the standard AutoCAD STANDARD (txt) font style for all fonts in AutoCAD. Maps DRAFT linepattern definitions onto equivalent AutoCAD linetype definitions contained within the DXF header. Unsupported or undefined linepattern names are exported to AutoCAD using an equivalent DRAFT style name, with a standard dashed representation.

[ OFF ] LayerOlay ON

[ OFF ] LayerNote ON [ OFF ] LayerLaye ON

[ OFF ] FontMapping [ ON ] OFF LinetypeMapping [ ON ]

OFF

All DRAFT linepatterns are represented by the default CONTINUOUS linetype, mapped using BYLAYER in AutoCAD. DRAFT colours 1 to 15 are mapped to equivalent AutoCAD colour numbers. Colour numbers above 15 are mapped directly to AutoCAD colours in the range 1 to 254. Suppress colour mapping and assign all DRAFT colours to AutoCAD colour BYLAYER.

ColourMapping

[ ON ]

OFF

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Switch name IncludeZCoordinates

Value (default) ON [ OFF ]

Description Uses explicit X,Y and Z co-ordinate values in the DXF export file. Uses explicit X and Y co-ordinate values in the DXF file, where Z is assumed to be 0. If Z is not equal to 0, it will be output explicitly. Exports minimal DXF header information and omits all R13 specific data, including Objects, Handles, AcDb markers, dictionaries and table information; Except: Layers, Linetypes and Styles. This switch can be used to produce AutoCAD release 12 compatible DXF files and can be used to minimise DXF information in terms of file size and production time with the following switches set to OFF: LinetypeMapping, ColourMapping, IncludeZCoordinates The following switches are forced OFF when the GraphicsOnlyDXF switch is ON: EntityAcDbMarkers and Include DXFHeaderEntities All Group switches are ignored when this option switch is used although blocking is permitted!

GraphicsOnlyDXF

ON

[ OFF ] EntityAcDbMarkers ON

Exports DXF information using a well defined full AutoCAD release 13 DXF format. Exports AutoCAD release 13 AcDb object markers in all entities in the DXF file. This option may be required for less tolerant DXF interpreters. Suppresses AutoCAD release 13 AcDb object markers in all entities. Suppressing AcDb markers in the DXF file can significantly reduce the resulting DXF file size.

[ OFF ]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Switch name NestedBlocks

Value (default) ON

Description Allows hierarchically related blocks to be nested into a single block hierarchy in AutoCAD. Prevents hierarchically related blocks from being nested together in AutoCAD. Block definitions that contain multiple subcomponent blocks will be represented by a collection of individual blocks as opposed to a single block definition. These individual, yet hierarchically related blocks can be grouped together using the GroupBlocks switch. Creates a single Block definition for the DRAFT backing sheet. Suppresses blocking of backing sheets. Creates a single Block definition for each DRAFT overlay sheet. Suppresses blocking of overlay sheets. Creates a single Block definition for each instanced DRAFT symbol. Suppresses blocking of symbols. Creates a single Block definition for each DRAFT hatch/fill pattern. Suppresses blocking of hatch patterns. Creates a single Block definition for each occurrence of a plot spool file used to represent backing sheets or overlays. Suppresses blocking of Graphic plot spooled files. Groups dimensions into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of dimensions. Groups notes into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of notes. Groups view notes into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of view notes.

[ OFF ]

BlockBack

ON [ OFF ]

BlockOlay

[ ON ] OFF

BlockSymb

ON [ OFF ]

BlockFill

[ ON ] OFF

BlockGraphicFile

ON

[ OFF ] GroupDims ON [ OFF ] GroupNote ON [ OFF ] GroupVnot ON [ OFF ]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Switch name GroupFrame

Value (default) ON [ OFF ]

Description Groups frames into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of frames. Groups GLAB labels into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of GLAB labels. Groups SLAB labels into unique AutoCAD release 13 groups. Suppresses Grouping of SLAB labels. Groups together hierarchically related blocks, generated from blocking structures and sub-structures or sub-frameworks. This switch should only be used when the NestedBlocks switch is set to OFF. Suppresses Grouping of related Blocks Specifies the search path used to locate AutoDRAFT font shape files. This value is appended to the beginning of all font style records created in the DXF file. If the search path is set to off, no directory path is appended to the start of font style records. This option can be used if the relevant AutoCAD shape files are located in the ACAD support directory path. Specifies font mapping should be applied using the Shift JIS standard. Specifies font mapping should be applied using the default EUC standard. Allows drawing information contained within the DXF header file to be merged with the exported DRAFT drawing information. Under normal export circumstances, this switch should be omitted or set to OFF. Ignores all DXF entities in the ENTITIES section of the DXF header file.

GroupGlab

ON [ OFF ]

GroupSlab

ON [ OFF ]

GroupBlocks

ON

[ OFF ] FontFilePath /search/ path/

[ OFF ]

UseShiftJISFonts

ON [ OFF ]

IncludeDXFHeaderEntities

ON

[ OFF ]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Switch name HeaderFileName

Value (default)

Description

[%PDMSEXE%/draft_dxf_li.dxf] Specifies the DXF header file name, which will be read into DRAFT and used as a backbone template for generating the DXF information. If a header file name is specified, it must be a valid AutoCAD release 13 DXF file, based on the default draft_dxf_li.dxf'

OutputFileName IgnoreBlockRules

[output.dxf] [ ON ]

Specifies the output DXF file name produced when exporting DXF file information. Allows the DXF export application to ignore all BLOCK rules in the configuration data-set, used to speed up processing of non-blocked DXF export. Allows the DXF export application to search and compare configuration data-set BLOCK rules against database information in order to block components in the DXF export file.

OFF

ScaleFactor

Positive Real Scale Factor applied to entire DXF File to No. enable Full scale Design units to be output in (default 1.0) the DXF File [ 1.0 ] Scale Factor 1.0 - DXF File in Annotation units

Note: The default values specified in this table are those set up by the configuration macro default_dxf.mac, as supplied with the product. The supplied default values will always be obtained when using the System Defaults for DXF Output option on the Configurable DXF Output form in the standard graphical user interface.

7.4.3

Limitations
The following limitations apply: DRAFT's intelligent blanking primitives are not exported to the DXF file as there are no equivalent AutoCAD primitives to which to map them. User-defined line styles (see Line Styles) are assigned to a fixed (dashed) linetype definition in the DXF file using the DRAFT line pattern name as the DXF linetype name. This definition can be redefined in AutoCAD to provide the linestyle required. User-defined glyphs and line pictures (see Line Styles) are ignored. Differentially scaled symbols are not supported.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.5
7.5.1

Configurable DGN Output

Configuration Datasets
DGN files (for use in MicroStation/J) may also be created from DRAFT Sheets. DGN is a binary format. It is possible to control the format of DGN output using configuration datasets. The configuration dataset controls how the database information is to be mapped into DGN format. It does the following: Controls how DRAFT graphics are to be grouped as DGN Group definitions. Enables database elements to be assigned to DGN Levels. Maps linestyles, colours and fonts between DRAFT and DGN. Allows database attribute information to be exported from DRAFT as DGN Group attributes.

The configurable DGN facility uses loadable image (LI) applications, usable at Sheet level. The DGN export application can be executed using the LIEXEC command (which also loads the application if it has not already been loaded). The following example command uses the configuration dataset MyConfigData to control the export of DGN information:

LIEXEC /Draft_DGN_LI

DGNOUT ConfigData MyConfigData

Here DGNOUT is an application feature. This will create a DGN file with a name and format defined in the specified dataset for the current Sheet element. Before giving the above command, the configuration dataset must have been defined in DRAFT. This may be done either by typing in the configuration data at the command line; by building up the required mappings using the DRAFT applicationware; or by reading in a predefined macro file. Other commands related to this facility are: LILIST DLICON name Lists features of application(s) loaded by LILOAD/LIEXEC. Defines a named set of configuration options. For example: DLICON /myconfig configuration_options EXIT A DRAFT Configuration Dataset is made up of a series of Switches, Group rules and Level rules. The configuration_options will contain the GROUP, LEVEL and SWITCH syntax that controls the content of the DGN file produced.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Example:

SWITCH LevelDefault '63'

Level 63 to be used by default

SWITCH SeedFileName 'seed.dgn'

Specifies the DGN header file name

GROUP ALL EQUI, INCLUDE NAME

A group will be created for each equipment, which will be tagged with its name

LEVEL ALL NOTE, 'ON 32'

Level 32 to be used for NOTE elements Switch names are case-independent, but are shown as mixed case here to aid legibility. Switch values are text strings, and should be quoted. Rules for Groups and Levels use PML expressions, similar to those used in Representation rules. GROUP rules may be followed by the INCLUDE argument to tag the group with attribute data; LEVEL rules should be followed by a text string defining the level or range of levels to be used. Note: For full details of using expressions in PDMS, see the AVEVA DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 1. The configuration options may be overridden by LIEXEC command line options. In particular, the OutputFileName switch would normally be overridden by an LIEXEC option. Example:

LIEXEC /Draft_DGN_LI 'DGNOUT' CONFIGDATA 'MyConfigData' OutputFileName '%PDMSUSER%/new.dgn'

It is also possible to omit the CONFIGDATA, in which case the default values of all the switches will be assumed, the internal default seed will be used, and no grouping or levelling will take place. The datasets currently defined within DRAFT can be determined by: DLICON LIST The definition of a specific dataset can be determined by: DLICON name DUMP The value of a specific switch within a dataset can be determined by: DLICON name CHECK SWITCH switchname For example, to query the value of the UNITS switch in the configuration /myconfig:

DLICON /myconfig CHECK SWITCH Units

Whether there is a grouping or levelling rule applicable to a specified DESIGN or DRAFT element can be determined by:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

DLICON name CHECK GROUP element_identifier DLICON name CHECK LEVEL element_identifier For example, to query whether the configuration contains a level rule which applies to /PUMP1:1

DLICON /myconfig CHECK LEVEL /PUMP1 Sample Configuration Datasets

Sample configuration files are provided in the %PDMSDFLTS% directory as PML data files (pmldat). Further configuration files can be created using the DRAFT applicationware. The supplied configuration files include:) dra-dgn-basic.pmldat dra-dgn-pdms.pmldat Defines a restricted range of essential settings for configured DGN output Defines a sample set of configuration settings to produce fully-grouped and levelled DGN files closely mapped to the DRAFT Sheet exported. Note that the grouping and levelling commands for Design graphics in this file are only intended as an example, and may require modification to suit your own requirements. Defines an equivalent set to dra-dgn-pdms.pmldat, in imperial-units Defines a sample set of configuration settings that uses levelling by pen number, and uses text size to select levels for annotation (metric units) Defines a sample set of configuration settings that uses levelling by functional descriptions (imperial units

dra-dgn-imperial.pmldat dra-dgn-nnnn.pmldat

dra-dgn-dddd.pmldat

Note: These configuration files may be converted to command-line macro files for batch creation of DGN files, using the Plant/Marine applicationware as follows:

!dgn = object dgnout() !dgn.load( !!file( %PDMSDFLTS%/name.pmldat !dgn.save( !!file( %PDMSUSER%/name.pmldat

where name is one of the supplied configuration datasets. The macro file %PDMSUSER%/name.mac is created when the PML data file is saved.

7.5.2

Common Features of Option Switches

General Mappings
Several of the option switches map one set of values (DRAFT) to another (MicroStation). For example, DRAFT colour numbers may be mapped to MicroStation colour numbers, and DRAFT line styles may be mapped to MicroStation numbered or customised line-styles. These mappings are all handled in the same way.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Each mapping consists of one or more sub-mappings, separated by commas. Each submapping has a left-hand (DRAFT) list and a right-hand (MicroStation) list separated by a colon. Each list can include elements that are numbers (non-negative integers or reals) or strings (quoted or unquoted). Multiple elements are separated by a + character. Integers may be separated by a '-' character to represent an inclusive range. A right-hand list of integers can include the characters 'R' (repeat) or 'D integer' (default). The following rules apply: The left-hand list must not be empty. If the right-hand list has a single element, all values in the left-hand list are mapped to the same value. If the right-hand list has the same number of elements as the left-hand list, each element in the left list is mapped to the corresponding element in the right list. If the right-hand list contains integers with an 'R' option, each element of the right-hand list is used in turn, the elements being repeated as necessary. If the right-hand list contains integers with a 'D' option, each element of the right-hand list is used in turn once only, then the default value is used for all further mappings as necessary.

Example: 'CHAINED:pdmsChained, DASHED:pdmsDashed, DDOTTED: pdmsDdotted' '1-11:15,12-20:33-41' '1-20:26-30R' '20-29:1-3D6' (maps 1:26, 2:27, 3:28, 4:29, 5:30, 6:26, 7:27, etc.) (maps 20:1, 21:2, 23:3, 24:6, 25:6, etc.)

Quoted Strings
Strings within mappings may be quoted, if necessary, with ' or | characters. For example, some MicroStation custom line-styles have names that include a comma or colon, such as {dash, medium}. In order to map to this MicroStation custom line-style, you must use an extra set of quotes to prevent the name being treated simply as {dash. You need outer quotes to tell DRAFT where the option string ends, and inner ones to tell Draft_DGN_LI where each line-style name ends, thus:

SWITCH MapLineStyle |DASHED:'{dash, medium}',LDASHED:' (dash, long}'|

A string must be quoted if any of the following apply: It contains a comma, colon or plus character. It starts or ends with a space or tab. It starts with a minus, single quote or vertical bar. It starts with a digit but is not a number (e.g., 345P).

Continuing Long Mappings

Some mappings may require string lengths longer than the permitted maximum (about 100 characters). To achieve this, switches may be continued. Continuation switches have the same name as the base switch, but extended by a single letter between A and Z. These

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

must be used in alphabetic order. For example, the following long switch setting (all one line):

SWITCH MapLineStyle |CHAINED:pdmsChained, DDOTTED:pdmsDdotted, DASHED:'{ dash, medium }',LDASHED:'{ dash, long }'|
could be split over the following switch setting

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH

MapLineStyle MapLineStyleA MapLineStyleB MapLineStyleC

|CHAINED:pdmsChained| |DDOTTED:pdmsDdotted| |DASHED:'{ dash, medium }'| |LDASHED:'{ dash, long }'|

Note: Continuation switches can be used in DLICON configuration syntax. They cannot be used in the LIEXEC command syntax.

7.5.3

File-Related and Miscellaneous Options

Several switches in this section represent pathnames. These can include standard PDMS environment variable settings; for example:

SWITCH SeedFileName '%PDMSEXE%\dgndata\pdmsSeed2d.dgn'

A file name can include internal spaces without problems, but spaces at the start or end of the file name require additional quotes; for example:

SWITCH SeedFileName 'C:\Program Files\MicroStation\from PDMS.dgn' SWITCH SeedFileName '| seed with leading spaces.dgn|' OutputFileName
Specifies the output DGN file name produced when exporting DGN file information. For example:

SWITCH OutputFileName '%PDMSUSER%\DGN_file_name.dgn' SeedFileName

Specifies the DGN seed file name to be used to create the output DGN file. If no seed file name is provided, an internal default seed will be used. The seed file must be a valid MicroStation 2D seed file, and must not contain any inconsistent element data. Any tag-set definitions in the seed must not conflict with those created by Draft_DGN_LI. For example:

SWITCH SeedFileName '%PDMSEXE%\dgndata\pdmsSeed2d.dgn' SWITCH SeedFileName 'mySeedFile.dgn'

The use of a seed file is optional. A sample seedfile pdmsSeed2d.dgn is supplied with Draft_DGN_LI. This contains a colour table that maps the default PDMS colours 1-16 into Microstation colours. Note: In configurations that use the supplied seedfile, the MapColour switch should be set to 1-256:0-255

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Units
MicroStation uses three levels of working units: Master Units, Sub-Units and Positional Units (or Units of Resolution). The seed file contains the size ratios of these three units, and may contain descriptions (max. two characters) of the master and sub-units, but there is no universal set of descriptions in use. The Units switch may be used to override the settings in the seed file, and must contain the size of a master unit in millimetres (MASTMM): Master Units Sub-Units Positional Units Description MASTNAME, size in millimetres MASTMM Description SUBNAME, ratio per master unit SU Ratio per sub-unit PU

These keywords are not case-sensitive, but the values of MASTNAME and SUBNAME are case-sensitive. The most common scenarios will be: The working units are set up in the seed file. In this case, the Units switch just contains the size of a master unit in mm. For example, with an imperial seed file, with master units inches, the Units switch should be:

SWITCH Units 'MASTMM:25.4'

The working units in the configuration override those in the seed file: all Units options are needed. (A minor exception is that if the MASTNAME setting is recognised as a common value, MASTMM may be omitted.) For example, to set both the master and sub-unit names to millimetres, with one sub-unit per master unit, and 1270 positional units per sub-unit, the Units switch should be:

SWITCH Units 'MASTNAME:mm,SUBNAME:mm,SU:1,PU:1270,MAS TMM:1.0'

The MASTNAME and SUBNAME values cannot be quoted strings, but can include characters such as " (inches) and ' (feet). Only the first two characters of these values are significant, and it is not possible to include a space or comma in them. (If you wish to use a space or comma in MASTNAME and SUBNAME values, you must set up the working units in the seed file, as in the first scenario.) Some more examples of Units settings, respectively for Master units in feet accurate to 1/ 64th inch; and metres accurate to 0.01mm:

SWITCH Units |MASTNAME:',SUBNAME:",SU:12,PU:64, MASTMM:304.8| SWITCH Units 'MASTNAME:m,SUBNAME:mm,SU:1000,PU:100, MASTMM:1000.0' ScaleFactor

A Scale Factor is applied to the entire DGN file to enable full-scale Design units to be output in the DGN file. The default value is 1.0.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

ShiftX
A horizontal shift is applied to everything written to the DGN file to position the drawing at any required place on the Design Plane. The shift is measured in MicroStation Master Units, and the default value is 0.0.

ShiftY
A vertical shift is applied to everything written to the DGN file to position the drawing at any required place on the Design Plane. The shift is measured in MicroStation Master Units, and the default value is 0.0.

ExcludeBack
If this switch is set to On (the default is Off), any Backing Layer of the DRAFT drawing is not transferred to the DGN file.

ExcludeOlay
If this switch is set to On, (the default is Off), any Overlays on the DRAFT drawing are not transferred to the DGN file.

ExcludeSheetFrame
If this switch is set to On, (the default is Off), the sheet frame on the DRAFT drawing is not transferred to the DGN file.

ExcludeFill
If this switch is set to On, (the default is Off), no hatching (including solid fill) in the DRAFT drawing is transferred to the DGN file. This may be useful for good performance in MicroStation, since hatching is transferred as a set of lines.

ExcludeSolidFill
If this switch is set to On, (the default is Off), all solid fill is ignored and not transferred to the DGN file. However, other Hatching is still transferred.

ExcludeArrowFill
If this switch is set to On, (the default is Off), any solid fill for terminators on dimension-lines and label leader-lines is omitted from the transfer to the DGN file. Other solid fill and hatching is transferred. Note: More than one of these switches to Exclude Fill may apply to the same entity. If any of these switches is true, then the entity will be excluded. For example, either ExcludeSolidFill or ExcludeArrowFill could be used to exclude the fill for dimensionline arrowheads. However, ExcludeArrowFill is more specific.

7.5.4

Line/Colour Related Options

MapLineWeights
MicroStation has 32 line-weights (numbered 0-31); DRAFT has 11 line thicknesses (numbered 1-11). The links between them are controlled by the MapLineWeights option, for example:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

SWITCH MapLineWeights '1:0,2:1,3:5,4-11:31' SWITCH MapLineWeights '1-11:0-10'

The second example is the default.

MapLineStyle
MicroStation has seven numbered line-styles, and can also have named custom line-styles. MicroStation documentation recommends using named styles, but some drawing standards specify numbered ones. DRAFT also uses a mixture of named and numbered line-patterns. The MapLineStyle option maps the DRAFT line-pattern to a MicroStation line-style, ignoring line picture and glyphs. (See MapLineStyleByPen for how to map line-styles involving line pictures or glyphs.) A resource file pdms_lsty.rsc supplied with PDMS contains custom line-styles equivalent to the default named PDMS line-patterns. Any ScaleFactor (see ScaleFactor) is applied to custom line-styles used in the DGN file. Any unmapped line-styles map to Solid lines.

The following example maps DRAFTs named line-styles to their nearest equivalents in MicroStations numbered styles. This is the default:

SWITCH MapLineStyle 'SOLID:0,DASHED:2,DOTTED:1,CHAINED:4, LDASHED:3,DDOTTED:6'

The next example maps DRAFT named line-styles to some custom line-styles provided as a MicroStation resource file:

SWITCH MapLineStyle'CHAINED:pdmsChained,DASHED:pdmsDashed ,DDOTTED:pdmsDdotted,DOTTED:pdmsDotted,LDASHED:pdmsDashed ,SOLID:0,TCHAINED:pdmsTChained'

Custom line-style names can include spaces and punctuation; for example, the default MicroStation/J installation includes styles { -E- } and { Cable / Tele }. See Quoted Strings for details of when you must quote the style-names. As this mapping can get long, (the preceding example is a single line mapping), you may need to use the continuation facilities described in Continuing Long Mappings.

MapLineStyleByPen
More complex DRAFT line-styles can be set up by the combination of line-pattern, line picture, line thickness and glyph. To map these combinations onto MicroStation line-styles, you must map them by Pen Number. (Note that this is the pen number as stored in the database, which is not the same as the pen number in the DRAFT Administrator User Defined Pen Settings form.) For example, you might have DRAFT pen numbers 217 and 222 set up as:

setpen 217 colour 4 solid lthick 2 lpic 4 glyph 1 lpicture 22 mode 3 size 2 repeat 12 gap 4 setpen 222 colour 6 solid lthick 1 lpic 22 glyph 12
and wish to map these to the MicroStation custom line-styles Pneumatic and Data link respectively. For this you could use the switch setting:

SWITCH MapLineStyleByPen '217:Pneumatic,222:|Data link|'

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Custom line-style names can include spaces and punctuation; for example, the default MicroStation/J installation includes styles { -E- } and { Cable / Tele }. See Quoted Strings for details of when you must quote the style-names. As this mapping can get long, you may need to use the continuation facilities described in Continuing Long Mappings.

MapColour
Both DRAFT and MicroStation use colour numbers, and the mapping between them is controlled by the MapColour switch. The interpretation of these colours by MicroStation depends on the colour-table loaded (this can be included in the seed file). For example:

SWITCH MapColour '1:11,2:1,3:6,4:2,5:3,6:4,7:5,8:37,9:33, 10:0,15:254' SWITCH MapColour '1:96,2:51,3:22,4:52,5:50,6:15,7:49, 8:64,9:51,10:0,11:96,12:13,13:63,14:197,15:25416:37'

The second example gives a fairly close fit in MicroStation to the DRAFT colours used if no seed-file is specified. This is the default mapping. Any unmapped colours are mapped to MicroStation colour 0. The sample seed-file pdmsSeed2d.dgn contains this mapping. The following mapping should be used with this seed-file:

SWITCH MapColour 1-256:0-255

The default mapping is 1-256:0-255. Any unmapped colours are mapped to MicroStation colour 0. This mapping should be used when the supplied seedfile is used.

MarkerSize
This option sets the size of a DRAFT marker in millimetres (at scale 1). The size of a marker in the DGN file will be the product of this size, the scale of the relevant DRAFT pen, and the overall ScaleFactor switch setting (see ScaleFactor). The default is 1.0.

7.5.5

Font Related Options

In addition to the font switches below, further work is required to import DRAFT text correctly into MicroStation. This is covered more fully in Guidelines for Importing DGN Files from DRAFT into MicroStation. The following summarises the requirements: The DRAFT fonts supplied with the AVEVA product (PDMS fonts) must be set up in MicroStation using a fonts resource file. The contents of this file are project-specific. A pdmsSamFont.rsc file is provided, based on the fonts used in the SAM project supplied with AVEVA Plant/Marine. In order for the geometric data required to be exported to MicroStation, it is also necessary to use font geometry files during the transfer to the DGN file. Such files fontnnn.dgn, where nnn is the Microstation font number, may be set up using MicroStation. These files are provided in the dgndata directory below %PDMSEXE%. In order to use these files, it is necessary to set up an environment variable %OPENDGN_FONT_DIR% which points to this directory.

MapFont
This option maps from DRAFT's font numbers (11-16, 21-26, 31-36, 41-46) and the special SYMBOL to MicroStation font numbers. DRAFT font numbers 1 and 10 are treated as equivalent to 11, 2 and 20 as equivalent to 21, 3 and 30 as equivalent to 31, 4 and 40 as equivalent to 41. For example:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

SWITCH MapFont '11-16:133,21-23:6,24-26:134,31-33:172, 34-36:177,41-43:173,44-46:181,SYMBOL:186'

It is possible to modify the MicroStation font size and position by fractions of the original size; for example:

SWITCH MapFont '11-16:133w0.8h1.2u0.2'

This scales the font by a factor of 0.8 horizontally and a factor of 1.2 vertically, and shifts it up by 0.2 of a character height. The control codes include: w h u r s l p m Width Factor Height Factor Offset Up Offset Right Slope (in degrees) Underline separation Adjustments for a PDMS font (this includes scaling of w1.25h1.25) Adjustments for a MicroStation native font (default).

Example:

SWITCH MapFont 11-13:133p,14-16:105m,21-23:6p,24-26:134p, 31-33:172p,34-36:177p,41-43:173p,44-46:181p,SYMBOL:186p

This font mapping maps PDMS fonts with a best fit for adjustment factors. For PDMS Font family 1, the bold font is mapped to a MicroStation native font. The default is:

SWITCH MapFont '11-46:105,SYMBOL:105'

Note: Using the SYMBOL font will only produce good results if it is mapped to a font containing suitable symbol-characters in the correct character positions. The SYMBOL font is included in the MicroStation resource file pdmsSamFont.rsc supplied with AVEVA Plant/Marine. When using the supplied resource file, the following font mapping should be used:

SWITCH MapFont 11-16:201p,21-23:202p,24-26:203p, 31-33:204p,34-36:205p,41-43:206p,44-46:207p,SYMBOL:255p FontSlopes

This option controls whether DRAFT font slopes are translated into MicroStation text slants (default On) or are ignored (Off).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.5.6

Level-Related Options
MicroStation/J supports a maximum of 63 levels (numbered 1-63). Each DGN graphical element is on one and only one level. MicroStation also offers names for levels, but Draft_DGN_LI always refers to levels by number.

LevelDefault
This switch sets the default level: i.e. the level that will be used if no other switches or rules apply. The default value is 1. Example:

SWITCH LevelDefault '63' LevelPen

This switch can set a mapping to DGN levels associated with DRAFT pen numbers. This allows fine control of which levels are used for which parts of the DRAFT drawing. (Note that this is the pen-number as stored in the database, which is not the same as the pen number in the DRAFT Administrator User Defined Pen Settings form.) Example:

SWITCH LevelPen '10-20:30-40,100-200:63'

This puts lines and text drawn with pen 10 onto level 30, pen 11 onto level 31 and so on, up to pen 20 onto level 40. DRAFT pens 100 to 200 are put onto level 63. Any other pens have no specific levels, and the default level is used. Note that levels set by LevelBack (see LevelBack) or Level Rules (see Level Rules) take priority over this switch.

LevelBack
This switch can set the level number for the backing sheet and everything contained within it. The default is Off. If this option is switched On, then no other level switches or rules will apply to items within the backing sheet. Example:

SWITCH LevelBack '63'

This uses level 63 for the backing sheet and everything within it.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:25

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Level Rules
Standard selection syntax is used to define Level Rules. These specify how design elements are to be organised onto DGN Levels. Example:

LEVEL ALL STRU, 'ON 36' LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ALL BRAN ALL EQUI ( /C1101 ALL LAYE ALL LAYE ALL LAYE ALL LAYE WITH ( HBOR GE 100 OR TBOR GE 100 ) , 'ON 40' WITH :purpose EQ HVAC, 'ON 44' ) , 'ON 55' WITH ( PURP EQ 'ADCA' ) , 'ON 21' WITH ( PURP EQ 'ADEA' ) , 'ON 22' WITH ( PURP EQ 'MATB' ) , 'ON 23' , 'ON 24'

Rules are applied in order; therefore, if a rule has already been applied for a given element, a later rule will not affect it. Using the order specified in the above examples, a LAYE with PURP ADCA will be placed on level 21 not on level 24. However a LAYE with PURP XXXX would still be placed on level 24 even if there was a later rule which apparently placed it elsewhere. Design elements which can have level rules include: SITE, ZONE, STRU, SUBS, FRMW, SBFR, EQUI, SUBE, PIPE, BRAN, HVAC, REST, GRDM, PTRA, BOUN, DRAWI (when owned by a SITE or ZONE) and all Piping Components. DRAFT elements which can have level rules include: LAYE, NOTE, OLAY, VNOT, GLAB, SLAB, ADIM, LDIM, PDIM and RDIM. These rules can operate with a level pool. This consists of one or more levels, which are allocated as required. For example, a DRAFT Sheet may have several overlays, and you may want each overlay on a separate DGN Level within the range 50 to 59 (the levels assigned for overlays in your drawing standards). A level pool consists of one or more integers or integer ranges, separated by commas, with the optional characters R, meaning repeat the pool if necessary, and 'D integer' to specify a default value when the pool is exhausted (see General Mappings). For example, to use levels 3, 5, 6, and 7 for the first four sites, and then put any other sites on level 9, specify the switch setting:

LEVEL ALL SITE ,'POOL 3,5-7D9'

To use levels 6-10 for all sites, reusing them in turn as necessary, specify:

LEVEL ALL SITE ,'POOL 6-10R '

To use levels 6-10 for the first four sites, then put any other sites on levels specified by whatever other switches apply, do not use either a D or an R, thus:

LEVEL ALL SITE ,'POOL 6-10'

Note: Only the first rule that matches an element is ever considered.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:26

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.5.7

Group Related Options

MicroStation groups are also known as anonymous or orphan cells. They have a limited capacity. If a group reaches this limit, that group will be closed and a new group opened (a message will be written to the log-file, if any, each time this occurs). Any tags associated with the group will be associated with the first group created. Note: The groups produced are never nested.

GroupSymb
The default for this switch is Off. If it is switched On, a single group is created for each instanced DRAFT symbol if no other group is active.

GroupFill
The default for this switch is Off. If it is switched On, a single group is created for each DRAFT hatch/fill pattern if no other group is active.

GroupFrame
The default for this switch is Off. If it is switched On, a single group is created for each DRAFT view frame if no other group is active. This option puts the line representing the frame itself, not the contents of the frame, into the group.

Group Rules
Standard selection syntax is used to define Group Rules. These specify how design elements are to be organised into MicroStation groups. If element attributes are included in group definitions, they will be attached to the groups as MicroStation tags. For example:

GROUP ALL STRU, INCLUDE NAME GROUP ALL BRAN WITH ( HBOR GE 100 ) , INCLUDE NAME SPREF
Design elements which can have group rules include: SITE, ZONE, STRU, SUBS, FRMW, SBFR, EQUI, SUBE, PIPE, BRAN, HVAC, REST, GRDM, PTRA, BOUN, DRAWI (when owned by a SITE or ZONE) and all Piping Components. DRAFT elements which can have group rules include: LAYE, NOTE, OLAY, VNOT, GLAB, SLAB, ADIM, LDIM, PDIM and RDIM. Only the first Group rule that matches an element is ever considered. The order of the rules is therefore important. Note: Elements may be both grouped and levelled. Group rules specify that one group will be created for each occurrence of an element that fits a given rule. Level rules specify that all elements, which fit a given rule, will be placed on the same level or range of levels. Example:

GROUP ALL GLAB LEVEL ALL GLAB, ON 25

places each GLAB in a separate group places the group for each GLAB on Level 25

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:27

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.5.8

Product Support Options

LogFileName
This switch sets the name used for the log file. The default value is

%PDMSUSER%\Draft_DGN_LI_log.txt.
Example:

SWITCH LogFileName '%PDMSUSER%\example27.txt'

7.5.9

Validation feature and options

It is important to be able to syntax-check switches and rules. The Validate feature checks the syntax of all switches in a supplied configuration. Example:

LIEXEC /Draft_DGN_LI 'VALIDATE' MapColour 1-256:0-255'

It also has extra switches, CheckLevelRule and CheckGroupRule, which check that values are valid as the text string for a Level or Group rule, respectively. Example: LIEXEC /Draft_DGN_LI 'VALIDATE' CHECKLEVELRULE 'POOL 3,5,8-10R' LIEXEC /Draft_DGN_LI 'VALIDATE' CHECKGROUPRULE 'INCLUDE NAME' It is expected that the Validate feature will be used mainly by applicationware and macro writers.

7.5.10

Summary of Switches and Rules to Control DGN Export

Option name OutPutFileName SeedFileName Units

Value [default] [output.dgn] [internal default seed file]

Description Pathname for DGN export file. Pathname for seed file used to create DGN export file. Ratios of Master Units to Sub-Units and of Units of Resolution (Positional Units) to Sub-Units. Can also specify descriptions (max. two characters) for Master Units and Sub-Units.

ScaleFactor ShiftX

[1.0] [0.0]

Scaling factor applied to entire DGN file. Horizontal shift in Master Units applied to the entire DGN file.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:28

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Option name ShiftY ExcludeBack

Value [default] [0.0] On [Off]

Description Vertical shift in Master Units applied to the entire DGN file. Suppresses transfer of DRAFT Backing Layer to DGN file. DRAFT Backing Layer transferred to DGN file. Suppresses transfer of DRAFT Overlays to DGN file. DRAFT Overlays transferred to DGN file. Suppresses transfer of DRAFT Sheet Frame to DGN file. DRAFT Sheet Frames transferred to DGN file. Suppresses transfer of Hatching (including solid fill) to the DGN file Hatching and solid fill transferred to DGN file. Suppresses transfer to the DGN file of Solid fill Solid fill transferred to DGN file. Suppresses transfer to the DGN file of fill for Dimension-line and Leader-line terminators Fill for Terminators transferred to DGN file. MicroStation has 32 line weights (0-31); DRAFT has 11 line weights (1-11). Maps DRAFT's line patterns to nearest equivalent MicroStation line style, ignoring line pictures and glyphs. Any unmapped line styles default to Solid lines.

ExcludeOlay

On [Off]

ExcludeSheetFrame

On [Off]

ExcludeFill

On [Off]

ExcludeSolidFill

On [Off]

ExcludeArrowFill

On

[Off] MapLineWeights MapLineStyle [1-11:0-10] [Solid:0, Dashed:2, Dotted:1, Chained:4, LDashed:3 DDotted:6]

MapLineStyleByPen

Maps DRAFT's pen numbers, which can define combinations of line pattern, line thickness and glyphs, to MicroStation line styles. Maps DRAFT colour numbers MicroStation colour numbers. [1.0] to

MapColour MarkerSize

Sets size of a DRAFT marker in mm (at scale = 1).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:29

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Option name MapFont

Value [default] [11-46:105, SYMBOL:105] [On] Off

Description Maps DRAFT font numbers (11-16, 21-26, 31-36, 41-46, SYMBOL) to MicroStation font numbers. Translates DRAFT font MicroStation text slants. Ignores DRAFT font slopes. Sets default level to be used by MicroStation if no other switches or rules apply. Map items associated with specific DRAFT pen numbers to MicroStation levels. Sets MicroStation level to be used for backing sheet (and items within it). A set of rules that assign specified PDMS element types to MicroStation levels. Can use R (repeat) and D (default) syntax to set up level pools. slopes to

FontSlopes

LevelDefault

[1]

LevelPen LevelBack Level Rules

GroupSymb

On [Off]

Creates single MicroStation group for each DRAFT symbol if no other group is active. Does not automatically create group for DRAFT symbols. Creates single MicroStation group for each DRAFT hatch/fill pattern if no other group is active. Does not automatically create group for DRAFT hatch/fill patterns. Creates single MicroStation group for each DRAFT view frame if no other group is active. (Group will contain frame line, but not frame content.) Does not automatically create group for DRAFT view frame. A set of rules that assign specified element types to MicroStation groups. Any attributes included in group definitions will be attached to groups as MicroStation tags.

GroupFill

On

[Off] GroupFrame On

[Off] Group Rules

LogFile

On [Off]

Creates log file to record error messages generated during creation of DGN file. Log file is not created.

LogFileName

[%PDMSUSER%\ Pathname for log file (if LogFile is set to DRAFT_DGN_LI_ On). log.txt]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:30

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.5.11

Limitations
The following limitations apply: DRAFT's intelligent blanking primitives are not exported to the DGN file. User-defined glyphs and line pictures are ignored. However, it is possible to specify a MicroStation custom line-style for a given DRAFT pen number. Differentially scaled symbols are not supported. Hatching (fill) is exported as a set of poly-lines. Dimensions are not exported as MicroStation dimensions. However, they may be grouped. Multi-byte fonts are not supported with MicroStation/J.

7.6
7.6.1

Guidelines for Importing DGN Files from DRAFT into MicroStation

Introduction
DRAFT drawings can be passed into MicroStation as DGN files. Various switches and rules are available in DRAFT to allow the DGN output to be configured as required. These notes refer only to MicroStation/J and the DGN files produced from DRAFT. A configuration can be defined which allows DRAFT DGN files to be imported into a freshly installed version of MicroStation/J with correct geometry, colours and styles. However, the fonts are not likely to be correct. These notes contain guidelines on how to produce DGN drawings from DRAFT with the correct fonts, and how to improve other aspects of the translation.

7.6.2

Exporting DRAFT Drawings Containing PDMS Fonts

The AVEVA product is issued with a very large number of font files (AVEVA fonts) that have been assembled over a long period from the public domain, in-house and the user community. They have all been translated to the AutoCAD standard and take the form of pairs of source (.shp) and compiled (.shx) files. These notes discuss how to install these fonts into MicroStation in line with the original DRAFT drawing. Experienced MicroStation users may know alternative ways of doing this. Two alternative approaches are: Use AVEVAs Fontconverter utilities to create PDMS-compatible versions from .shp versions of the fonts you wish to use in MicroStation Use MicroStation standard fonts similar to the PDMS fonts, and accept some differences in text output.

If you use DRAFTs alternative character set for characters such as or you will need to install AVEVAs symbol font. It is not possible to install a 16 bit font (.SHX) file into Microstation/J or earlier. The set of PDMS fonts required in MicroStation is project dependent. The supplied font resource file pdmsSamFont.rsc uses the PDMS fonts associated with the SAM project. Individual projects may have different fonts in use, so will require a different font resource file. See Creating a New Font Resource Library for instructions on how to create such resource files.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:31

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Font resource files should be installed alongside the corresponding MicroStation font resource files, typically in

... \bentley\workspace\system\symb
pdmsSamFont.rsc uses particular MicroStation font numbers (201 to 207 for text fonts and 255 for the symbol font). These are mapped to DRAFT fonts using the MapFont switch in DRAFT. It is possible that these font numbers may clash with fonts in other font resource files in use. If this happens, see section Changing MicroStation Font Numbers for instructions on how to modify MicroStation font numbers. When you install additional fonts into MicroStation, DRAFT needs additional information on the font geometry to export the drawing. This is supplied as a set of font geometry files, fontNNN.dgn (where NNN is a MicroStation font number referred to in the font resources file). These fontNNN.dgn files must be in either the current directory, or a directory accessed by the environment variable OPENDGN_FONT_DIR. This variable OPENDGN_FONT_DIR should be set to %PDMSEXE%\dgndata or wherever the font geometry files have been installed. Font geometry files are supplied for the fonts used in the SAM project. These correspond to pdmsSamFont.rsc and are supplied in the directory PDMSEXE%\dgndata. Select the Required .rsc Library contains instructions as to how to create further fontNNN.dgn files for other fonts. Mapping the Installed Fonts discusses how PDMS font numbers are mapped onto font file names. All PDMS fonts are supplied in the %PDMSEXE%\autodraftfonts directory, in AutoCAD format as .shx files.

7.6.3

Installing PDMS Fonts into MicroStation

To keep them separate the required fonts should be installed into a new font resource library called, for example, myfont.rsc, which should be placed with the supplied font resource libraries, typically in the directory:

... \bentley\workspace\system\symb
MicroStation refers to fonts by a number not by the name. PDMS fonts are supplied as AutoCAD .shx files as part of AutoDRAFT. These are supplied in the directory %PDMSEXE%\autodraftfonts (or another location). Once fonts have been installed, they may be checked using the element/text menu. The newly installed fonts should be visible together with the font numbers assigned by MicroStation to the new fonts. If necessary, font numbers may be modified (see Changing MicroStation Font Numbers.). The font installation should follow the step-by-step procedure:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:32

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Creating a New Font Resource Library

(This step may be skipped if using an existing resource library) Menu: Button: Utilities>Install Fonts New (Rightmost window) Button: OK Navigate to the default font library area Enter required library file name - e.g. myfont.rsc

Selecting .shx Files to Add to Resource Library

Menu: Button:

Open (Leftmost window) Set Type to .shx Navigate to a AutoCAD .shx file area Select the required .shx files

Button: Button:

Add Done

Selecting the Library Destination

Button:

Open (Rightmost window) Navigate to default font library area (typically ... \bentley\workspace\system\symb) Select the required font resource library (.rsc file)

Button:

OK

Copying the Fonts into the Library

In the leftmost window, select the required source files. Font details should appear. Button: Button: Copy Done

Checking the Installation

Menu:

Element>Text Use drop down or View to locate the font name The font number assigned by MicroStation is also visible Select to use for text

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:33

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Changing MicroStation Font Numbers

Menu: Button:

Utilities>Install Fonts Open (rightmost window) Navigate to the default font library area

Select the Required .rsc Library

Button:

OK Select the font name in the rightmost window Font details appear The font number and the description may be edited here.

Font geometry files fontNNN.dgn must then be created to match the font numbers in the resource file.

Creating a New Font Geometry File

Font geometry files (or magic font-files) are used by DRAFT to export font geometry and alignment correctly to MicroStation. One of these files is required for each font used. The MicroStation font number NNN is included in the name of these files. These files contain a set of instructions and various other text data. These files should not be modified other than as described below, since the data in these files is required for DRAFT DGN output to work correctly. In order to create a font geometry file for a new font, open an existing font geometry file (a set of these is supplied in %PDMSEXE%\dgndata) and follow the instructions displayed there. This involves using the MicroStation EDG utility to change the font used. (The EDG utility is installed alongside MicroStation, for example in \Bentley\Program\Edg\edg.exe.) The instructions in the fontNNN.dgn files are repeated here. To create an external font do the following: Make sure you have made a copy of this design file. The new name must start with 'font' appended with the font number. (e.g. font186.dgn for MicroStation font number 186) Open this file in EDG first and type 'modify font=<n> whole' where <n> is the new font number. Open this file in MicroStation and type 'mdl load fixrange' (Use Keyin option). Compress and close the design file. (Use Compress on File menu) Place the file in a directory where it can be found by the OpenDGN kernel (which is used by DRAFT DGN output). Either this is either the current directory or a directory accessed by means of an environment variable called 'OPENDGN_FONT_DIR'.

We recommended that these fonts are placed in %PDMSEXE%\dgndata. If you need different font resource libraries for different projects we suggest that you create subdirectories and point OPENDGN_FONT_DIR to the appropriate one for the project.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:34

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

7.6.4

Mapping the Installed Fonts

PDMS fonts normally need the DRAFT export to use a font adjustment factor of 1.25, and a special adjustment when aligning text to the top of the body. This may be achieved by using the code p when mapping the fonts, e.g.

MAPFONT 11-16:201p
For further details, see Configurable DGN Output.

7.6.5

PDMS Font File Names

PDMS font file names follow a naming convention. This is described fully in AVEVAs fontbuilding utilities, but is briefly summarised here. PDMS font families are defined by their IR (International Registration) number and Style number in the system database. Font file names are of the form marrrtswuu, where m=0; a is the alphabet; rrr is the encoding; ts is the type and sub-type; w is the weight; and uu is a serial number. PDMS fonts are exported to AutoCAD as either filled (prefix f), or open (prefix of). All font-files have an 8-character equivalent short name:

Name Latin-1 Latin-2 UK Latin-Cyrillic US Greek Cyrillic SYMBOL

IR Number 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 -

Encoding (marrr) 01001 01002 01004 09998

Short code L1 L2 LB CL

08901 (or 01006) 81 (or LA) 02018 03537 09999 GG CR OP

Name Line Block Serif Italic Script Typewriter Uniform width

PDMS Style number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Font type (tswuu) 11901 Outline 11203 21191 22191 31191 21902 16901

Bold Font type (tswuu) Filled 11203 21291 22291 31291 -

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:35

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

Generally, PDMS uses the 8-bit Latin fonts (08901) instead of US fonts (01006), since these include US characters. Thus IR number 6 Style number 1 is font of0890111901 (short name O8111901); IR number 4 Style number 3 is of 0100421191 (short name OLB21191), bold version of 0100421291 (OLB21291). The fonts available in DRAFT are organised into four font families. Each font family uses up to two font files to set up a range of six font numbers. For example, font family 3 contains two font files to set up fonts 31-33 (normal, forward and back-slant) and the equivalent bold font 34-36. In addition, DRAFT uses a Symbol font for special characters (e.g. ~D gives the degrees symbol). The AVEVA SYMBOL font is of0999911901.shx (shortname OOP11901). The equivalent filled font is f0999911901.shx (shortname FOP11901). To determine the font families used in a AVEVA project, the following ADMIN command should be used: Q FONTFamily In typical AVEVA projects, font family 1 is a line font; font family 2 is a block font; font family 3 is a serif font and font family 4 an italic or typewriter font. Different projects will use different fonts. The following font files are used in the SAM project and are set up in pdmsSamFont.rsc: Font numbers MicroStation Shortname in Project Font Number SAM (FontNNN.dgn) 11-16 21-23 24-26 31-33 34-36 41-43 44-46 SYMBOL 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 255 O8111901.shx OLB11203.shx FLB11203.shx OLB21191.shx Longname Description

of0890111901.shx of0100411203.shx f0100411203.shx of0100421191.shx

US Line UK Block (Outline) UK Block (Filled) UK Serif UK Serif (Bold) UK Hershey Complex Italic UK Hershey Triplex italic PDMS Symbols

OLB21291.shx of0100421291.shx OLB22191.shx of0100422191.shx OLB22291.shx of0100422291.shx FOP11901.shx f0999911901.shx

7.6.6

Colours
We supply a MicroStation colour table pdms_col.tbl, which contains colour definitions matching DRAFTs default settings for Colours 1 to 16, and also for the other named DRAFT colours. This may be installed in the MicroStation data directory alongside the Bentleysupplied colour tables, typically at:

... \bentley\workspace\system\tables

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:36

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

You may, if you wish, attach this colour table to a seed file or design file and set a suitable colour mapping, if you wish to match DRAFT colours as closely as possible.

7.6.7

Line Styles
AVEVA supplies a line style resource file containing definitions of MicroStation custom line styles matching the proportions of DRAFTs named line patterns. This may be installed in the MicroStation font directory alongside Bentley-supplied font resource files, typically at:

... \bentley\workspace\system\symb

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:37

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Plotting and Drawing Output

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

7:38

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

8
8.1

Colours and Styles

Introduction
Every graphics primitive in DRAFT is drawn in a specific colour and style, determined by the values of the relevant colour and style attributes. Within the DRAFT database there are 20 different colour attributes and 17 style attributes, and can be classified as: those for linear (line) primitives (15 linestyle and 15 colour attributes) those for area primitives (one fillstyle and one colour attribute) those for marker primitives (one markerstyle and one colour attribute) those for text primitives (three colour attributes only).

Generally, there is a style attribute for every colour attribute, except that there are no style attributes for text primitives only colour attributes. The term style is used to describe the overall appearance of a line in terms of its thickness and repeating pattern, or to describe a hatching (fill) pattern, or to describe the size and appearance of markers. The full list of colour and style attributes is given below: Attribute type Line Leader-line Label-frame Dimension-line Projection-line Cross-hair Note line Table-row Table-column Front-face Back-face Centre-line Obscured-line LLSTYLE LFSTYLE DLSTYLE PLSTYLE CHSTYLE NLSTYLE ROWSTYLE COLSTYLE FFSTYLE BFSTYLE CLSTYLE OBSTYLE LLCOLOUR LFCOLOUR DLCOLOUR PLCOLOUR CHCOLOUR NLCOLOUR ROWCOLOUR COLCOLOUR FFCOLOUR BFCOLOUR CLCOLOUR OBCOLOUR Style attribute Colour attribute

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Attribute type P-line Member-line Outline Text General text Dimension-line text Projection-line text Fill Fill (hatch pattern) Marker Marker symbol

Style attribute PLNSTYLE MLNSTYLE OLSTYLE

Colour attribute PLNCOLOUR MLNCOLOUR OLCOLOUR

TXCOLOUR DTCOLOUR PTCOLOUR

FSTYLE

FCOLOUR

MSTYLE

MCOLOUR

The colour attributes may be assigned values by colour table index number or by colour name. See Colours for a listing of the colours available. In some circumstances colour attributes may be set to the special values: DEFAULT, TEMPLATE, UNCHANGED. See the relevant sections of this User Guide for details of where these values are allowed. The linestyle attributes may be assigned values that describe system-defined or userdefined line styles. See System-Defined Line Styles and User-Defined Line Styles for further details of these. In some circumstances linestyle attributes may be set to the special values: OFF, DEFAULT, TEMPLATE, UNCHANGED. See the relevant sections of this User Guide for details of where these values are allowed. The fillstyle attribute may be assigned values that describe system-defined or user-defined fill styles. See System-Defined Fill Styles and User-Defined Fill Styles for further details of these. In some circumstances fillstyle attributes may be set to the special values: OFF, DEFAULT, UNCHANGED. See the relevant sections of this User Guide for details of where these values are allowed. The markerstyle attribute may be assigned values that describe system-defined marker styles. See Marker Styles for further details of these. In some circumstances markerstyle attributes may be set to the special values: OFF, DEFAULT. See the relevant sections of this User Guide for details of where these values are allowed. User-defined line and fill styles are defined in the PADD database within a hierarchy headed by a STYLWL element (see DRAFT Database Hierarchy). STYLWL owns Linestyle and Fillstyle Tables (LSTYTB, FSTYTB), beneath which the definitions of user-defined Linestyles and Fillstyles are stored. STYLWL, LSTYTB and FSTYTB are classified as primary elements and can therefore be claimed. The creation and maintenance of STYLWL hierarchies is the responsibility of the DRAFT Administrator.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

8.2

Colours
DRAFT allows you to draw in up to 272 colours, numbered 1 to 272. By default all 272 colour numbers have colour definitions assigned to them: Colour numbers 1 to 16 are assigned by default to the following colours: Colour 1 Colour 2 Colour 3 Colour 4 Colour 5 Colour 6 Colour 7 Colour 8 Grey Red Orange Yellow Green Cyan Blue Violet Colour 9 Colour 10 Colour 11 Colour 12 Colour 13 Colour 14 Colour 15 Colour 16 Brown White Pink Mauve Turquoise Indigo Black Magenta

Colour numbers 17 to 272 are mapped to the colours in the standard AutoCAD Colour Index (ACI). The system maintains a dictionary of 61 colour names that may be used in place of colour numbers when specifying a colour or setting the value of a colour attribute. These names (which include the 16 given above) and their ACI (AutoCAD Colour Index) and RGB values are as follows: COLOUR Black White Whitesmoke Ivory Grey Lightgrey Darkgrey Darkslate Red Brightred Coralred Tomato Plum Deeppink Pink ACI 0 7 7 51 253 254 251 129 12 1 22 20 215 230 243 RED 0.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.510 0.745 0.314 0.208 0.741 1.000 0.741 1.000 0.506 1.000 0.741 GREEN 0.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.510 0.745 0.314 0.310 0.000 0.000 0.180 0.247 0.337 0.000 0.494 BLUE 0.000 1.000 1.000 0.667 0.510 0.745 0.314 0.286 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.506 0.498 0.553

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

COLOUR Salmon Orange Brightorange Orangered Maroon Yellow Gold Lightyellow Lightgold Yellowgreen Springgreen Green Forestgreen Darkgreen Cyan Turquoise Aquamarine Blue Royalblue Navyblue Powderblue Midnight Steelblue Indigo Mauve Violet Magenta Beige Wheat Tan Sandybrown Brown Khaki

ACI 21 40 40 30 226 50 40 51 41 62 110 92 84 108 4 132 120 5 160 176 141 168 142 196 204 221 6 43 31 32 42 36 55

RED 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.408 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.553 0.000 0.000 0.122 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.667 0.000 0.000 0.204 0.376 1.000 1.000 0.741 1.000 0.741 0.741 0.408 0.506

GREEN 0.749 0.749 0.749 0.498 0.000 1.000 0.749 1.000 0.918 0.741 1.000 0.741 0.506 0.310 1.000 0.741 1.000 0.000 0.247 0.000 0.918 0.075 0.553 0.000 0.000 0.667 0.000 0.678 0.831 0.369 0.553 0.204 0.506

BLUE 0.667 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.306 0.000 0.000 0.667 0.667 0.000 0.498 0.000 0.000 0.075 1.000 0.741 0.749 1.000 1.000 0.408 1.000 0.310 0.741 0.408 0.506 0.918 1.000 0.494 0.667 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.337

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

COLOUR Chocolate Darkbrown Blueviolet Firebrick Darkorchid Dimgrey Coral Indianred Lightblue Limegreen Mediumaquamarine Sienna Stateblue

ACI 38 48 190 30 202 252 22 13 151 80 121 34 173

RED 0.310 0.310 0.498 1.000 0.553 0.412 0.741 0.741 0.667 0.247 0.667 0.506 0.495

GREEN 0.153 0.231 0.000 0.498 0.000 0.412 0.180 0.494 0.831 1.000 1.000 0.251 0.494

BLUE 0.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.741 0.412 0.000 0.494 1.000 0.000 0.918 0.000 0.741

Note: the actual RGB definitions of these colours have generally changed at PDMS12 so as to match entries in the ACI. This has led to duplication: thus White and Whitesmoke are both mapped to ACI 7, and Orange, Brightorange and Gold are mapped to ACI 40. The redundant colour names have been maintained for compatibility with previous versions of AVEVA Software. It is possible to change the definitions of colours 1-16 using the COLOUR command. The syntax can take three forms, either specifying a predefined name from the system colour dictionary, or a percentage mixture, or an RGB definition. Typical examples would be:

COLour 3 STEELBLUE COLour 12 MIX RED 80 GREen 50 BLUe 50 COLour 14 RGB 0, 141, 188
Where a percentage mixture is specified all three values must be in the range 0-100. Where an RGB definition is given all three values must be in the range 0-255. Colour definitions can be queried thus:

Q COLour 12 Q COLour RGB 55

Colour attributes can be assigned values by number or name, thus:

LLCOLOUR 54 TXCOLOUR NAVYBLUE

When a colour attribute is queried the name (e.g. orange) will be returned if available, otherwise the colour number will be returned. If a number is specifically required (regardless of whether a name is available, a special colour-number pseudo-attribute should be used. The names of these are derived from the normal colour attributes, e.g. LLCONU/MBER, TXCONU/MBER, FCONUM/BER etc.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

8.3

Line Styles
A pre-defined set of line styles is provided; it is also possible for you to define your own. A line style is defined by the thickness of the line, its repeating pattern, and the optional placement of glyphs and/or text strings along it.

8.3.1

System-Defined Line Styles

A system-defined line style is specified by combining one of ten basic line patterns (see Figure 8:1.: Basic User-Defined Line Patterns) with one of three line widths.
SOLID DDASHED

DASHED

DDOTTED

DOTTED

FDOTTED

CHAINED

DCHAINED

LDASHED

TCHAINED

Figure 8:1.

Basic User-Defined Line Patterns

The line-widths are: THIN MEDIUM THICK single stroke line of minimum thickness 0.2mm approx 0.4mm approx

Thus for example: NLSTYLE LDASHED FFSTYLE SOLID OBSTYLE DOTTEDMedium PLSTYLE DDOTTEDMedium CLSTYLE CHAINEDThick BFSTYLE DASHEDThick gives a long-dashed line of minimum thickness gives a solid line of minimum thickness gives a dotted line of 0.2mm width gives a double-dotted line of 0.2mm width gives a chained line of 0.4mm width gives a dashed line of 0.4mm width

Note that for minimum thickness lines the qualifier THIN is omitted. For historical reasons an alternative set of line patterns is provided (see Figure 8:2.: Alternative Pre-defined Line Patterns).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Figure 8:2.

Alternative Pre-defined Line Patterns

These alternative line-patterns can be combined with widths named WIDE and XWIDE, thus for example: NLSTYLE DASHPattern gives an alternative dashed pattern of minimum thickness

OBSTYLE SHORTDASHWide gives a short-dashed line of 0.2mm width BFSTYLE DASHDOTXWide FFSTYLE SOLIDXWIDE gives a dash-dotted line of 0.4mm width gives a solid line of 0.4mm width

Note that for consistency WIDE and XWIDE can be also used with the basic pattern SOLID.

8.3.2

User-Defined Line Styles

Basic Line Style Functionality
User-defined Line Styles are defined in the database by LINESTyle elements which are members of a Line Style Table (LSTYTB) element. To be valid the definition of a LINEST must include (at the minimum) definitions for dashpattern geometry, pattern repeat distance and line width. The dash-pattern geometry can be defined in two ways, either by specifying an existing system-defined pattern by name or by specifying a sequence of integer numbers that define the relative lengths of the sequence of dashes and gaps that make up the pattern. These two ways are defined by the attributes PATNAM and PATDEF; these are mutually exclusive setting one will unset the other. PATNAMe The name of an existing system-defined line pattern (eg LDASHED) to be used as the basis of the user-defined line style. (see Figure 8:1.: Basic User-Defined Line Patterns or Figure 8:2.: Alternative Predefined Line Patterns for the line patterns that can be used). By default PATNAM will be set to SOLID. A series of integers (max 20) that define the relative lengths of the dashes and gaps. A dash is represented by a positive value and a gap by a negative value. Dashes and gaps must alternate and we recommend that the pattern sequence starts with a dash.

PATDEFinition

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

LWIDTH

The width of the line (in mm or inches). Value 0 is allowed and means the minimum-allowed line width. The maximum allowed width is 2mm (0.078inch). The approximate distance at which the pattern is to be repeated and to which the sum of all the lengths of the dashes and gaps are scaled.

PATREPeat Thus for example:

NEW LINEST /LS1 PATNAM DCHAINED PATREP 45mm LWIDTH 0.2mm

will produce a linestyle similar to the user-defined DCHAINEDMEDIUM style but with a greater repeat distance. And:

NEW LINEST /LS2 PATDEF 10 -3 5 -3 5 -3 10 PATREP 30mm LWIDTH 0

will produce a linestyle of two short dashes inserted between pairs of long dashes. The repeat distance is 30mm and a minimum line width is specified. Element LINEST also has attributes: LSTYNO FUNC ALTDEF This is a system-defined attribute that will have a unique value within the MDB. It is this number that should be used when the Linestyle is used. Text attribute for descriptive purposes. If set it must refer to another LINEST. If set the referenced LINEST will be used on hard copy output. Thus if at /My-Linestyle: ALTDEF is set to /My-Plot-Linestyle it is /My-Plot-Linestyle that will be used on hardcopy output in place of /My-Linestyle. When the LINEST element is created a system-defined line style number is allocated automatically. This is a unique number in the range 1-255 and is held in the LSTYNO attribute of the LNEST element. This is the number to use for a linestyle attribute (eg NLSTYLE) when it is required to use that LINEST. Alternatively, it is usually more convenient to specify a name for the LINEST, and then this is used to set the linestyle attribute (although it will be the LSTYNO value that will be assigned to the linestyle attribute). Thus for example:

NLSTYLE 3 DLSTYLE /DimLineStyle-1

Having created a Linestyle it must be defined within the graphics system by an UPDATE PENSTYLES command if it is to be used during that session of DRAFT. In subsequent sessions it will be automatically defined during module entry.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Advanced Line Style Functionality

It is possible to add a repeated decoration to a line style. This decoration may be a glyph or a text string (or indeed both together). If a repeated glyph is required the following attributes have to be defined: GLYREF GLYNUM The reference of the user-defined glyph The user-defined glyph number.

These two attributes are mutually exclusive setting one will unset the other. For details of user-defined and system-defined glyphs see Glyphs. For example:

GLYREF /flow-arrow GLYNUM SYSpattern 15

GLYNUM may be set OFF. This will cause both GLYNUM and GLYREF to be unset. DECMOD A code number (1-6) to signify how the glyphs are to be distributed. The default value is 3. The code number is interpreted as follows: 1-3 Glyphs spaced along the line. DECMOD 3 is recommended to give the best overall results. Values 1 or 2 may give untidy effects at the ends of spans. One glyph at the end of the line. One glyph at the start of the line, with its axes reversed. A glyph at each end of the line, the first having its axes reversed. The size to which the glyph reference size is scaled. The approximate repeat distance between glyphs. The first glyph has its origin at half the repeat distance from the start of the line. With DECMOD = 2 or 3 DRAFT will adjust the specified repeat distance so as to give an integer number of repeats. With DECMOD = 4, 5 or 6 the glyphs will be placed with their origins at half the repeat distance from the appropriate ends. With DECMOD = 4, 5 or 6 the repeat distance may be 0, otherwise it must be greater than 0. The length of each gap left in the path. This may be 0 if no gaps are required. If it exceeds the glyph repeat distance then the path itself will be completely omitted only the glyphs will be drawn. The default value is 0.

4 5 6 DECSIZ DECREP

DECGAP

Note: All DRAFTs pre-defined glyphs (except numbers 10, 11 and 20) have their origins at their centres and thus a repeat distance of 0 with DECMOD = 4, 5 or 6 will cause them to be centred upon the end(s) of the line. This is generally satisfactory for balloons, dots, etc but with arrowheads it will cause the line to appear longer than defined. To avoid this the repeat distance should be equal to the DECSIZ value. This will cause the origin of each glyph to be positioned at half the repeat distance from the end of the line. If a repeated text string is required, attributes DECMOD, DECSIZ, DECREP and DECGAP must be set as described above. For text strings DECSIZ specifies the character height.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

In addition the following attributes must be set: TXSTRI TXALIG FONT The text string required (32 characters maximum) The vertical alignment. Permitted values are BOTTOM (the default), CENTRE, TOP. The font to be used. This must be a TrueType font. This functionality is not available for use with native PDMS fonts.

Text strings and glyphs can both be defined but they have to have common values for DECMOD, DECSIZ, DECREP, and DECGAP.

8.3.3

Glyphs
Glyphs are used in conjunction with user-defined Linestyles to produce special effects, for example: symbols at the ends of lines or symbols drawn at regular intervals along the line. A set of pre-defined Glyphs is provided, and you can also define your own, which will be stored in the database.

Pre-defined Glyphs
25 pre-defined Glyphs are provided, see Figure 8:3.: Pre-Defined Glyphs

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

System Glyph 1 System Glyph 2 System Glyph 3 System Glyph 4 System Glyph 5 System Glyph 6 System Glyph 7 System Glyph 8 System Glyph 9 System Glyph 10 System Glyph 11 System Glyph 12 System Glyph 13 System Glyph 14 System Glyph 15 System Glyph 16 System Glyph 17 System Glyph 18 System Glyph 19 System Glyph 20 System Glyph 21 System Glyph 22 System Glyph 23 System Glyph 24 System Glyph 25

Double slash L Cross Zigzag 1 Zigzag 2 Break symbol Transverse bar Arrowhead, forward pointing, unfilled Arrowhead, backward pointing, unfilled Open arrowhead, forward pointing Open arrowhead, backward pointing Circle, unfilled Square, unfilled Hexagon, unfilled Diamond, unfilled Arrowhead, forward pointing, filled Arrowhead, backward pointing, filled Circle, filled Star Thick bar Circle, filled, with X overlaid Diamond, filled Broad arrowhead, forward pointing, filled Waveform Square, filled

Figure 8:3.

Pre-Defined Glyphs

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

User-Defined Glyphs
User-defined Glyphs are defined in the database by GLYPH elements which are members of a Glyph Table (GLYTB) element. GLYPHs have the following attributes: GLYNO: This is a system defined attribute that will have a unique value within the Multiple Database (MDB). It is this number that should be used when the Glyph is used in conjunction with a user-defined Linestyle. (Integer) The value that will be mapped to the DECSIZ attribute value of the LINEST when the Glyph is used. Thus if a Glyph with REFSIZ 2000 consisting of a circle of diameter 1000 is used in conjunction with a LINEST with DECSIZ 6mm the result will be a line with 3mm diameter circles. The database default value is 100. Text attribute for descriptive purposes

REFSIZe:

FUNCtion:

GLYPH elements may own GLYCIR, GLYREC, and GLYOUT elements that represent circles, rectangles, and outlines. In addition to the basic attribute(s) that define their dimensions these glyph-primitive elements may be rotated and offset from the glyph origin, and may be solid-filled.

Element GLYCIRcle has attributes:

GDIAMeter: GOFFSet: GFILLD:

(Integer) The diameter of the Circle. (2 Integers) The X & Y offsets of the Circle centre point from the Glyph origin. If set TRUE will cause the Circle to be solid-filled. By default this will be FALSE.

Element GLYRECtangle has attributes:

GXLENgth: GYLENgth: GANGLE: GOFFSet: GFILLD:

(Integer) The length of the X-side of the Rectangle (Integer) The length of the Y-side of the Rectangle. (Degrees) The rotation of the Rectangle about its centre point. (2 Integers) The X & Y offsets of the Rectangle centre point from the Glyph origin. If set TRUE will cause the Rectangle to be solid-filled. By default this will be FALSE.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Element GLYOUTline has attributes:

GDEFINition: GANGLE: GOFFSet: GFILLD:

(Integer array). A series of XY coordinates describing the Outline. The syntax is given below. (Degrees) The rotation of the Outline about its origin. (2 Integers) The X & Y offsets of the Outline origin from the Glyph origin. If set TRUE will cause the Outline to be solid-filled. By default this will be FALSE.

A GLYOUT is a series of spans that may be straight lines or circular arcs. They may be continuous or discontinuous. The geometry of these is created using the syntax of the <GDEFIN> graph and stored in the GDEFIN attribute. The syntax is:

GDEFIN -- M/TO -- <int2> --|-- L/TO -- <int2> --|-- <int2> | | | |-- M/TO | | | |-- L/TO | | | |-- ANG/TO | | | `--> | | `-- ANG/TO -- <int3> -|- <int3> | |- M/TO | |- L/TO | |- ANG/TO | `-->

-- etc etc etc - etc

- etc etc etc - etc

Where <int2> <int3>

represents the input of 2 integers to define the coordinates of the end point of a straight-line span, represents the input of 3 integers defining the angle subtended by a circular arc plus the coordinates of the end point of the arc. A positive angle denotes a counter-clockwise arc, a negative angle denotes a clockwise arc.

The sequence must start with the MTO (MoveTo) keyword followed by two integers. This defines the start point of the Outline. This must be followed by the LTO (LineTo) or ANGTO (AngleTo) keyword and then two or three integers respectively to define the first span.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Having defined a span another similar span can be defined immediately by the input of two or three integers or alternatively the type of span can be changed by a LTO or ANGTO keyword. If a break in the Outline is required the MTO keyword must be used to define the start of a new sequence. For example, a symbolic flower-head of reference diameter 120 with alternating filled and unfilled petals could be defined as follows:

NEW GLYPH REFSIZ 120 NEW GLYOUT GDEFINE MTO 10 0 NEW GLYOUT GANGLE 45 GFILLD TRUE NEW GLYOUT GANGLE 90 NEW GLYOUT COPY GLYPH 1 GANGLE 135 GFILLD TRUE NEW GLYOUT NEW GLYOUT COPY GLYPH 1 COPY GLYPH 1 GANGLE 180 GANGLE 225 GFILLD TRUE NEW GLYOUT NEW GLYOUT COPY GLYPH 1 COPY GLYPH 1 GANGLE 270 GANGLE 315 GFILLD TRUE NEW GLYOUT NEW GLYCIR GDIAM 15 GFILLD TRUE COPY GLYPH 1 GANGLE 180 COPY GLYPH 1 LTO 50 -17 ANG 45 50 17 LTO 10 0 COPY GLYPH 1

8.3.4

Using Glyphs
Glyphs are used in conjunction with LINEStyle elements. The LINEST's GLYNUM attribute defines the glyph to be used. This may be set as follows:

GLYNUM/ber OFF GLYNUM SYS/temglyph 10

(the default value) (in the range 1-25)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

GLYNUM 3 GLYNUM /My-Glyph

(the GLYNO value of the required GLYPH)

The LINEST's DECSIZ attribute should be set to define the size to which the Glyphs REFSIZ value is to scaled.

8.4

Fill Styles
Fill Styles are used whenever it is required to hatch an area on a drawing. This hatched area may either be part of the annotation (a hatched OUTLine element for example) or may be produced by the auto-hatching capability of the Update Design process. A Fill Style is defined either as 'Solid Fill' or by 1 or 2 Hatch Patterns. A Hatch Pattern is defined in terms of three parameters: Angle (HANGLE): the slope of the hatch lines in degrees measured in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal. The value specified must lie in the range -360 to 360. If not specified a value of 45 will be assumed. the spacing between the hatch lines. If 0 then a solid fill is achieved. The specified value will always be used in plot files; on terminals the spacing will be device-dependent but it will be related to the specified value. If no value is given, 3 mm will be assumed. this is the offset of the hatch-pattern from the bottom left-hand corner of the picture. It is only of real use when two hatchpatterns with the same angle and separation are combined together. If they have different offsets double-line hatching can be achieved. If no value is given 0 is assumed.

Separation (HSEPAR):

Offset (HOFFSE):

8.4.1

System-Defined Fill Styles

Eighteen system-defined fill styles plus a solid-fill capability are provided. System styles 1 to 10 are defined by a single hatch pattern, and are shown (within square RECT primitives) in Figure 8:4.: Hatch Patterns 1-10. These provide two separations (2mm and 4mm) and six angles (30, -30, 45, -45, 0, 90 deg). The offset value for all of these settings is zero.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

HPATTERN 1 Angle 30 Gap 4mm

HPATTERN 6 Angle 90 Gap 2mm

HPATTERN 2 Angle -30 Gap 4mm

HPATTERN 7 Angle 30 Gap 2mm

HPATTERN 3 Angle 45 Gap 4mm

HPATTERN 8 Angle -30 Gap 2mm

HPATTERN 4 Angle -45 Gap 4mm

HPATTERN 9 Angle 45 Gap 2mm

HPATTERN 5 Angle 0 Gap 2mm

HPATTERN 10 Angle -45 Gap 2mm

Figure 8:4.

Hatch Patterns 1-10

Patterns 11-18 are combinations or variants of hatch patterns 1-10, and are defined as: Pattern 11: Pattern 12: Pattern 13: Pattern 14: Pattern 15: 45 deg, cross-hatching, 4mm separation 45 deg, cross-hatching, 2mm separation 90 deg, cross-hatching, 2mm separation 30 deg, double-line hatching, 4mm separation 45 deg, double-line hatching, 4mm separation

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Pattern 16: Pattern 17: Pattern 18:

30 deg, single-line hatching, 1mm separation 45 deg, single-line hatching, 1mm separation -45 deg, single-line hatching, 6mm separation

Patterns 11-18 are illustrated in Figure 8:5.: Hatch Patterns 11-18.

Figure 8:5.

Hatch Patterns 11-18

To fill an area of a primitive with a system-defined hatch pattern, the fill style attribute of the primitives is set using the command: FSTYLE SYStempattern integer To fill an area with system-defined hatch pattern 12, for example, the following would be used:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

FSTYLE SYS 12
To solid fill an area, use the command:

FSTYLE SOL

8.4.2

User-Defined Fill Styles

User-defined Fill Styles are defined in the database by FILLSTyle elements which are members of a Fill Style Table (FSTYTB) element. They own HPATTErn elements. Thus the commands: NEW FILLST /My-Fillstyle NEW HPATTE HANGLE 35 HSEPAR 3.5mm will create a Fillstyle composed of parallel lines 3.5mm apart at an angle of 35deg. Adding a second HPATTE thus: NEW HPATTE HANGLE 35 HSEPAR 3.5mm HOFFSE 1mm will convert /My-Fillstyle into a double-line Fill Style with double lines (1mm between them) repeated every 3.5mm Adding additional HPATTEs will have no effect - the third and subsequent ones (in database list order) will be ignored. Element FILLST also has attributes: FSTYNO: This is a system defined attribute that will have a unique value within the MDB. It is this number that should be used when the Fillstyle is used. If set TRUE will cause the Fillstyle to provide solidfill. The default setting is FALSE. Text attribute for descriptive purposes. If set it must refer to another FILLST. If set the referenced FILLST will be used on hard copy output. Thus if at /My-Fillstyle: ALTDEF is set to /My-Plot-Fillstyle it is /My-Plot-Fillstyle that will be used on hardcopy output in place of /My-Fillstyle. The default setting is unset. When the FILLST element is created a system-defined fill style number is allocated automatically. This is a unique number in the range 1-255 and is held in the FSTYNO attribute of the FILLST element. This is the number to use for the FSTYLE attribute when it is required to use that FILLST.

SOLFILled: FUNCtion: ALTDEF

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

Alternatively, it is usually more convenient to specify a name for the FILLST, and this is then used to set the FSTYLE attribute (although it is the FSTNO value that will be assigned to the FSTYLE attribute). Having created a Fillstyle it must be defined within the graphics system by an 'UPDATE PENSTYLES' command if it is to be used during that session of DRAFT. In subsequent sessions it will be automatically defined during module entry.

8.4.3

Using Fillstyles
The only attribute within the DRAFT database that uses Fillstyles is FSTYLE. This occurs at: Annotation elements: Style elements: High-level elements: where the hatching of an area is feasible, (thus CIRCles, OUTLines, etc). used during the Update Design process, (thus HSTYL, ACSTYL, and DCSTYL) to allow the FSTYLE value to be cascaded down the database hierarchy as it is created.

The FSTYLE attribute can be set to: a System Fillstyle, thus: FSTYLE SYS/temstyle 10 FSTYLE SOL/idfilled a User-defined Fillstyle, thus: FSTYLE 3 (the FSTYNO value of the required FILLST) (in the range 1-18)

FSTYLE /My-FillStyle Various special values: OFF, DEF/ault, UNC/hanged. These are not all valid in all circumstances.

8.5

Marker Styles
A system-defined marker style is specified by combining one of five basic marker types with a scale factor of 1 to 8. The five marker types are:

. X + * O

(STOP) (CROSS) (PLUS) (STAR) (RING)

To set the marker style attribute (MSTYLE), use the command: MSTYLE marker-type SCAle integer

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Colours and Styles

For example, to mark the centre of a circle, the following command could be used:

MSTYLE PLUS SCA 6

8.6

Graphical Feedback Style and Colour

The cursor size/resize commands (e.g. VREGION, DEFINE, DIAMETER etc) incorporate a rubber banding feature - keeping the left-hand mouse button held down enables an appropriate shape to be dragged out to the required extent. The colour of this graphical feedback feature is magenta by default, but can be changed by the SETFEEDBACK command. Example:

SETFEED COL 15
Set rubber banding colour to colour 15

SETFEED COL BRIGHTORANGE SETFEED COL DEF

Set rubber banding colour to magenta The SETFEEDBACK command also controls the appearance of displayed p-points. By default, when p-points are displayed (see Picking P-points and Nodes) they appear as star markers, scale 2, in the current feedback colour. The marker type and scale can be changed by: SETFEEDBACK PPOINTS marker_type SCALE int

Example:

SETFEED PPO PLUS SCA 2

Set p-point symbol to +, scale 2

SETFEED PPO RING SCALE 3

Set p-point symbol to o, scale 3

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

8:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions

This Section describes how to create the drawing office administrative elements of reports and circulation lists, and how DRAFT handles revision numbers.

9.1

Report
The Report (REPO) element may be used to contain brief textual information relating to a full report (which would exist outside Plant/Marine) on the owning drawing registry. The relevant part of the DRAFT database is shown in Figure 9:1.: Report Database Hierarchy.

REGI

REPO

TEXT
Figure 9:1. Report Database Hierarchy

A Report has the attributes: Circulation List Reference (CLRF). A reference to a circulation list element. See Circulation List. Date. The report creation date Source. The name of the macro which generated the report Originator (ORNA. Text to describe the originator of the report Filename (FLEN). The name of the file containing the report, as a text string Title (TITL). A description of the report Revision (RVSN). The revision number of the report

A typical creation sequence for a REPO might be:

NEW REPO TITL REPORT ON VALVES IN ZONE 2 FLEN /REP-A-V CLRF /PURCHASING

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

9:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions

9.2

Circulation List
DRAFT gives you the ability to store Drawing Circulation Lists. The relevant part of the DRAFT database is shown in Figure 9:2.: Circulation List Database Hierarchy.

Library

DRWG CLRF

REPO CLRF

CLLB

CIRL

CIRL

RECI

RECI

Figure 9:2.

Circulation List Database Hierarchy

The Circulation List Library (CLLB) is an administrative element used to group together Circulation Lists (CIRL), each of which is referred to from the CLRF (Circulation List Reference) attribute of a Drawing (or Report) element. Each CIRL may contain other CIRL elements and/or Recipient (RECI) elements. A RECI has the attributes: Recipient Name (RNAM) Location (LOCA) Number of Copies (COPI)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

9:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions

An example of setting up a Circulation List hierarchy might be: Example:

NEW CLLB
Create Circulation List Library (at Library level)

NEW CIRL /CL1

Create Circulation List

NEW RECI /RC1

Create Recipients

RNAM Tom LOCA Room F21 NEW RECI /RC2 RNAM Dick LOCA Room G24 COPI 2 /DRWG DR1
Set Circulation List Reference

CLRF /CL1

9.3

Drawing Revisions
The Revision (REVI) element enables you to store drawing revision data. A REVI may be a member of a Drawing element or of a Sheet element, see Figure 9:3.: Revision Element.

DRWG

SHEE

REVI

CIRL

REVI CLRF

Figure 9:3.

Revision Element

A REVI has the attributes: Approver (APPR) Date of Approval (APDT) Revision (RVSN) Revision text (STEXT) Date of Revision (RVDT) Revision Author (RVAU)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

9:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Reports, Circulation Lists and Revisions

Circulation List Reference (CLRF)

RVSN, RVDT and RVAU are all automatically set on REVI creation, but they can then be edited. The format of the date assigned to RVDT is controlled by the value of the DATEFOrmat attribute of the relevant DEPT. Pseudo reference array attributes SREVAY and DREVAY are available to return a list of the reference of all the REVI elements owned by a Sheet or Drawing. The maximum array size is 50. The attributes are valid at any element of or below a Sheet or Drawing respectively. They have been created primarily for use with hash codewords to generate revision data on drawings, see Accessing Data from the DRAFT Database, Part 2, Drawing Annotation.

9.4
9.4.1

Summary of Commands
At Circulation List . . .

RNAM text LOCA text COPI integer

- set name of recipient - set location of recipient - set number of copies

9.4.2

At Revision . . .

APPR text APDT text RVSN [text] RVAU [text] CLRF name

- set name of approver - set approval date - revision letter. Automatically set, but may be overridden - revision author. Automatically set, but may be overridden - set Circulation List (CIRL) reference

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

9:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

10
10.1

Change Highlighting
Introduction
Change Rules control how Design and Annotation elements that have been changed are drawn on a DRAFT View and are similar to Representation Rules. Each Change Rule can be specific to a given type or types of element, or named elements. Change Rules refer to Change Styles, either Design Change Styles or Annotation Change Styles, depending on whether the changed element is a Design element or an Annotation element. The attributes of the Change Styles define the way in which changed elements will be drawn. Generally this will be by altering the drawing styles and colours used. Pieces of text may also have their font changed, be underlined, or be enclosed within a specified style of parentheses. For more information about styles and colours see Colours and Styles. For information about Representation Rules see Graphical Representation. In order to determine whether Design and Annotation elements have changed, it is necessary to compare the relevant databases at two points in time. One of these two points is always the current time. The other point used is a Comparison Date. The concept of Comparison Dates is discussed in Comparison Date. Design Change Rules (DCRULE) and Annotation Change Rules (ACRULE) are stored in Change Rulesets (CRST), which in turn are owned by Representation Libraries (RPLB). RPLBs are also used to store Design Change Styles (DCSTYL) and Annotation Change Styles (ACSTYL). The reference from a DCRULE to a DCSTYL is made by its DCSTYF attribute, and the reference from an ACRULE to an ACSTYL is made by its ACSTYF attribute. When a VIEW references a CRST, the reference is made by its CRSF attribute.

RPLB

RPLB

VIEW

crsf

CRST

DCSTYL

ACSTYL

dcstyf
ACRULE DCRULE

acstyf
Figure 10:1. Change Rules Database Hierarchy

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

The hierarchy of database elements for Change Highlighting is similar to that for Representation and Auto-hatching and allows company or project standards to be imposed. However, unlike Representation and Hatching Rules, Change Rules cannot be owned directly by a VIEW and there are therefore no local change rules. Once the Rulesets and Styles have been set up, it is just a matter of setting the VIEW attribute CRSF to point to the Ruleset that you wish to use, defining a Comparison Date, and issuing an UPDATE command with the SHOW CHAnges option (see UPDATE Command, SHOW CHANGES Option and Error Messages).

10.2

Design Change Styles

The Design Change Style (DCSTYL) defines the appearance of changed design elements specified by a DCRULE that references it. Each DCSTYL defines eight styles/colours that will be used to draw changed design elements. These are equivalent to the six styles/ colours of a Representation Style plus the two styles/colours (Outline and Fill) of a Hatching Style. All eight styles/colours may be set to specific values. Alternatively, a style can be set to OFF or UNCHANGED, and a colour may be set to UNCHANGED. If set to UNCHANGED, the relevant Representation or Hatching style/colour will be used. If any of the Representation or Hatching styles are set to OFF they will not be overridden by the Design Change Style style/colour. The DCSTYL attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Frontface Style/Colour Backface Style/Colour Obscured Line Style/Colour Centreline Style/Colour P-line Style/Colour Member Line Style/Colour Outline Style/Colour Fill Style/Colour FFSTYLE/FFCOLOUR BFSTYLE/BFCOLOUR OBSTYLE/OBCOLOUR CLSTYLE/CLCOLOUR PLNSTYLE/PLNCOLOUR MLNSTYLE/MLNCOLOUR OLSTYLE/OLCOLOUR FSTYLE/FCOLOUR SOLIDTHICK/8 DOTTEDTHICK/8 LDASHTHICK/8 CHAINEDTHICK/8 DASHEDTHICK/8 CHAINEDTHICK/8 SOLIDTHICK/8 SYSTEMPATTERN1/8

Note that DCSTYLs are not exact equivalents of Representation Styles, they do not have Tubing Flag (TUBEF), Drawing Level (DLEV), etc. attributes. The values of these attributes are determined from the relevant Representation Styles. The DCSTYL only defines which, if any, of the standard style/colour values should be overridden in order that changed Design elements are marked. Design elements that have no DCSTYL assigned to them will not have any changes that are made to them marked. Within a VIEW, it is therefore possible to mark changes made to pipework, for example, but ignore changes made to steelwork.

10.3

Annotation Change Styles

An Annotation Change Style (ACSTYL) defines the appearance of changed annotation elements (Label, Dimension or 2D Primitives) specified by an ACRULE that references it. Each ACSTYL defines three styles/colours, a font, and two other attributes that will be used

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

to draw changed annotation elements. The three styles/colours are used for drawing text, linear graphics and hatched areas of annotations. All three styles/colours may be set to specific values or to UNCHANGED. The font attribute may be set to a standard font number or to UNCHANGED. If any of these four attributes are set to UNCHANGED, the relevant Label/Dimension/2D Primitives attribute will be used. The two other attributes define whether changed text is to be underlined or enclosed in brackets. The ACSTYL attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Text Colour Note Line Style/Colour Fill Style/Colour Font Number Brackets Underline TXCOLOUR NLSTYLE/NLCOLOUR FSTYLE/FCOLOUR FONT BRACKE UNDERL 8 SOLID/8 SYSTEMPATTERN1/8 UNCHANGED NONE OFF

Alternative values for BRACKE are: ROUnd, CURly, SQUare, ANGle.

10.4

Change Rules
The Change Ruleset (CRST) owns both Design Change Rules (DCRULEs) and Annotation Change Rules (ACRULEs). Design Change Rules reference Design Change Styles and Annotation Change Rules reference Annotation Change Styles.

10.4.1

Design Change Rules

Design Change Rules use Selection Criteria to define the changed design elements to which the rule is to apply, in a similar manner to Representation and Hatching Rules. The manner in which each changed design element is marked is defined by the referenced Design Change Style. It is therefore possible to mark different types of elements in different ways, or not at all. The DCRULE attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Design Change Style Reference Selection Criterion DCSTYF CRIT unset unset

For more information on using Selection Criteria refer to DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 1 General Commands. For changes to be highlighted properly the Selection Criterion should use one of the functions that make use of the current Comparison Date. These are; CREATED and MODIFIED. For example:

CRIT ALL BRAN MEM WITH (MODIFIED (GEOM)) CRIT ALL SCTN WITH (MODIFIED (LENGTH)) CRIT ALL EQUI WITH (CREATED ()) CRIT ALL WITH (CREATED ())

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

For more information on the CREATED() and MODIFIED() functions and their use in AVEVA Plant/Marine expressions refer to DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 1 General Commands. Note that a third function associated with the Comparison Date, DELETED(), is not relevant here, deleted design elements will not be shown on DRAFT drawings and hence cannot be highlighted.

10.4.2

Annotation Change Rules

Changes to annotation graphics are treated in a simpler manner than changes to design graphics. Annotation Change Rules have an attribute to determine whether they should be applied to Changed Annotations, Added Annotations, or both. For Changed Annotations, only changes in expanded text strings will be marked. For example, a repositioned GLAB with BTEX '#NAME' that has moved because its referenced design element has moved will not be marked as changed. However, if its BTEX was '#NAME at #POS' then the text string would be marked as changed. The whole expanded text string would be drawn in accordance with the referenced ACSTYL. Associated leader lines, dimension lines, projection lines, or any other graphic elements, would not be marked as changed. For Added Annotations, all elements associated with the annotation will be marked, that is, the expanded text string and all graphic elements. The ACRULE attributes, with their defaults, are as follows: Annotation Change Style Reference Annotation Code ACSTYF ASCODE unset Changed

Each CRST therefore only needs to reference one or two ACRULES, one applicable to Changed Annotations, one applicable to Added Annotations. If more than one ACRULE is referenced for a type of changed annotation, only the first, in database order, will be applied. The syntax for the Annotation Change Rule Application attribute is: ASCODE ADDedanno, CHANgedanno, ADDed AND CHANged

10.5

Attribute Setting
The following attributes: FFSTYLE/FFCOLOUR BFSTYLE/BFCOLOUR CLSTYLE/CLCOLOUR OBSTYLE/OBCOLOUR PLNSTYLE/PLNCOLOUR MLNSTYLE/MLNCOLOUR OLSTYLE/OLCOLOUR NLSTYLE/NLCOLOUR FSTYLE/FCOLOUR TXCOLOUR FONT

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

all have the option of UNChanged. This is valid at DCSTYL and ACSTYL elements only. Assigning UNChanged to these attributes at any other element will generate the following error message:

64,275: UNCHANGED is not valid at <type> elements

The syntax for the Change Highlighting Referencing attributes is: DCSTYF ACSTYF CRSF UNSET or any DCSTYL UNSET or any ACSTYL UNSET or any CRST

Change Rules can also be defined with the USE command. Example:

USE /anno-change-style-01 FOR CHANGEDANNO USE /anno-change-style-04 FOR ADDEDANNO USE /des-change-style-A FOR ALL EQUI WITH MODIFIED (GEOM HIER) USE /des-change-style-B FOR ALL WITH MODIFIED()
For full details of using expressions refer to DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 1 General Commands.

10.6

Comparison Date
It is only by comparing a drawing at two states or sessions that it is possible to determine what has changed. Using the current state of the drawing as one state we must then reference an earlier state in order to make the comparison. We do this by specifying a Comparison Date (COMPDATE), that is, the drawing state at a time that we wish to use as a baseline or datum. The Comparison Date can be set in one of two ways: By specifying an actual time and date. By referencing a Stamp.For example:

Example:

SETCOMPDATE 31 March 2002 SETCOMPDATE STAMP /Prelim-Milestone

The current Comparison Date can be queried by:

Q COMPDATE DATE Q COMPDATE STAMP

A Stamp is a way of referencing combinations of databases and sessions at specified instances. Stamps are created by the PDMS Administrator. For more information on Stamps and how they are created and used refer to the ADMIN Command Reference Manual and the ADMIN User Guide.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

The Comparison Date can be used in queries on any attributes, using the syntax OLD. For example:

Q OLD XLEN
will output the value of attribute XLEN of the current element at the Comparison Date.

Q OLD REF OF /OLDPIPE

will output the reference of deleted element /OLDPIPE at the Comparison Date. For more information on the Comparison Date functionality refer to the ADMIN User Guide.

10.7

UPDATE Command, SHOW CHANGES Option and Error Messages

The commands UPDATE DESIgn, UPDATE ANNOtation and UPDATE ALL have the option SHOW CHAnges. In each case this option will update the picture to the latest relevant data and VIEW attributes, including changes. This option is only valid at View elements or above. If no changes are found on the View, a message will be output to reassure the user that the SHOW CHAnges option has been properly evaluated. The following error conditions may be encountered when using the SHOW CHAnges option: If the SHOW CHAnges option is given below View level, updating will proceed and the following error message will be displayed:

64,444: The SHOW CHANGES option will be ignored when issu ed below a View
If no Comparison Date or Stamp is specified, updating will be abandoned and the following error message will be displayed:

64,446: No current Comparison Date or Stamp defined. UPDA TE SHOW CHANGES abandoned.
If the View's CRSF attribute is unset, it is assumed that default Design and Annotation Change Rules are to be applied. These are equivalent to the following:

USE /default-design-change-style FOR ALL WITH MODIFIED()) USE /default-anno-change-style FOR ADDED AND CHANGED ANNO
where the defaults are listed in Design Change Styles and Annotation Change Styles. If the View's CRSF attribute is invalid, updating will be abandoned and the following error message will be displayed:

64,64: <view-name>:CRSF attribute value is invalid

followed by the error message:

64,153: <view-name>:Generation of Design (or Annotation or All) graphics abandoned

If the CRSF references a CRST that contains no rules, updating will be abandoned and the following error message will be displayed:

64,445: <CRST-name>: No DCRULEs (or ACRULEs or Change Rules) defined

followed by the error message:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

64,153: <view-name>:Generation of Design (or Annotation or All) graphics abandoned

If the CRSF references a CRST that contains no DCRULEs (with reference to an UPDATE DESI command), or no ACRULEs (with reference to an UPDATE ANNO command), updating will be abandoned and the following error message will be displayed:

64,445: <CRST-name>: No DCRULEs (or ACRULEs) defined

followed by the error message:

64,153: <view-name>:Generation of Design (or Annotation or All) graphics abandoned

In this case if the command was UPDATE ALL and the CRST contains ACRULES but no DCRULEs (for example), then it is assumed that the user wants to produce a drawing on which only annotation changes are marked. If the DCSTYF or ACSTYF attribute of a Change Rule is unset or invalid, updating will be abandoned and one of the following error messages will be displayed:

64,64: <rule-name>:DCSTYF (or ACSTYF) attribute value is invalid 64,65: <rule-name>:DCSTYF (or ACSTYF) attribute value unset
followed by the error message:

64,153: <view-name>:Generation of Design (or Annotation or All) graphics abandoned

If the CRIT attribute of a DCRULE is unset (with reference to an UPDATE DESI and an UPDATE ALL command), the following error message will be displayed:

64,296: Warning: <rule-name>: is invalid and will be ignored

10.8
10.8.1

Querying Commands
Querying Change Rulesets and Design or Annotation Styles
The querying facilities are similar to those provided for RRULs. Thus, at a DCRULE or an ACRULE: Q DESCription will output a description for that rule with the format: USE desi-change-style FOR criteria USE anno-change-style FOR ascode-value At a CRST: Q DESCription will output an ordered list of descriptions - one for each of its DCRULEs and ACRULEs.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

At a VIEW: Q CRSF DESCription will output an ordered list of rule descriptions, one for each owned by its referenced CRST. At a VIEW or CRST: Q DCSTYF FOR design-id will return the DCRULE that is relevant for the specified design item.

10.9
10.9.1

Summary of Commands
At Design Change Rule . . .

USE stylename FOR crit CRITeria crit

- Set drawing style for Design generic types. - Set the CRIT attribute for the current rule.

10.9.2

At Design Change Style . . .

FFSTYLE integer/line_pattern, FFCOLOUR integer/colour_name FFSTYLE OFF FFSTYLE UNCHANGED FFCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing front face edges.

BFSTYLE integer/line_pattern, BFCOLOUR integer/colour_name BFSTYLE OFF BFSTYLE UNCHANGED BFCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing rear face edges.

OBSTYLE integer/line_pattern, OBCOLOUR integer/colour_name OBSTYLE OFF OBSTYLE UNCHANGED OBCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour or drawing front-facing edges of Items that would otherwise be obscured by other objects

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

CLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, CLCOLOUR integer/colour_name CLSTYLE OFF CLSTYLE UNCHANGED CLCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing centrelines.

PLNSTYLE integer/line_pattern, PLNCOLOUR integer/colour_name PLNSTYLE OFF PLNSTYLE UNCHANGED PLNCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing p-lines.

MLNSTYLE integer/line_pattern, MLNCOLOUR integer/colour_name MLNSTYLE OFF MLNSTYLE UNCHANGED MLNCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing member lines.

FSTYLE integer/line_pattern, FCOLOUR integer/colour_name FSTYLE OFF FSTYLE UNCHANGED FCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for hatching selected faces.

OLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, OLCOLOUR integer/colour_name OLSTYLE OFF OLSTYLE UNCHANGED OLCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing outline of selected faces.

10.9.3

At Annotation Change Rule . . .

USE stylename FOR ADDED

- Set drawing style for changed Annotations.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Change Highlighting

10.9.4

At Annotation Change Style . . .

TXCOLOUR integer/colour_name TXCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls colour for annotation text.

NLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, NLCOLOUR integer/colour_name NLSTYLE UNCHANGED NLCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing annotation linear graphics.

FSTYLE integer/hatch_pattern, FCOLOUR integer/colour_name FSTYLE UNCHANGED FCOLOUR UNCHANGED - Controls style and colour for drawing annotation hatched areas.

FONT integer FONT UNCHANGED - Set annotation font.

BRACKE SQUARE BRACKE NONE - Set bracket style for enclosing text.

UNDERL ON

- Set Underline ON for annotation text.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

10:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introduction to Annotation

11

Introduction to Annotation
This Chapter describes the part of the DRAFT database used to store annotation elements, that is dimensioning elements, labelling elements, and 2D drafting elements (i.e. geometric primitives, symbols, and text). This part of the DRAFT database hierarchy (see DRAFT Database Hierarchy) is shown below:

Figure 11:1.

Annotation Elements

Dimensioning and Labelling elements are owned by Layers. Other text, symbols and graphics are owned by Notes. There are two types of Note: Sheet Notes (NOTEs) owned by Sheets View Notes (VNOTs) owned by Views.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

11:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introduction to Annotation

11.1

Layers
Layers (LAYE) are owned by VIEWs and are administrative elements used to group together annotation elements. Layers may own Dimension elements, Label elements and View Note elements. Usually, different Layers are used for different functions, and the function of a Layer is defined by its PURPose attribute. The PURP attribute is used to control the types of element that the Layer can own. The PURP (Purpose) attribute of a Layer is set to a (four character) word, for example:

PURP DIMS
The PURP attribute may also be used to identify the Layer in other commands. Example:

UPDATE LAYE DIMS HIGhlight PURPose DIMS

highlight the Layer in the current view with its PURP attribute set to DIMS For more information on the HIGHLIGHT command, see Highlighting Displayed Elements. The LVIS attribute controls the visibility of a Layer. It can be set to TRUE or FALSE. This enables different types of annotation to be switched on and off. Note: Where Layers and Layer members have common attributes, the values of those attributes are cascaded down from the Layer.

11.1.1

Dimension and Label Attributes

The UCOD (Units Code) Layer attribute controls the display of units used for dimensions and labels. Example:

UCOD FINCH DIST

set distance units to feet and inches, e.g. 55.13/16 The default is mm for distances and bores. See Distance, Position and Bore Data Output for full details of UCOD. The PCOD (Precision Code) attribute controls the precision of output used with Dimensions and Labels. See Controlling the Precision of the Generated Output.

11.1.2

Intelligent Text Attributes

In the Intelligent Text System there are code words that are used to request the position of certain elements (e.g. #POS, #P2POS, #PKNA^POSS). They expand to a string providing the location expressed in either the ENU (East North Up) coordinate system, as an absolute position (XYZ), in the Ship Reference System or as a purely numerical output. To accomplish this two attributes, POSFOR and GRSYS are provided for a number of elements in the PADD database. The setting of these attributes determine the output format used by the positional code words. These attributes are described in more detail in Position Output Formats. The same output format is used throughout a given layer.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

11:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introduction to Annotation

11.1.3

Design Symbol Layers

The Design Symbol Layer (DSLAYE) is a particular type of LAYE element that is used to contain Design Symbol (DESSYM) database elements. The DESSYM elements enable design elements to be represented symbolically on a 2D View. There can be only one occurrence of a DSLAYE per View. For more information on 2D Symbology, refer to 2D Symbolic Representation and Representation Rules.

11.2

Autoblanking
You can use autoblanking to remove an area of graphics from a drawing and leave a clear area. Generally, graphics added later will be drawn in this clear area. The main purpose is to allow annotation to be shown clearly in crowded parts of a drawing. The geometry of the blanked areas is defined by the geometry of the annotation element; for example, a circular annotation element can define a circular blanked area where no 3D design graphics will appear. Overlapping 2D, text and other annotation graphics will not be hidden by blanking. When autoblanking is switched on, the geometry will be hidden in the blanked areas immediately the annotation that defines them is drawn or modified. When autoblanking is switched off, the blanks will not be generated on the screen, but switching autoblanking on will generate all blanks immediately. Blanks will always be generated in plot files generated from DRAFT, even when Autoblanking is off. The advantage of working with Autoblanking switched off is that view control operations such as zooming and panning will be slightly faster. The command to switch autoblanking ON or OFF for a DRAFT session is: AUTOBLANKING ON/OFF Autoblanking can be used for the following annotation elements: LDIM, ADIM, RDIM, PDIM, GLAB, SLAB, VNOT, and NOTE. The attribute BLNK specifies whether autoblanking is required, and attribute BMAR specifies the blanking margin to be applied. BLNK TRUE/FALSE BMAR value where value is a real value that is greater than or equal to 0.0. If BMAR is set to 0.0 then a blanked region will be drawn with no blanking margin.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

11:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Introduction to Annotation

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

11:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12
12.1

Dimensioning
Introduction
DRAFT dimensions are a form of drawing annotation consisting of both text and geometric elements; they may be linear, radial (two types) or angular. Linear and radial dimensions show the distances between particular points in the design model whilst angular dimensions show the angles between directions. A simplified view of that part of the DRAFT Database hierarchy (see DRAFT Database Hierarchy) that relates to dimensioning is shown below.

VIEW

LAYE

LDIM

RDIM

PDIM

ADIM

(Dim en sion Dir ect ion s) (Dim en sion P oin t s) (Dim en sion P oin t s)

Figure 12:1. Hierarchy of Dimension and Related Elements

DRAFT allows dimensions to be created quickly and easily (using the cursor), with many attributes of the dimension elements being set automatically by cascading values from the owning LAYE element.

12.2

Dimension Element Types

Linear Dimension (LDIM) elements (see Linear Dimensions) exist for each linear dimension that appears on a drawing. LDIM elements own Dimension Point elements, which specify the points between which dimensions are drawn. Two other types of linear dimension are:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Radial Dimension (RDIM) elements (see Radial Dimensions) exist for each radial dimension that appears on a drawing, being defined by a database element and an attribute (e.g. DIAM of a CYLI). Pitch Circle Dimension (PDIM) elements (see Pitch Circle Dimensions) exist for each pitch circle dimension that appears on a drawing. PDIM elements own Dimension Point elements, which specify the points between which dimensions are drawn. The graphics for a PDIM are similar to those for an RDIM. Angular Dimension (ADIM) elements (see Angular Dimensions) exist for each angular dimension that appears on a drawing. ADIM elements own Dimension Direction elements, which specify the end points of the dimension arc and its origin. Note: When a Pipe element is dimensioned directly, the Pipe origin is assumed to be the position of the HEAD of the first Branch visible in the VIEW region, if any. If no Branch HEADs are visible in the VIEW region, then the position of the HEAD of the first Branch is used.

12.3
12.3.1

Linear Dimensions
Linear Dimensions and How to Create Them
The simplest kind of Linear Dimension consists of a pair of points on a drawing, each of which relates to a point in the Design model. From each of these Dimension Points on the drawing, a projection line is drawn in a user-definable direction; between these parallel projection lines, dimension lines are drawn. Each dimension and projection line may have text associated with it. An illustration of a simple linear dimension between two Equipments is shown in Figure 12:2.: Single Value Linear Dimension.

Figure 12:2. Single Value Linear Dimension

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Such a dimension could be produced by typing the following commands, starting at Layer level:

NEW LDIM FROM ID @ TO ID @ TO ID @

- Create new linear dimension element

- Use cursor to nominate (three) items to dimension from/to

The Dimension will appear on the display. If only two elements are hit a pair of Dimension Point elements will have been automatically created, with the last point becoming the current element. In the above example the Dimension Points will be DPPT elements - the Dimension Point is defined by a p-point of the Design element, in this case the origin. Any p-point can be nominated as a dimension point by replacing the FROM ID @ syntax above by FROM IDP @/TO IDP @. The Dimension may also be defined explicitly: Example:

FROM /1501A TO /1501B

The other two types of Dimension Point that may be owned by an LDIM element are: DPOI- allows you to dimension to/from any given 3D positions DPBA- allows you to dimension to/from before or after a Design element (in the Dimension direction).

DPOI elements would be created by a sequence such as:

NEW LDIM FR POS @ TO POS @

DPBA elements would be created by a sequence such as:

NEW LDIM FR BEFORE ID @ TO AFTER ID @

The effect of such a command will depend upon the dimension direction - see Principal Attributes of Angular Dimensions. Figure 12:3.: Single Value Before/After Linear Dimensions shows an example of such a linear dimension, produced by the same command but with different dimension directions. Constructed points (see Point and Line Construction) may also be used to create Dimension Points. Note: In cases where the dimension value is less than 0.01 mm, the display of all dimension point graphics (see Figure 12:2.: Single Value Linear Dimension) will be suppressed. When dimensioning BEFORE or AFTER elements such as EQUI, STRU or SUBS, DRAFT will ignore those primitives with OBST (obstruction level) set to 0 or 1. When dimensioning BEFORE or AFTER a primitive, its OBST value will be ignored.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:3. Single Value Before/After Linear Dimensions

Figure 12:4.: Before/After Linear Dimensions on a Single Element shows examples of using before/after linear Dimensions with a single element. (See Principal Attributes of Linear Dimensions for details of DOFF and OSHT.) Note: Under some circumstances the length of the projection line for a DPBA may be unsatisfactory. In this case changing the value of the NPPT attribute (which supplies a reference p-point) will correct the situation.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:4. Before/After Linear Dimensions on a Single Element

Note: Use of Radial Dimensions would provide a simpler method of drawing the two dimensions shown on the right-hand side of Figure 12:4.: Before/After Linear Dimensions on a Single Element - see Radial Dimensions. Note: Any combination of the above three Dimension-creating commands is permissible. Example:

FROM ID @ TO BEFORE ID @ FROM POS @ TO ID @ FR AFT ID @ TO POS @

Each FROM command sets the Dimension Points DDNM (Design Data Name) attribute to the Name of the Design element. The DDNM attribute may be reset immediately to define a new Dimension Point. If the DDNM is set to refer to an element, which is not in the Id List referenced from the current VIEW, the Dimension will still be drawn. The command:

CHECK REFS WARN

will cause a warning to be output in this situation, and the command

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

CHECK REFS FULL

will result in such Dimensions not being drawn. The default reference-checking mode (i.e. no checking) is given by

CHECK REFS OFF

Reference checking is also available for Labels - see Labelling. It is possible to draw a Dimension that contains Dimension Points that are incompletely defined (for example, a DPPT with an unset/illegal DDNM). The Dimension is now treated as only containing the significant Dimension Points for both drawing the Dimension and for commands which rely on the drawn dimension (such as PLCL @ (see Figure 12:9.: Key Attributes of a Linear Dimension) and DTOF @ (see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions).

12.3.2

Multi-valued Dimensions
The preceding examples have dealt with single-valued dimensions; where more than two Dimension Points are involved, the Dimension is said to be multi-valued. Two classes of multi-valued Dimensions exist, namely chained and parallel. An example of a chained Dimension is shown in Figure 12:5.: Chained Linear Dimension.

Figure 12:5. Chained Linear Dimension

Such a dimension (which is still represented by a single LDIM element) is created by repeating the TO part of the FROM . . . TO command line, moving the cursor crosshairs to each Dimension Point in turn. The example shown in Figure 12:4.: Before/After Linear Dimensions on a Single Element would have been created by a command sequence such as:

NEW LDIM FR ID @ TO ID @ TO ID @
An additional link can be inserted in or added to a chained Dimension (or a single-valued Dimension can be converted to a chained Dimension) through use of the INSERT command. This is done simply by typing:

INSERT ID @
and using the cursor to nominate the link element. P-points, p-lines, dimension points or 3D points may also be used as links using:

INSE INSE INSE INSE

IDP @ IDPL @ IDPD @ or POS @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

A Dimension Point may be constructed using DRAFTs point construction facilities (see Point and Line Construction). For example:

INSE POS OF @ INSE POS OF ENDP OF @

Other constructions such as INTERSECTION and MIDPOINT can be used. The facility (which is only valid in a plan or elevation View) enables Dimension Points to be positioned on any line of the Design graphics. The constructed Dimension Point will have a 3D position (i.e. it is a DPOI) but will not be associated with the identified Design element. The effect of the INSERT command is to create a new Dimension Point of the appropriate type at the correct position in the owning LDIMs member list. INSERT can be used at Dimension Point or LDIM level. Figure 12:6.: Use of the INSERT Command illustrates the use of the INSERT command.

Figure 12:6. Use of the INSERT Command

Dimensions will be drawn in the same order as the LDIMs member list order. If the elements get out of the correct order then the display of the Dimension will become confused. This situation can be corrected by the SORT DIMENSIONPOINTS command (minimum abbreviation SORT DIM), which can be used at Dimension or Dimension Point level. The effect of the command is shown in Figure 12:7.: Use of the SORT DIM Command.

Figure 12:7. Use of the SORT DIM Command

An example of a parallel Dimension is shown in Figure 12:8.: Parallel (or Tail) Linear Dimension.

Figure 12:8. Parallel (or Tail) Linear Dimension

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

A parallel Dimension can be produced simply by setting the LCHA attribute of an LDIM as appropriate:

LCHA PARA LCHA CHA

- parallel dimension - chained dimension

12.3.3

Principal Attributes of Linear Dimensions

Those attributes of a linear Dimension that most affect its general appearance are shown in Figure 12:9.: Key Attributes of a Linear Dimension. (Default values are shown in brackets.)

Figure 12:9. Key Attributes of a Linear Dimension

Note that OSHT, PLCL and DOFF are given initial default values at Layer level when the Layer is created. These values are cascaded down to Dimension level when those elements are created subsequently. Following this initial setting, an attribute set to default at Dimension Point level will take its value from the same attribute of its owning Dimension element (if appropriate). The Projection Line Clearance (PLCL) is the distance between the dimension point and the projection line at the dimension point end. Negative clearances may be specified. Examples of setting this attribute are:

PLCL 5 PLCL @ PLCL DEF

- set PLCL to 5mm - set using cursor - (at Dimension Point level): set to owning Dimension PLCL value

PLCL may be set at Dimension or Dimension Point level. PLCL set at Dimension level (which becomes the default PLCL) will apply to all subsequently created Dimension Points. PLCL set at Dimension Point level can only be reset from the same Dimension Point, not from Dimension level. When setting PLCL with the cursor, the resulting (paper) coordinate that does not lie in the same axis direction as the projection line is ignored. These comments also apply to the OSHT attribute (see below).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The Projection Line Overshoot (OSHT) is the distance by which the projection line overshoots the end of the dimension line. Negative overshoots may not be specified. Examples of setting this attribute are:

OSHT 5 OSHT @ OSHT @ OSHT TOP /CIRCLE1 OSHT DEF

- set OSHT to 5mm - set using cursor - set using cursor - OSHT defined by a constructed point see Point and Line Construction. - at Dimension Point level): set to owning Dimension OSHT value

(See PLCL description for further comments relating to OSHT.) The other three attributes shown on Figure 12:9.: Key Attributes of a Linear Dimension are: Dimension Line Offset (DOFF) Projection Line Direction (PLDI) Dimension Line Direction (DIR) - the distance by which the dimension line is offset (in the projection line direction) from the 2D position of the first dimension point. - the angle between the projection line and the dimension line. - the direction of the dimension line (an explicit compass direction, p-point or p-line direction). Default East.

An important feature of the above attributes is that they can be set at Dimension Point level, removing the need to move back up the hierarchy having just created a new LDIM. DOFF has a related attribute DPOS - the dimension line position. DPOS is a fixed 2D paper coordinate through which the dimension line will pass. If a dimensioned element is moved, then if DOFF is used the whole Dimension will also move; if DPOS is used then the dimension line will still pass through the same point (but the projection lines will be adjusted to suit). DOFF and DPOS both control the position of the dimension line and so are mutually exclusive - setting one will unset the other. Examples of the relevant commands are:

DOFF 20 DPOS @ DIM ABSOLUTE DIM OFFS

- set DOFF to 20mm - set DPOS using cursor - convert DOFF to DPOS - convert DPOS to DOFF

When setting DPOS, the resulting (paper) coordinate that does not lie in the same axis direction as the required offset is ignored.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The projection line direction is set by commands such as:

PLDI 75 PLDI N10W PLDI @ PLDI @

- set PLDI to 75 degrees - set PLDI to explicit compass direction - set PLDI with cursor - set PLDI to nominated p-point direction

Note: Projection line direction is treated as 90 degrees when it is nearly but not quite 90 degrees. This avoids an unexpected flip in the projection line text orientation. The dimension direction can be set explicitly by a command such as:

DIR E10N
Another method is to set the true length attribute (TLIN) using the command:

DIR TRUE
This will set the dimension direction as being that from the first to the second dimension point (TLIN is set to TRUE and DIR is unset). See Figure 12:10.: Definition of True Length and Figure 12:11.: Effect of True Length Attribute Settings.

P2

DOWN

P2

P1

P1

(i)

(ii)

DIR TRUE gives distance as in (i) not as in (ii)

Figure 12:10. Definition of True Length

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:11. Effect of True Length Attribute Settings

The true length facility can be useful when it is not clear what explicit direction to set in order to achieve the desired result. The bottom left-hand dimension in Figure 12:11.: Effect of True Length Attribute Settings has been created without regard for the Dimension direction, which turns out to be inappropriate. Setting TLIN TRUE produces the desired picture. Points to note about the true length facility are: The true length is 2D, i.e. the length is orthographic, not a slope length - uppings are ignored. True length is meaningless for a Dimension with more than two points, unless the points are in line.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Since a DPBA Dimension Point relies on the existence of a predefined dimension direction, such a point cannot be used as one of the first two points of a true length.

It is possible to set the dimension direction to that of a p-point, using the command: DIR IDP @ (This command will set the DDNM attribute to the name or reference number of the primitive concerned, and the PPDI attribute to the appropriate p-point number; DIR will be unset and TLIN set to FALSE.)

12.3.4

Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions

To save space on the paper, a parallel dimensions may be produced in a truncated form. Figure 12:12.: Truncated Parallel Dimension shows the truncated form of the dimension shown in Figure 12:8.: Parallel (or Tail) Linear Dimension.

Figure 12:12. Truncated Parallel Dimension

The truncation is produced by the TRUNCATE command, which has two forms as shown in the examples below.

TRUNCATE BY 5 TRUN TO 10 TRUN OFF

- truncate affected dimension lines by 5% - truncate dimension lines to 10mm from nearest dimension point - turn off truncation

For non-truncated parallel dimensions, the spacing between each dimension line is given an initial default value calculated to be sufficient to allow room for the dimension value (or a single line of dimension line text). The spacing is controlled by the Dimension Line Separator Attribute (DMSP). Example:

DMSP 30 DMSP @

- set separation to 30mm - set separation with cursor

In a macro, the separation can also be set in terms of Sheet or screen coordinates. Note that the minimum separation is governed by the DMSP attribute - the calculated spacing cannot be less than this minimum. Figure 12:13.: Parallel Dimension Line Spacing shows the effect of varying the spacing.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:13. Parallel Dimension Line Spacing

The initial value of DMSP is cascaded down from LAYE level Dimension line text (DMTX) is set by a command of the form: DMTX text Example:

DMTX ACCESS SPACE

(see Figure 12:14.: Dimension Line Text, left hand)

DMTX ACCESS SPACE #/#DIM (see Figure 12:14.: Dimension Line Text, right hand)

Figure 12:14. Dimension Line Text

#DIM in the example above takes the value of the dimension. #DIM is a simple case of intelligent text - see Intelligent Text. Note that in the case of non-truncated parallel dimensions, the dimension line spacing will automatically be adjusted to accommodate two or more lines of text if these are input. Dimension line text may be set at Dimension Point or Dimension level, although in the latter case the text input will attached to all the dimension lines involved. Associated commands are:

DMTX DEFAULT

- (at Dimension Point level): set dimension text to that of owning Dimension

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Dimension text is automatically centre-justified, but its position relative to the dimension line may be varied by changing the setting of the dimension text offset (DTOF) attribute. For example:

DTOF 0 5

- move dimension text origin 5mm along axis parallel to projection line in text up vector direction (= perpendicular to dimension line in most cases) - move dimension text origin to cursor position - move x coordinate of dimension text origin to cursor position (y coordinate not changed) - change y coordinate of dimension text origin by 5mm (x coordinate not changed)

DTOF @ DTOF N 1 @ DTOF N 2 5

Note also:

DTOF DEF DTOF STAN

- use default Dimension offset value, not Dimension Point value - equivalent to DTOF 0 0, the standard position

- DTOF defined by a constructed point - see Point and DTOF ENDP OF /LINE1 QUAL X500 Y500 Line Construction. The dimension text origin is at the centre of and approximately half a character height below the text. Note that if there is insufficient space between the ends of two projection lines to enable the dimension line text to be fitted in parallel to the dimension line it will be automatically rotated by 90 degrees. Reducing the text character size (see below) may result in their being enough room to display the text parallel to the dimension line. Dimension text angle can be controlled using the DTANGLE attribute. This is available both at dimension and dimension point level. Possible settings are:

DTANGLE STANDARD DTANG HORIZ DTANG VERT DTANG EXTERNAL DTANG PARALLEL PTANG DEFAULT
The STANDARD setting gives dimension line text parallel to the dimension line except when there is insufficient room for it, when it is drawn parallel to the projection-line - i.e. external dimension line text. STANDARD is the default setting for Dimension elements. The text is positioned by default just above the middle of the dimension line except that external text is centred on the centre of the dimension line. If the text is not external, then its position is constrained to lie between the projection lines. The HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL settings cause the dimension line text to be drawn respectively horizontally or vertically in the VIEW. By default the text is centred on middle of the dimension line. The EXTERNAL setting forces the dimension line text to be drawn parallel to the projection line even though there is room for it to be drawn parallel to the dimension line. By default the

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

text is centred on middle of the dimension line. If the text would not be external in the STANDARD case, then its position is constrained to lie between the projection lines. The PARALLEL setting forces the dimension line text to be drawn parallel to the dimension line even though there may be insufficient space for it to fit. By default the text is positioned just above the middle of the dimension line. If the text would not be external in the STANDARD case, then its position is constrained to lie between the projection lines. The DEFAULT setting is only available at Dimension Points. This allows the DTANGLE value to be taken from the Dimension element (LDIM or ADIM). Otherwise the setting at the Dimension Point is used. This is the default setting for Dimension Points.

Figure 12:15. Dimension Line Text Angle

Projection line text (PLTX) is set and manipulated in a similar way. For example, the commands:

PLTX PUMP /1501A PLTX PUMP /1501B

(each at the appropriate dimension point level) could be used to give the text shown in Figure 12:16.: Projection Line Text.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:16. Projection Line Text

Note also:

PLTX STAN PLTX DEF

- no projection line text (the standard option) - use default Dimension setting, not Dimension Point setting

Projection line text axes are oriented relative to the projection line. The orientation is controlled by setting the PTOF attribute. Example:

PTOF -5 -5
See Figure 12:17.: Projection Line Text Offset for an example of changing the projection line text offset.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:17. Projection Line Text Offset

Other options are:

PTOF @ PTOF STAN PTOF DEF PTOF CENTRE OF /CIRCLE1 PTOF N 1 @ PTOF N 2 5

- Set PTOF by cursor - Equivalent to PTOF 0 0, the standard position - Use default Dimension value, not Dimension Point value - PTOF defined by a constructed point. See Miscellaneous Text Facilities. - Move x coordinate of projection line text origin to cursor position (y coordinate not changed) - Change y coordinate of projection line text origin by 5mm (x coordinate not changed)

Projection line text is justified towards the appropriate dimension point by default, but may be justified away from the dimension point or may be centred on the projection line, using the commands:

PJUST AWAY PJUST CENTRE

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:18. Projection Line Text Justification

The initial value of PJUS is cascaded down from LAYE level. Projection text angle can be controlled using the PTANGLE attribute. This is available both at dimension and dimension point level. Possible settings are:

PTANGLE HORIZ PTANG VERT PTANG STAN PTANG DEF

The HORIZONTAL and VERTICAL settings cause the projection line text to be drawn respectively horizontally or vertically in the VIEW. In these cases, the projection line is not extended automatically to underline the text but only overshoots the dimension line by the distance specified by the OSHT attribute. The STANDARD setting gives the projection line text parallel to the projection line. This is the default value for Dimension elements. The DEFAULT setting is only available at Dimension Points. This allows the PTANG setting to be taken from the Dimension element (LDIM or ADIM), otherwise the setting at the Dimension Point is used. This is the default setting for Dimension Points.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:19. Projection Line Text Angle

The standard character height for dimension line and projection line text is 4mm (cascaded from LAYE level), but this may be varied by commands such as:

DTCH 2 PTCH 2

- set dimension line text character height (DTCH) to 2mm - set projection line text character height (PTCH) to 2mm

Initial settings of these attributes are cascaded down from LAYE level. Other text attributes (present at Dimension and Dimension Point level) are: PLSP PFON DFON DT COLOUR PT COLOUR PTLH DTLH - Projection text line-spacing - Projection text Font - Dimension text Font - Dimension line text colour (cascaded down from LAYEs TX COLOUR) - Projection line text colour (cascaded down from LAYEs TX COLOUR) - Projection text letter height (0.8* character height) - Dimension text letter height (0.8* character height)

Initial settings of these attributes are cascaded down from LAYE level. See Miscellaneous Text Facilities for details of letter height and text fonts.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Dimension line and projection line text can be edited through use of the EDTEXT command. In the following examples, the target string is ACCESS DPACE, = ACCESS SPACE mistyped:

EDTEXT DMTX DPACE SPACE - Change dimension line text to ACCESS

SPACE

EDTEXT PLTX DPACE SPACE - Change projection line text to 'ACCESS

SPACE Note: When editing intelligent text the intelligent text code itself must be specified, not the resultant text. See Miscellaneous Text Facilities for full details of the EDTEXT command. Dimension line terminators are arrowheads by default, but may be obliques, dots, or absent altogether - see Figure 12:20.: Dimension Line Terminators.

Figure 12:20. Dimension Line Terminators

The terminators (DTER attribute) are set by the commands:

DTER ARROWS DTER OBLIQUES DTER DOTS DTER OFF

Note: The first terminator of a truncated dimension (see Figure 12:12.: Truncated Parallel Dimension) can be set independently using the FTER attribute. The first terminator will be drawn 25% larger than the remainder. FTER can have any of the same settings as DTER, or can be DEFAULT, in which case FTER assumes the same setting as DTER. FTER is applicable to LDIMs and ADIMs, or can be set at LAYE level, in which case its setting will be cascaded down to newly-created dimensions.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The size of the terminator is controlled by the TSIZ attribute:

TSIZ

- set size to 4mm (default 3mm

The initial settings of DTER and TSIZ are cascaded down from LAYE level. The line styles and colours used for dimension and projection lines may be set by DLSTYLE integer/line_pattern, PLSTYLE integer/line_pattern DLCOLOUR integer/colour_name PLCOLOUR integer/colour_name

At an LDIM the initial settings of these four attributes are cascaded down from LAYE level. At dimension point level their initial values will be DEFAULT, i.e. they use the values from the owning LDIM. See Colours and Styles for details of colours and line styles. Gaps in projection lines are most easily defined using the cursor, with either the start and end points or a mid point and a length being specified. Examples of the relevant commands are:

GAP @ GAP AT @ SETDEF GAP 15 GAP AT @ L 10 GAP OVER @ GAP DELETE @ GAP DELETE ALL

- Specify gap by giving start and end points - Specify a default length gap (2mm) centred on given point - Set default gap length to be 15mm - Specify a 10mm gap centred on given point - Specify gap start and end points with cursor, and delete all other gaps in line - Delete gap specified by cursor - Delete all gaps on the current projection line or dimension line

Up to ten gaps may be inserted in the projection line. Note that if the position of a Dimension is changed so as to substantially alter the path of the projection line then it will be redrawn solid until the gaps are redefined. Gaps may be highlighted by giving the command:

SKETCH GAPS
at any element that contains gaps. A circle will be drawn with diameter equal to the gap length, centred on the gap centre. The command:

ERASE GAPS
will remove the circles. Either of the above commands may have an element name after the main command if the required element is not the current element.

12.4

Radial Dimensions
A Radial Dimension (RDIM) is a form of linear dimension that may be used to draw radius and diameter dimensions of circular elements. A Radial Dimension does not own Dimension Point elements, but is defined by a database reference to an element type (the one to be dimensioned) and an attribute taken from that element which defines whether a diameter or

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

a radius is to be drawn. An example is DIAM of a CYLI (the diameter of a cylinder) or FRAD of a PAVE (fillet radius of a Panel Vertex). Figure 12:21.: Radial Dimension - Principal Features shows the principal features of an RDIM and Figure 12:22.: Radial Dimensions Examples shows examples of types of RDIM. A Pitch Circle Dimension (PDIM) is another form of radial dimension - see Pitch Circle Dimensions.
Dimension Text Dimension Origin Leader Line (optional)

Dimension Line

Terminator

Figure 12:21. Radial Dimension - Principal Features

Diameter dimension on a CYLI, no leader line

Radius dimension on a CYLI, no leader line

Diameter dimensions on filleted Panel Vertex (PAVE) elements, with leader lines

Figure 12:22. Radial Dimensions - Examples

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Radial Dimensions have a dimension centre, defined by the DDNM (Design Data Name) attribute. This is an attribute of the RDIM itself, and is normally defined by the origin of the element dimensioned. (See Radial Dimensions for exceptions to this.) This could be (for example) the origin of a CYLI or of a (filleted) PAVE (Panel Vertex). The other principal attribute of an RDIM is the dimension attribute key, AKEY. This is a word attribute that stores the code of a dimensional attribute of the DESIGN element type that is to be dimensioned. The default value of AKEY is DIAM. The following table shows which attributes of which DESIGN element types may be dimensioned using an RDIM. Element Type CYLI NCYL SLCY NSLC DISH NDIS RTOR NRTO CTOR NCTO SNOU NSNO CONE NCON VERT PAVE SEVE The command: Q AKEYLIST (at a Design element) returns the list of possible AKEY settings. Most of the AKEY settings allowed above are genuine database attributes; however, the DIAM keyword has different meanings at different elements. For some Design elements it is a genuine attribute, for others it is derived: DIAM is a genuine attribute of Dishes (DISH, NDIS) and all Cylinders (CYLI, NCYL, SLCY, NSLC). For a Torus (RTOR, NRTO, CTOR, NCTO), DIAM give the centreline diameter of the element - i.e. twice the average of RINS and ROUT. Attributes DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM DIAM RADI RADI RINS RINS RINS RINS DTOP DTOP DTOP DTOP FRAD FRAD FRAD CRAD CRAD ROUT ROUT ROUT ROUT DBOT DBOT DBOT DBOT

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

For Snouts (SNOU, NSNO) and Cones (CONE, NCON), DIAM is taken to be DBOT, the bottom diameter. For Structural Vertices (VERT, PAVE, SEVE), DIAM is taken to be twice the fillet radius (FRAD) if it is set. The origin is normally the position of p9 of the vertex.

The centre of a Radial Dimension is normally defined by the origin of the element dimensioned, except for the following AKEY settings: For DTOP and DBOT, the dimension centre will be the centre of the appropriate end of the primitive. This also applies to DIAM for Snouts and Cones. For FRAD, the centre of the fillet radius is defined by one of the many p-points of the Vertex (p8 or p9). This also applies to DIAM if the FRAD value is being used. The RADI attribute of a dish (DISH, NDIS) is the knuckle radius. The CRAD attribute of a dish is the cap radius. The centres of these radii are derived. Both these AKEY settings are only sensible for a sideways view of a tori-spherical dish.

12.4.1

Creating Radial Dimensions

The RDIM is defined by the ON command plus optional AKEY syntax, for example:

NEW RDIM ON ID @ AKEY RADI

- create RDIM element - use cursor to define dimension centre - change AKEY to give a radius dimension

In many cases it will be unnecessary to define AKEY explicitly, since the DIAM setting will give a sensible result. Although RDIM elements do not have p-point or p-line attributes it is possible to use p-point or p-line syntax to select the Design element. This is necessary for vertices (VERT, SEVE, PAVE) that cannot be picked directly by cursor. However, the Design element can be picked using the IDP @ command.

12.4.2

Appearance of Radial Dimensions - Specific Attributes

The Radius/Diameter flag (DFLAG) attribute controls whether the RADIUS or DIAMETER is evaluated by the AKEY attribute as well as whether the dimension line is drawn from the centre (Radius) or across the diameter (Diameter). The default setting is RADIUS.

120

240

DFLAG RADI

DFLAG DIAM

Figure 12:23. Radial Dimensions - DFLAG Setting

The Dimension Text (DMTX) attribute has the initial setting #DIM, which gives the value of the dimension controlled by DLFAG. For example for AKEY RINS and DFLAG DIAM, the text #DIM will be evaluated as the inside diameter of the element identified. The resulting value will be output on the drawing in place of this codeword. #DIM is a simple case of intelligent text - see Intelligent Text.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The Dimension Line Angle (DDEG) attribute controls the angle at which the dimension line is shown, relative to the 2D coordinate system of the VIEW. The default value is 0 (horizontal in the VIEW). Note that this is only horizontal in the Sheet when the VIEW has RCOD UP. DDEG may be set explicitly or by using the cursor (i.e. DDEG @). The Text Radius Flag (DTFLAG) attribute controls whether the text radius DTRAD (see below) is measured from the CENTRE, MIDPOINT or CIRCUMFERENCE of the radial dimension. The default setting is CENTRE. For radius dimensions, MIDPOINT is the midpoint between centre and circumference; for diameter dimensions MIDPOINT is the same as CENTRE. The Text Radius (DTRAD attribute) is a signed distance (in Sheet units) that defines the radial position of the dimension text origin from the centre or circumference (according to the DTFLAG setting) of the dimensioned object. In the latter case, DTRA= 0 (the default value) means that the text origin is positioned at the 2D projection of the circumference of the object dimensioned. If the text origin lies outside the circumference then the text is justified towards the centre of the circle. If the text lies inside the circumference then the text is centre justified unless the DSTYL is LEADER. In this last case, the justification is towards the circumference. Text radius can be negative. For DTFLAG CIRCUMFERENCE, a negative value means inside the circumference. For DTFLAG CENTRE, a negative value places the text on the opposite side of the centre to its usual position. This is equivalent to reversing DDEG with a positive DTRA value.

240

240

DTRA 0 DTFLA CENTRE

DTRA 0 DTFLA CIRCUM

240

240

DTRA -10 DTFLA CIRCUM

DTRA 10 DTFLA CIRCUM

240

240

DTRA 10 DTFLA CENTRE

DTRA -10 DTFLA CENTRE

240

120

DFLAG DIAM DTFLA MIDPOINT

DFLAG RADIUS DTFLA MIDPOINT

Figure 12:24. Radial Dimensions - DTRA Setting

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:25

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The Dimension Text Angle (DTANGLE) attribute controls the Dimension text angle. Possible settings are:

DTANGLE STANDARD DTANG HORIZ DTANG VERT

The default setting of DTANG is STANDARD. In this case the text is orientated radially. See Figure 12:25.: Radial Dimensions - DTANG Setting for the effects produced by changing DTANG.

DTANG STAN

DTANG HORIZ

DTANG VERT

Figure 12:25. Radial Dimensions - DTANG Setting

The Dimension Text Offset (DTOF) attribute defines the displacement of the text position from the text radial position. DTOF is a 2-dimensional array attribute. DTOF(1) defines the displacement along the text path direction (i.e. Radial, Horizontal or Vertical depending on the DTANG setting), and DTOF(2) in the text upvector direction. The default/initial value of DTOF is (0,0). Further control of the text position in the upvector direction is given by use of the vertical alignment attribute ALIG. The actual position of the text for DTOF(2)=0 will depend on the value of ALIG. This allows you to align text independently of the character height DTCH. See Label Text Manipulation for further details of ALIG. The second component of text offset, DTOF(2), is always applied in the upvector direction. Its value may be positive, zero or negative. See Figure 12:26.: Radial Dimensions DTOF(2) Setting for the effects produced by changing DTOF(2). As an alternative to entering two values, DTOF may be set using the cursor, i.e.

DTOF @
Note: In Figure 12:26.: Radial Dimensions - DTOF(2) Setting, ALIG=BBODY unless otherwise indicated.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:26

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 0

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 5

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 -5

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 -5 ALIG TBODY

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 0 0

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 0 5

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 0 -5

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 0 -5 ALIG TBODY

DTANG VERT DTOFF 0 0

DTANG VERT DTOFF 0 5

DTANG VERT DTOFF 0 -5

DTANG VERT DTOFF 0 -5 ALIG TBODY

Figure 12:26. Radial Dimensions - DTOF(2) Setting

The definition of the direction of application of the first component, DTOF(1), is more complex: For DTANG STANDARD and text outside the circumference (i.e. DTFLAG CIRCUM, positive DTRAD), DTOF(1) is in the direction of the radial displacement outwards from the text radial position. (In this case, it is preferable to modify the text radius (DTRAD) rather than DTOF(1); DTOF(1) is best left set to zero). For DTANG HORIZONTAL and text outside the circumference, DTOF(1) is horizontal from the text radial position. In this case, the sign of DTOF(1) is determined by the DDEG attribute; for DDEG between -90 and +90, positive DTOF(1) adjusts the text position to the right of the radial position of the dimension text; for DDEG between 90 and 270, positive DTOF(2) adjusts the text position to the left. See Figure 12:27.: Radial Dimensions DTOF(1) Setting - Text Outside Circumference. Similarly, for DTANG VERTICAL and text outside the circumference, DTOF(1) moves the text up for DDEG between 0 and 180; and down for DDEG greater than 180 and less than 360.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:27

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

DTANG STAN DTRAD 50

DTANG STAN DTRAD 55

DTANG STAN DTRAD 45

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF 0 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF 5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF -5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF 0 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF 5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF -5 0

Figure 12:27. Radial Dimensions - DTOF(1) Setting - Text Outside Circumference

In all three DTANG cases, if the text lies inside the circumference, the direction in which DTOF(1) is applied is reversed. DTOF(1) is always applied in the direction away from the Circumference. Thus for DTANG Horizontal and DDEG=45, when the text is outside the circumference then DTOF(1) adjusts text to the right. However when text is inside the circumference, then DTOF(1) adjusts text to the left. For DTANG Standard, then DTOF(1) would move text radially outwards for text outside the circumference; and inwards for text inside the circumference. However in this case it is better to leave DTOF(1) set to zero and modify the text radial position DTRAD. See Figure 12:28.: Radial Dimensions - DTOF(1) Setting - Text Inside Circumference.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:28

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF 0 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF 5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 45 DTOFF -5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF 0 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF 5 0

DTANG HORIZ DDEG 135 DTOFF -5 0

Figure 12:28. Radial Dimensions - DTOF(1) Setting - Text Inside Circumference

The Dimension Style (DSTYLE) attribute, combined with DTANG, controls the overall dimension style. Possible settings are:

DSTYLE DIMLINE DSTYLE LEADERLINE DSTYLE EXTERNAL

The default setting of DSTY is DIMLINE. This style shows a radial dimension line with terminators. For DFLAG DIAM this is drawn across the diameter with two terminators; for DFLAG RADI this is drawn from the centre to the circumference with a single terminator. (See Figure 12:23.: Radial Dimensions - DFLAG Setting.) If the dimension text lies inside the circumference, then the dimension line will be gapped if the text crosses it. The position of dimension text is controlled by the Dimension Text Offset (DTOFF) attribute - see earlier in this Section. The dimension line will be extended beyond the circumference of the object dimensioned if the text radial position (DTRAD attribute - see earlier in this Section) lies outside the circumference. If the text is horizontal, then a horizontal line will be drawn from the radial dimension line to the actual text position. Whatever the text orientation, the line will be extended to underline the text if indicated by the DTUL attribute (see below). The LEADERLINE style shows a radial leaderline from the circumference to the text radial position. If the text is horizontal, then the leaderline will be extended horizontally to the text offset position. No dimension-line will be drawn. Text underlining will be controlled by the Dimension Text Underlining attribute, DTUL. This indicates whether the leaderline is extended to underline the text or not. If DTUL is ON, the leaderline will always be extended to underline the text even if this causes it to pass through the text string. The line will be drawn through the text offset position - thus there will be overlining for ALIG TBODY. DTUL is ignored for DSTYL DIMLINE unless the text radial position is outside the circumference. The default setting will be OFF. See Figure 12:29.: Example RDIMs in LEADERLINE Style for examples of the LEADERLINE style (all shown with DTUL ON).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:29

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

240 240

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 0 DTFLAG CENTRE DTRAD 0

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 0 DTFLAG CIRCUM DTRAD 5

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 5 0 DTFLAG CENTRE DTRAD 0 DFLAG RADI

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 5 0 DTFLAG CIRCUM DTRAD 10

Figure 12:29. Example RDIMs in LEADERLINE Style

The EXTERNAL style is a variant on the Dimline style. For Diameter dimensions, two short radial lines are drawn outwards from the circumference with terminators on the circumference. If the text radial position lies outside the circumference, then one line is extended to the text offset position (with optional text underlining). For Radius dimensions with EXTERNAL style the appearance depends on the text radial position. If it lies inside the circumference, then a single short radial line is drawn outwards from the circumference with a terminator on the circumference. If the text radial position lies outside the circumference, then the dimension is drawn exactly the same as in the DIMLINE style except that the terminator direction is flipped to be outside the dimension line. See Figure 12:30.: Example RDIMs in EXTERNAL Style for examples of the EXTERNAL style (all shown with DTUL ON).
240

240

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 0 DTFLAG CENTRE DTRAD 0

DTANG STAN DTOFF 0 0 DTFLAG CIRCUM DTRAD 5

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 5 0 DTFLAG CENTRE DTRAD 0 DFLAG RADI

DTANG HORIZ DTOFF 5 0 DTFLAG CIRCUM DTRAD 10

Figure 12:30. Example RDIMs in EXTERNAL Style

12.4.3

Appearance of Radial Dimensions - General Attributes

In addition to the attributes described in the previous section there are further attributes which control the appearance of the dimension, which are also used by Linear and Angular Dimensions (see Angular Dimensions) and Dimension Points. These attributes will be cascaded down from the owning LAYE. The attribute setting DEFAULT is not available for Radial Dimensions. The general attributes are: The Dimension Terminator attribute DTER - see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions for details. The Terminator Size attribute TSIZ - see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions for details.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:30

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The Dimension Line Style and Colour attributes (DLSTYLE, DLCOLOUR) control the appearance of the dimension and leader lines. The initial values are cascaded down from LAYE level. See Colours and Styles for details of colours and line styles. The Gaps array attribute GAPS - an array of user-defined gaps; no gaps by default. The gaps defined in this array will be applied to the dimension- and leader lines of the Radial Dimension. This is in addition to the gap under the dimension text that is inserted automatically in the dimension line. See Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions for details. The command:

GAP TIDY
deletes unused gaps. Dimension Text will also have the following attributes, similar to those in use for LDIMs and ADIMs: Vertical Alignment ALIG Font DFONT Dimension Text Colour DTCOLOUR Character Height DTCH Letter height DTLH - cascaded from the LAYE. See Label Text Manipulation for further details of ALIG - cascaded from FONT on LAYE. See Miscellaneous Text Facilities for details of text fonts. - cascaded from TXCOLOUR on LAYE. - cascaded from CHEI on LAYE - see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions for details. - attribute derived from DTCH.

12.4.4

Appearance of Radial Dimensions - Ancillary Graphics Attributes

Additional attributes are provided to control ancillary graphics as follows: Marker Style/Colour (MSTYLE/MCOLOUR). These control the appearance of the optional marker at the circle/arc centre. MSTYLE may be set to OFF to suppress the marker. Crosshairs Line Style/Colour (CHSTYLE/CHCOLOUR). These control the appearance of the optional horizontal and vertical fixed crosshairs that mark the centre of the circle/arc being dimensioned. CHSTYLE may be set to OFF to suppress the crosshairs. Crosshairs Overshoot distance CHOSHT - default value 6. This controls the distance by which the crosshairs overshoot the circle circumference. This value can be negative. CHOSHT can be set using the cursor, i.e. using the command:

CHOSHT @
Angle Subtended ASUB - default 0. This controls the angle subtended by the optional projection arcs at the circle circumference. For DFLAG DIAMETER two arcs are drawn, one at each end of the dimension-line; for DFLAG RADIUS only one arc is drawn. The midpoint of these arcs will intersect the dimension-line. Note that ASUB=180 generates a circle for a diameter dimension. Projection Line Style/Colour (PLSTYLE/PLCOLOUR). These control the appearance of projection arcs. For details of setting colour and style attribute values see Colours and Styles.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:31

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.4.5

Creating Radial Dimensions using the Cursor

Note: The creation methods given here are applicable to RDIMs and PDIMs (Pitch Circle Dimensions) - see Pitch Circle Dimensions. In addition to the basic creation method given in Creating Radial Dimensions, some style attributes may be defined by cursor interaction. Having created the RDIM/PDIM and defined its position,

DIM @
will cause both dimension angle DDEG and text radius DTRAD to be defined in one go. (The dimension text origin will be at the cursor crosshair position.) It will not modify DTOF.

12.4.6

Modifying Radial Dimensions through Graphical Interaction

A powerful facility for modifying an existing radial dimension is provided by the command

MODIFY @
Having made the dimension you wish to modify the current element, giving this command causes the Dimension Modification Form to appear, and the selected dimension is highlighted with four pickable hot spots that allow modification of the DDEG, DTRA and DTOF attributes of the dimension. In addition, DTANG can be modified using the Text angle option button. To modify the dimension, click on the hot spot(s) that you wish to move, click on the new position (a transient image of the dimension will appear, which will move as the mouse is moved), then click on OK on the form. (Cancel allows the command to be aborted with no change to the dimension; Reset causes the position of the current hot spot to be reset to its database position; Delete causes the current hot-spot to be deleted or set to a default position.) The form also contains the point construction Option list button that allows positions to be defined in terms of end-points, intersection points, etc.

12.5

Pitch Circle Dimensions

A Pitch Circle Dimension (PDIM) is a form of radial dimension, which may be used to draw radius, and diameter dimensions between two independently definable points. A PDIM is defined by two Dimension Point elements that are owned by the PDIM. These in turn are defined by p-points/p-lines (Radial Dimension P-Point, RPPT element) or 3D positions (Radial Dimension Position Point, RPOI element). As with Linear Dimension Points, it is possible to use a RULE to parameterise 3D positions. It is not possible to create more than two Radial Dimension Points. A PDIM will be drawn when two significant dimension points are defined. It is not normally necessary to navigate to the two individual Dimension Points. The first dimension point will be at the centre of the dimension, the second will define the circumference of the dimension. A PDIM contains the same style attributes as an RDIM (see Appearance of Radial Dimensions - Specific Attributes, but does not have DDNM/ DDNX and AKEY attributes. As with RDIMs, the meaning of the #DIM dimension text is defined by the DFLAG attribute. The dimension points contain no style attributes. Figure 12:31.: Pitch Circle Dimension - example shows a simple example PDIM (bold line - other dimensions are RDIMs). The dimension radius will be the distance between the two dimension points as projected into the VIEW, not the true 3D distance between these points. This projected distance

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:32

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

defines the value reported in the dimension text. This is consistent with the functionality for Linear Dimensions (LDIMs) with Direction TRUE (see Principal Attributes of Linear Dimensions).

Figure 12:31. Pitch Circle Dimension - example

12.5.1

Creating Pitch Circle Dimensions

The PDIM position is defined by two p-points, p-lines or positions, for example:

NEW PDIM PCEN IDP @ PCIRC IDP @ NEW PDIM PCEN POS @ PCIRC IDP @

Create PDIM Define centre point as p-point position Define circumference point as p-point position

Define centre point as 3D position

The PCENTRE command defines or redefines the centre point of a PDIM. For example:

PCEN IDP @ PCEN IDPL @ PCEN IDPD @ PCEN POS @ PCEN POS IDP @ PCEN POS IDPL @

Position centre point on p-point - creates an RPPT Position centre point on p-line (start) - creates an RPPT Position centre point at a distance along a p-line - creates an RPPT Position centre point at a 3D position - creates an RPOI Position centre point on p-point position - creates an RPOI Position centre point on p-line (start) position - creates an RPOI

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:33

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

PCEN POS IDPD @ PCEN @

Position centre point at a distance along a p-line - creates an RPOI Position centre point on a p-point (and set DDEG if possible)

If the existing centre point is the wrong database type, then this command will delete it and create a point of the correct type. The PCIRCUMFERENCE command defines or redefines the Circumference point of a PDIM:

PCIRC IDP @ PCIRC IDPL @ PCIRC IDPD @ PCIRC POS @

etc (as for PCEN)

Position circumference point on p-point - creates an RPPT Position circumference point on p-line (start) - creates an RPPT Position circumference point at a distance along a p-line creates an RPPT Position circumference point at a 3D position - creates an RPOI

This creates or redefines the circumference point of the PDIM. As with the PCEN command, an RPPT or RPOI element is created as appropriate. If necessary the existing circumference point is deleted. DDEG normally remains unchanged. However, the command:

DDEG TRUE
will change DDEG so that the dimension line passes through the circumference point. A PDIM may be defined using two cursor hits. These define the Dimension Points and set DDEG for a PDIM but do not set DTRAD. Example:

NEW PDIM PCEN IDP @ PCIRC @

Individual RPPT Dimension Points may be redefined using the ON command. Individual RPOI Dimension Points may be modified by the POS command. If a RULE is required to parameterise the 3D position, then this must be set or deleted explicitly at the RPOI.

12.6
12.6.1

Angular Dimensions
Angular Dimensions and How to Create Them
This section concentrates on those features that are unique to angular dimensions. Figure 12:32.: Single Value Angular Dimension shows a simple angular dimension. The simplest type of Angular Dimension consists of a pair of directions in the Design model (the dimension directions) that radiate out from the dimension origin. These directions are projected onto the drawing and are represented by projection lines. Between these lines a dimension arc is drawn centred upon the dimension origin. Each dimension arc and projection line may have a piece of text associated with it.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:34

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Angular Dimensions share many of the properties of Linear Dimensions; they may be single or multi-valued, chained or parallel, and if parallel the dimension arcs may be truncated. In the case of parallel dimensions the projection lines will be automatically gapped if their overshoot is sufficiently large (for instance where there is projection line text) to cause them to cross dimension arcs.

Figure 12:32. Single Value Angular Dimension

An Angular Dimension cannot be drawn until its origin and dimension have been properly defined. This could be done by typing the following commands, starting at Layer level:

NEW ADIM ON ID @ FROM @ TO ID @

- Create new Angular Dimension element - Use cursor to nominate Dimension origin - Use cursor to nominate items defining first and second Dimension Directions

Having pressed Enter when the confirmation command line appears, the Dimension will appear on the display. A pair of Dimension Direction elements will have been automatically created, with the last direction becoming the current element. The ON command sets the DDNM attribute of the ADIM to the name of the element at the Dimension origin. The NPPT attribute of the ADIM is set to the p-point that is the origin position. In the example above, NPPT will be set to a default value that equates to the origin of the element named by the DDNM. In this example the Dimension Directions will be DPPT elements - the directions are defined by lines drawn from the origin of the ADIM to the specified p-points (in this case the origins of the specified nozzles). The DPPT also has DDNM and NPPT attributes. In this case DDNM is set by the FROM or TO keyword to the name of the Design element which defines the Direction, NPPT being the specific p-point within the Design element (the origin by default). Any p-point can be nominated to define a Dimension Direction by replacing the FROM @ command above by FROM IDP @.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:35

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

The other types of Dimension Direction that may be owned by an ADIM element are: DPOI ADIR APPT allows the direction to be defined by any given 3D position allows the direction to be defined by any given 3D direction allows the direction to be defined by any given p-point direction

DPOI elements would be created by a sequence such as:

NEW ADIM ON ID @ FR POS @ TO POS @

Here the FROM and TO commands set the POS attribute of each DPOI to the position defined by the cursor. ADIR elements would be created by a sequence such as:

NEW ADIM ON ID @ FR DIR N30E TO DIR S20W

The DIR attribute of each ADIR will be set to the specified direction. If the PLTX attribute is set to #DIR, the projection line direction (as specified by DIR) will appear as projection line text. #DIR is an example of intelligent text - see Intelligent Text. APPT elements would be created by a sequence such as:

NEW ADIM ON ID @ FR DIR IDP @ TO DIR IDP @

Here the PPDI attribute of each APPT will be set to the number of the p-point of the nominated element that defines the Dimension Direction. In each example above, the FROM keyword defines the Direction at the start of the Dimensions member list, TO defines a Direction after the last item in the list. The Directions will be drawn in the order in which they appear in the list, and the rotational direction between the Directions is determined by the minor arc between the first two Directions. The above examples show the easiest way of creating ADIM elements, but many other methods are available. The dimension origin can be defined explicitly as a 3D point, as a ppoint, as a Branch Head or Tail or as (the origin of) any Design element; similar considerations also apply when defining the Direction elements. An example of a chained Angular Dimension is in Figure 12:33.: Chained Angular Dimension.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:36

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:33. Chained Angular Dimension

Such a dimension is created in a similar way to a chained Linear Dimension. Notice how the Dimension Arc text is (automatically) oriented and positioned relative to the Dimension Arc so as to make it easiest to read. Additional links can be inserted in or added to a chained Dimension (or a single-valued Dimension can be converted to a chained Dimension) by using the INSERT command in a similar way to with Linear Dimensions. The SORT DIM command can also be used with Angular Dimensions to reorder any incorrectly ordered Directions. An example of a parallel Angular Dimension is shown in Figure 12:34.: Parallel Angular Dimension.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:37

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

Figure 12:34. Parallel Angular Dimension

A parallel Dimension can be produced simply by setting the LCHA attribute of an ADIM to PARA (a chained dimension has LCHA CHAI).

12.6.2

Principal Attributes of Angular Dimensions

Those attributes of a linear Dimension which most affect its general appearance - namely DOFF, DPOS, LCHA, OSHT and PLCL - are all the same as or similar to those for Linear Dimensions, and are set in the same way. Those attributes that relate to the dimension line of a Linear Dimension relate to the dimension arc of an angular dimension, and those attributes that relate to the projection line of a linear dimension relate to the dimension radius of an Angular Dimension. DOFF for an Angular Dimension is the radius of the dimension arc and is set by the DIM RAD command (cf DIM OFFS). Clearly, the PLDI (projection line direction), DIR (projection line direction) and TLIN (true length) attributes do not apply to Angular Dimensions. The SENSE attribute enables the rotational direction of the Dimension to be changed. The standard value is that given by the minor arc from the first to the second dimension point. The rotational sense may be altered by using: SENSe REVerse The standard sense may be restored using: SENSe STANdard Important: This attribute should be used with caution. It is primarily intended for use with parallel Dimensions or those containing two points only. Chained or truncated Dimensions with more than two points will contain overlapping arcs.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:38

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

It is also possible to specify an explicit rotational sense: SENSe CLOCkwise or SENSe ANTIclockwise However, standard or reverse sense should be used with parallel dimensions.

12.6.3

Detail Attributes of Angular Dimensions

Angular Dimensions have the same TRUN and DMSP attributes as Linear Dimensions. Dimension arc and projection line (dimension radius line) text is set and positioned in the same way as for linear dimensions. Projection line gaps are also handled in the same way. At ADIMs the default setting of attribute DMTX is #DIM~0. This produces a degree symbol after the angle value, which is output to one decimal place. (See Intelligent Text for details of hash codes, e.g. #DIM.) The DTANGLE (Dimension text angle) attribute is available for Angular Dimensions and their Dimension Points. However, the settings are restricted to the following:

DTANG DTANG DTANG DTANG

HORIZ VERT STAN DEF

The meanings of these settings are similar to those for Linear Dimensions (see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions).

12.7

Identifying Dimensions
The cursor may be used to identify Dimensions and Dimension Points/Directions as follows:

ID LDIM @ ID ADIM @ ID @
- identify Dimension nominated by cursor - identify Dimension Point/Direction nominated by cursor

Dimensions can also be highlighted - see Highlighting Displayed Elements.

12.8

Suppressing the Display of Dimension and Projection Lines

The display of either the dimension or projection lines of a Linear or Angular Dimension may be suppressed using the DLFG attribute of the LDIM:

DLFG PROJ
causes only the projection lines of a Dimension to be drawn. The setting of the LCHAIN attribute is ignored in this case - all dimensions are treated as chained. This enables coordinate dimensions to be output - with the coordinate reported in the projection-line text.

DLFG DIM
causes only the dimension lines of a Dimension to be drawn. The default setting, causes both dimension- and projection lines to be drawn:

DLFG ALL

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:39

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.9

Dimensioning Skewed Pipe in Isometric Views

Dimensions on skewed Pipe in isometric views can have misleading graphics. This can be avoided by using a constructed Dimension Point, whose position is defined by a RULE set which gets one coordinate of position from one Component and the remainder from another. This constructed Dimension Point can then be used with either Component to draw Dimensions with sensible graphics. For example, an elevation Dimension is required between a Valve and an Elbow in skewed pipe. Sensible graphics can be achieved by the following:

NEW LDIM FROM valve_id NEW DPOI RULE SET POS (E (POS(1) OF <valve_id> WRT /* ) $ (N (POS(2) OF <valve_id> WRT /* ) $ (U (POS(3) OF <elbow_id> WRT /* ) RULE EXEC POS
A copy of this Dimension Point can be used in other Dimensions to dimension between the Elbow and the Easting/Northing of the Valve. See the manual AVEVA DRAFT Administrator Application User Guide for more details about rule sets.

12.10 Updating Dimensions

If the VIEW XYPS is changed, or if the positions of Design elements are changed, the positions of Dimensions on the Sheet will not change automatically. For the necessary repositioning to occur the command: UPDATE ANNO must be given. The above command will affect the current element (and elements below it). Commands of the form: UPDATE element_identifier ANNO are also valid, where element_identifier would typically be a DRWG, SHEE, VIEW or LAYE. Such a command can, of course, be given from any position in the hierarchy; only annotation relating to the named element will be updated. The ANNO keyword can be omitted if element_identifier defines a piece of annotation only, for example, LDIM.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:40

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.11 Summary of Commands

12.11.1 Creating Linear Dimensions . . .

FROM ID @ TO ID @INSERT ID @ TO AFT ID @ TO BEF ID @ TO POS @ TO IDP @ TO IDPL @

- create a Dimension start point - create subsequent Dimension Points - create a Dimension Point in order - create a Dimension Point after (with respect to dimension direction) nominated Design item - create a Dimension Point before (with respect to dimension direction) nominated Design item - create a dimension Point at a 3D Design World coordinate - create a dimension Point at a p-point - create a dimension Point at a p-line

12.11.2 Positioning the Dimension Line . . .

DPOS @ DOFF value DIM OFFS DIM ABS

- set Dimension line position through a paper position (DPOS) - set a Dimension line position as an offset from the first Dimension Point explicitly - convert a DPOS attribute to DOFF (offset distance from the first dimension point) - convert a DOFF attribute to DPOS (absolute paper coordinate)

12.11.3 Setting Dimension Directions . . .

SORT DIM DIR value PLDI value DIR TRUE

- rearrange Dimension Points into a logical sequence - sets Dimension direction & uses standard PDMS direction syntax, or you can use a design p-point direction - sets DIR - set projection line direction via a direction or angle - sets PLDI

- set dimension line direction to be that calculated from the first & second p-points - sets TLIN true

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:41

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.11.4 Creating and Modifying Radial Dimensions . . .

NEW RDIM ON ID @ AKEY word DIM @ MODIFY @

- creates RDIM element - use cursor to define dimension centre - sets AKEY to give a diameter or radius dimension as required (default DIAM) - defines both dimension angle DDEG and text radius DTRAD in one go. (Dimension text origin will be at cursor crosshair position.) - modifies DDEG, DTRA or DTOF attributes by cursor interaction

12.11.5 Creating Pitch Circle Dimensions . . .

NEW PDIM PCEN IDP @ PCIRC IDP @ NEW PDIM PCEN POS @ PCIRC IDP @ PCEN IDP @ PCEN IDPL @ PCEN IDPD @ PCEN POS @ PCEN POS IDP @ PCEN POS IDPL @ PCEN POS IDPD @ PCIRC IDP @ PCIRC IDPL @ PCIRC IDPD @ PCIRC POS @ NEW PDIM PCEN IDP @ PCIRC IDP @

- creates PDIM - defines centre point as p-point position - defines circumference point as p-point position

- defines centre point as 3D position

- positions centre point on p-point - creates an RPPT - positions centre point on p-line (start) - creates an RPPT - positions centre point at a distance along a p-line - creates an RPPT - positions centre point at a 3D position - creates an RPOI - positions centre point on p-point position - creates an RPOI - positions centre point on p-line (start) position - creates an RPOI - positions centre point at a distance along a p-line - creates an RPOI - position centre point on p-point - creates an RPPT - position centre point on p-line (start) - creates an RPPT - position centre point at a distance along a p-line - creates an RPPT - position centre point at a 3D position - creates an RPOI : etc - defines Dimension Points and sets DDEG

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:42

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.11.6 Creating Angular Dimensions . . .

ON ID @ FROM DIR option

- specify the Design item which will be referenced for an Angular Dimension - sets DDNM - creates a Dimension start point with the direction set as the ppoint specified - sets DDNM & PPDI, or if direction specified - sets DIR. options: PA, PL, PH, PT, PPoint, IDP, N, S, D, E, W, X, Y, X, HH, HT - creates subsequent dimension Point with direction set as p-point specified - sets DDNM & PPDI, or if direction specified - sets DIR - sets the dimension line position as an offset radius from the Dimension Point - sets DOFF first

TO DIR option DIM RAD value SENSE REV SENSE STAN

- changes rotational sense of angular dimensions

12.11.7 Setting Dimension Line and Dimension Line Text . . .

DTOF option STAN DEF @ DTOF N 1 @ DTOF N 2 5 DMTX text DTCH value DTLH value DLSTYLE value DLCOLOUR value DLSTYLE DEF DLCOLOUR DEF DTCOLOUR value DTCOLOUR DEF

- set dimension text offset distance from origin. Options: - sets to 0 0 - sets to Dimension default value - set via cursor-constructed point, e.g. DTOF ENDP OF /LINE1 QUAL X500 Y500 - move x coordinate of dimension text origin to cursor position (y coordinate not changed) - change y coordinate of dimension text origin by 5mm (x coordinate not changed) - set dimension text as text string. Unsets from #DEF (i.e. #DIM) - sets text character height in mm - sets text letter height in mm (=0.8 * character height) - sets dimension line style - sets dimension line colour - sets dimension line style to Dimension default value - sets dimension line colour to Dimension default value - sets dimension text colour - sets dimension text colour to Dimension default value

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:43

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

DTANGLE STAN DTANG HORIZ DTANG VERT DTANG EXTERN DTANG PARA PTANG DEF

- sets dimension text angle to STANDARD - sets dimension text angle to HORIZONTAL - sets dimension text angle to VERTICAL - sets dimension text angle to EXTERNAL - sets dimension text angle to PARALLEL - sets dimension text angle to DEFAULT

12.11.8 Setting Projection Line and Projection Line Text . . .

PTOF option STAN DEF @ PTOF N 1 @ PTOF N 2 5 PLTX text PTCH value PTCH DEF PTLH value PJUS option TOW AW C DEF (default) PTCOLOUR value PTCOLOUR DEF PLSTYLE value PLCOLOUR value PLSTYLE DEF PLCOLOUR DEF PTANGLE HORIZ

- set projection text offset distance from origin. Options: - sets to 0 0 - sets to Dimension default value - sets via cursor-constructed point, e.g. CENTRE OF /CIRCLE1 . move x coordinate of projection line text origin to cursor position (y coordinate not changed) - change y coordinate of projection line text origin by 5mm (x coordinate not changed) - set projection text as text string. Unsets from #DEF (i.e. #DIM) - sets text character height in mm - sets projection text character height to Dimension default value - sets text letter height in mm (=0.8 * character height) - sets projection text justification . Options:

- sets projection line text colour - sets projection line text colour to Dimension default value - sets projection line style - sets projection line colour - sets projection line style to Dimension default value - sets projection line colour to Dimension default value - sets projection text angle to HORIZONTAL

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:44

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

PTANG VERT PTANG STAN PTANG DEF

- sets projection text angle to VERTICAL - sets projection text angle to STANDARD - sets projection text angle to DEFAULT

12.11.9 Setting Gaps . . .

GAP @ GAP AT @ SETDEF GAP value GAP AT @ L value GAP DELETE @ GAP DELETE ALL GAP TIDY

- specifies a gap in a projection line by giving start & finish points - specifies a default length gap of 2mm in a projection line by a single point - sets default gap length - specifies a gap by giving a single point - deletes a gap identified by cursor - deletes all gaps on the current projection line or dimension line - deletes all unused gaps (Radial Dimensions only)

12.11.10 Miscellaneous Operations on Dimensions . . .

LCHA PARA LCHA CHAI DMSP value DMSP @ TRUN BY value TRUN TO value DTER option FTER option TSIZ 4 OSHT value OSHT @ OSHT TOP /CIRC1 PLCL value PLCL @

- sets dimension type to Parallel - sets dimension type to Chained - for Parallel Dimensions, sets separation spacing explicitly - for Parallel Dimensions, sets separation spacing using cursor - for Parallel Dimensions truncates dimension lines by a percentage specified - for Parallel Dimensions truncates dimension lines to a specified value in mm - set dimension line terminator. Options: ARR, OBL, DOT, OFF - set first dimension line terminator. Options: ARR, OBL, DOT, OFF, DEFAULT - set terminator size to 4mm (default 3mm) - sets projection line overshoot explicitly - sets projection line overshoot using cursor - projection line overshoot defined by a constructed point - sets projection line clearance explicitly - sets projection line clearance using cursor

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:45

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

DLFG PROJ DLFG DIM DLFG ALL

- draw projection lines only - draw dimension lines only - draw projection and dimension lines (default)

12.11.11 Radial Dimensions . . .

AKEY option

- stores the code of a dimensional attribute of the Design element type that is to be dimensioned. Option dependent on Design element type. Default DIAM. - controls whether the dimension line is drawn from the centre (Radius) or across the diameter (Diameter). option = DIAMETER or RADIUS, default RADIUS. - controls angle at which dimension line is shown, relative to 2D the

DFLA option

DDEG value DDEG @ DTFL option

- coordinate system of the VIEW. Default 0 (horizontal in the VIEW). - controls whether the text radius DTRAD is measured from the CENTRE, MIDPOINT or CIRCUMFERENCE of the radial dimension. Default CENTRE - radial position of the dimension text origin from the centre or circumference - (according to the DTFL setting) of the dimensioned object. - modifies DTFL and recalculates DTRA to keep same visual appearance. option = CENTRE, MIDPOINT or CIRCUMFERENCE. - controls the Dimension text angle. option = STANDARD, HORIZ, VERT, default STANDARD. - combined with DTAN, controls the overall dimension style. Option = DIMLINE, LEADERLINE, EXTERNAL, default DIMLINE. - controls the drawing style used for the optional horizontal and vertical fixed crosshair markers that mark the centre of the circle/ arc being dimensioned. option = OFF (default), integer or line pattern. - controls the drawing colour for the above. Value can be a colour number or pre-defined colour name. - controls the distance by which the crosshairs overshoot the circle/ arc circumference. value can be negative, default 6.

DTRA value DTRA @ DTRA FLAG option

DTAN option

DSTY option CHSTYLE option

CHCOLOUR value CHOS value CHOS @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:46

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

ASUB value

- controls the angle subtended by the optional projection arcs at the circle/arc circumference. For DFLAG DIAMETER two arcs are drawn, one at each end of the dimension line; for DFLAG RADIUS only one arc is drawn. The midpoint of these arcs will intersect the dimension line. ASUB 180 generates a circle for a diameter dimension. - allows interactive modification of Dimension, with graphical feedback.

MODIFY @

12.11.12 Querying . . .

Q DESC

- (at Dimension or Dimension Point) gives dimension direction and Dimension Points (Linear Dimensions) gives dimension origin and Dimension Points (Angular Dimensions) reports whether a Radius or Diameter dimension is required (Radial Dimensions) names the Design element and attribute dimensioned (RDIMs) gives the Radial Dimension Points (PDIMs)

Q SETDEF Q DDNM X coord Q DDNM Y coord Q DDNM X coord Y coord

- (at Dimension or Dimension Point) - gives default gap length and PKDI setting

- gives the X and/or Y Sheet coordinate(s) of the 3D position of either the p-point specified by the NPPT attribute or the position specified by the PKEY and PKDI attributes. These values may be useful when attempting to position GLABs and SLABs neatly.

Q EXTENT DMTX Q EXTENT PLTX - (at Dimension Point) Q PCENTRE Q PCIRC Q AKEYLIST gives Sheet area occupied by Dimension Text/Projection Line Text

- (at a PDIM) - gives centre point of dimension - (at a PDIM) - gives circumference point of dimension - (at a Design element) - lists possible AKEY settings for element type

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:47

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Dimensioning

12.11.13 Deleting Unwanted Dimension Points . . .

DELETE NULL ANNO

- deletes all RDIM, DPPT, DPBA and APPT elements with DDNM set to NULREF. For PDIMs, if the first dimension point (RPPT element) is inaccessible, then the entire PDIM will be deleted; if only the second dimension point (RPOI element) is inaccessible, then only that dimension point will be deleted, leaving the PDIM and its centre point still defined.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

12:48

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13
13.1

Labelling
Introduction
Labels are a form of drawing annotation, comprising text and/or graphics, associated with Design items or Views. The Label elements are the General Label (GLAB), and the Special Label (SLAB). SLABs are similar to GLABs except that they are generated from templates rather than individually. Label elements are owned by Layers or Views; SLAB templates (Text Label Templates, (TXTMs)) exist as members of Label Libraries (LALBs). The relevant part of the DRAFT database hierarchy is shown below.

LIBY LAYE

LALB

GLAB TXTM SYTM

DDNM

SLAB

DDNM

TMRF

Design database element or VIEW

Figure 13:1. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Label Elements

Labels may be created individually, or automatically following the definition of a set of rules controlling the elements to which the Labels are to be applied (see Autotagging). Figure 13:2.: A Typical Label Element illustrates a typical Label, showing its principal features and attributes.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:2. A Typical Label Element

The main features of a Label are: Label Attachment Point. The 2D VIEW position equivalent to a user-specified p-point or distance along a p-line or (by default) the origin of the Design item with which the Label is associated. Label Origin. A position within the body of the Label that is used to position it. Label Position. A 2D position within the VIEW at which the Labels origin is placed; this may be an absolute VIEW position or a position relative to the Labels attachment point. Leader Line. A line from the connection point to the Label attachment point. Leader Line Connection Point. A position, defined relative to the Label origin, to which the leader line is drawn.

13.2
13.2.1

Creating and Manipulating Labels

Creating Labels and Label Text
The example Label shown in Figure 13:2.: A Typical Label Element could be created simply by typing the following (starting at LAYE) level:

NEW GLAB
create new General Label (or NEW SLAB to create a Special Label)

DDNM ID @
position Label attachment point using cursor

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

The above two commands are all that is needed to create a Label with the features shown in Figure 13:2.: A Typical Label Element; the text which appears in the Label frame is by default the name of the Design element at the Label attachment point, all other attributes having default settings cascaded down from the owning Layer. The Label attachment point will be at the origin of the element specified by the Labels Design Data Name (DDNM) attribute. For elements that have p-points or p-lines the attachment point can be varied by setting the NPPT or PKEY attributes to the specified p-point number/p-line name respectively. Example:

NPPT 2
- set NPPT to (p-point) 2

PKEY TOS
- set PKEY to p-line TOS (top of steel)

PKEY MEML
- set PKEY to member line For elements with p-lines the attachment can be further varied by setting the PKDI p-line distance) attribute. See P-line Attributes for details. The ON command allows the DDNM and NPPT or PKEY/PKDI attributes to be set simultaneously. Example:

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

ID@ /PUMP1-1/NOZZ1 IDP @ P2 OF NOZZ4 OF EQUI /1101 PHEAD OF /BRAN2-1 PLEAVE OF /VALVE3 IDPLINE @ PPLINE BOS OF /SCTN.PN1_PN5 IDPDISTANCE @ PPLIN TOS OF /SCTN5 PROP 0.8

With the ON command it is also possible to specify an absolute distance along a p-line, although the value given will be converted to a proportional value for storage in the database:

ON PPLIN TOS OF /SCTN4 2500 FROM START ON PPLIN BOS OF /SCTN5 1000 FROM END
If the FROM keyword is omitted then FROM START is assumed. When using the ON command if values for NPPT, PKEY and PKDI are not specified then the defaults will be used - any existing values may be overwritten. The Label attachment point can be offset from the DDNM using the APOF (Attachment Point Offset) attribute. This defines an offset position (in VIEW coordinates) measured from the p-point/p-line distance referenced by the Label. The leader line will be attached to this

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

point (although if the clearance attribute (LLCL) is set the leader line will overshoot or stop short of it). This means that the leader line and its terminator can be moved away from the p-point to any desired position. By default APOF will be (0,0) - i.e. no offset. APOF may be set directly, for example:

APOF 15 0
or in terms of Sheet coordinates by:

LEAD ATTA X455 Y677 LEAD ATTA @

The offset may be removed by:

LEAD ATTA DELETE

(or

APOF 0 0

or

APOF UNSET)

The Body Text (BTEX) attribute is by default set to the intelligent text string #NAME, which translates to the name of the Design element at the attachment point when the Label is created. If the Design element at the attachment point is unnamed, an error-text string will appear in the Label frame. This string is customisable and defined by the LAYEs NTEXT attribute. See Customizing Error Text for further details.

BTEX NOZZLE 2
or can be set using a combination of explicit and intelligent text. For example, the command

BTEX NOZZLE 2#/#NAME

would produce the Label shown in Figure 13:3.: Label Text. Note how the size of the Label frame automatically adjusts to accommodate the specified text.

Figure 13:3. Label Text

Note the special hash-code #/ that generates a new line. See Intelligent Text for a full description of DRAFTs Intelligent Text System. The extent of the text defined by the BTEX setting can be queried by

Q EXTENT BTEX
See Text Strings for details. Label text can be edited through use of the EDTEXT command. For example, if the target string is NOZZLE 2:

EDTEXT NOZZLE 2 NOZZ 1-2 change Label text to NOZZ 1-2

Note: When editing intelligent text the intelligent text code itself must be specified, not the resultant text. See Editing Text for full details of the EDTEXT command.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.2.2

Labelling Views
Labels (GLABs and SLABs) can be applied to Views, allowing View names, scales, etc to be applied easily. The Label is associated with the View by setting its DDNM attribute to the View, either directly or using the ON syntax. Example:

DDNM View ON /View99

13.2.3

Positioning and Orienting Labels

When a Label is created, its origin (held as the XYPS attribute) is placed at a fixed offset (default x 25mm, y 25mm) from its attachment point. The Label origin (and hence the Label) may be moved by the AT @ command, which resets XYPS to the position specified by the cursor. This command calls up the Point Construction Option form, which contains the point construction Option list button which allows positions to be defined in terms of end-points, intersection points, etc. If the Labels OSET attribute is TRUE then the origin is held as an offset from the attachment point; if OSET is FALSE then the Label origin is held as an absolute Sheet coordinate. Note that the coordinates specified with the AT command (whether explicit or from cursor input) are always taken to be absolute coordinates, irrespective of the OSET setting. To avoid any potential confusion when positioning labels explicitly, several alternatives are available. For example:

OFFS X45 Y45 OFFSET ABSOLUTE AT X300 Y200 ABS AT X300 Y200 XYPS 20 20

Set Label origin to given offset coordinates. XYPS set to offset coordinates (from Label attachment point) Convert XYPS (absolute coordinates) to offset coordinates (Label will not move). This is equivalent to OSET TRUE. Convert XYPS (offset coordinates) to absolute coordinates (Label will not move). This is equivalent to OSET FALSE. Set Label origin to given absolute coordinates. XYPS set to absolute coordinates. Set Label origin to given absolute coordinates. XYPS set to offset coordinates (from Label attachment point) Set Label origin as given coordinates, taken as offset if OSET TRUE, absolute if OSET false. (XYPS @ is also available).

Note: When a Pipe element is labelled directly, the Pipe origin is assumed to be the position of the HEAD of the first Branch visible in the VIEW region, if any. If no Branch HEADs are visible in the VIEW region, then the position of the HEAD of the first Branch is used. Constructed points (see Point and Line Construction) may also be used for Label positioning operations. See Summary of Commands section at the end of this Chapter for examples.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Labels may be oriented by the ANGLE command, which sets the Labels ADEG attribute if an angle is specified explicitly, or the PPDI attribute if the orientation is specified as a p-point direction. (The p-point must belong to the associated Design item DDNM but need not be the same as the Labels attachment point). For example:

ANGLE 30 ANGLE IDP @ ANGLE P2 OF BOX 1 OF /1502B ANGLE PPLIN NA OF /SJ1-1

Set angle of turn to 30 degrees Specify orientation as p-point direction using cursor Specify p-point direction explicitly Specify orientation as p-line direction (of secondary joint)

Figure 13:4. Label Orientation

13.2.4

Label Frame Manipulation

The Label frame may be drawn or omitted. This is controlled by the LFRAme attribute:

LFRA ON LFRA OFF

The appearance of the frame is controlled by the LFSTYLe and LFCOLOur attributes. For example:

LFSTYL DASHEDMED LFCOLO 4

sets the frame linestyle to DASHEDMEDIUM draws the frame in colour 4

For further details of linestyle and colour functionality see Colours and Styles. The clearance between text and frame is controlled by the GBOX attribute (default 1mm). Figure 13:5.: Frame Clearance shows the effect of changing GBOX from 1mm to 4mm.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:5. Frame Clearance

13.2.5

Hiding Labels
A Labels visibility is controlled by its LVIS attribute:

LVIS TRUE LVIS FALSE

the label is visible (the default) the label is invisible

This facility could be used to hide labels attached to obscured Design elements.

13.2.6

Label Text Manipulation

Character height and spacing, and line spacing are all definable, as is the text justification. The set of attributes that control the appearance of a Label text is: CHEI LHEI CSPA LSPA character height (default 4 mm) letter height (0.8* character height) character spacing factor (default 0) text line spacing factor (default 0)

Initial (default) values of all these attributes are cascaded to GLABs from their owning LAYE. All the above attributes are set directly, for example:

CHEI 6 CSPA 1 LSPA 1

(LHEI automatically set to 4.8)

The character height and letter height attributes are discussed further in Miscellaneous Text Facilities. CSPA and LSPA may be given negative values. For CSPA, small negative values (of the order of -.1) will cause text to become compressed (values much smaller than this are not useful). For LSPA, values of the order -.1 will compress lines; values of the order -3 will reverse the order of lines. (Limits are -10 to +10 for LSPA, -0.5 to +10 for CSPA.)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:6.: Label Text - Character Spacing and Line Spacing illustrates the effects of varying the character spacing and line spacing.

Figure 13:6. Label Text - Character Spacing and Line Spacing

Text justification and vertical alignment are controlled by the settings of the JUST and ALIG attributes, which may have the following alternative settings:

JUST L JUST C JUST R ALIG BB ALIG HB ALIG TB ALIG BASE

Text left justified (default) Text centre justified Text right justified right Text aligned with bottom of body (default) Text aligned halfway up body Text aligned with top of body Text aligned with base of first character (on first line of text)

Here, horizontal justification is relative to the Label origin, vertical alignment is relative to the text body - the area occupied by the text. The text base ignores text descenders (for example, the tail of a p or a y). Figure 13:7.: Horizontal Justification and Vertical Alignment illustrates the effect of varying these attributes.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:7. Horizontal Justification and Vertical Alignment

In Figure 13:8.: Text Base/Body Alignments, the symbol shows the text string origins for BBODY and BASE alignments. For a multi-line text string (as shown), the origin is at the baseline of the first line of text.

ALIG BBODY

ALIG BASE

Figure 13:8. Text Base/Body Alignments

The Label FONT attribute controls the Label text font - see Miscellaneous Text Facilities for details of text fonts. The TXCOLOUR attribute controls the text colour - see Colours and Styles, for details of style and colour settings.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.2.7

Leader Lines
The label leader line may be drawn or omitted. This is controlled by the LLEAder attribute. For example:

LLEA OFF LLEA ON

The leader line may terminate with an arrow, a dot or nothing, at a definable distance from the attachment point; this distance may be specified by setting either the leader line clearance attribute (LLCL) or the attachment point offset (APOF) a position. The terminator is controlled by the LTER attribute:

LTER ARROWS LTER DOTS LTER OBLIQUE LTER OFF

These commands set the Labels LTER attribute, which is set to no terminators by default. The size of the terminator is controlled by the TSIZ attribute:

TSIZ 4

set size to 4mm (default 3mm)

The initial settings of LTER and TSIZ are cascaded down from LAYE level. The leader line clearance (attribute LLCL, 0mm by default) is set as follows:

LLCL 4

clearance 4mm

The attachment point offset (APOF), unset by default, is set by commands such as:

APOF 3 0

sets attachment point offset to be X3 Y0

Labels also have a POS attribute, which by default is unset. If the POS attribute is set, the 3D World position specified will be used as the leader-line attachment point (rather than the DDNM and NPPT or DDNM, PKEY, and PKDI attributes). A DDNM attribute still has to be specified for the label to be properly defined. This allows labels to be positioned at a calculated position (for example, in the centre of a Panel or half-way along a GENSEC) without having to determine the most suitable p-point or pline to reference. The leader line may be straight or bent, with one or two bend point positions specified either explicitly (by defining either a specific point within the VIEW or an offset from the attachment point), or implicitly by specifying that the leader line is to contain a vertical or horizontal portion. Examples of commands used to specify the bend point explicitly are shown below, with the results of the commands being shown in Figure 13:9.: Bending the Leader Line.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:9. Bending the Leader Line

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

LEAD BENT OFFS X7 LEAD BENT OFFS X0 Y-60 X100 Y-60 LEAD BENT @ LEAD BENT PT 2 @ LEAD BENT PT 2 X722 Y40 LEAD BENT PT 1 OFF X15 LEAD BENT PT 1 DEL LEAD BENT @ @ LEAD STRAIGHT

Specify bend point as offset from Label attachment point Specify two bend points Specify bend point using cursor Specify second of two bend points using the cursor Specify second of two bend points explicitly Specify first of two bend points as offsets from Label attachment point Delete first of two bend points Specify two bend points using cursor Return to straight leader line

The above commands set the Labels LSHA (Leader Line Shape) and BPOF (Bend-Point Offset) attributes. When defining two bend-points using a single command, the first point to be defined should be the one nearest the 3D item labelled. The BPOF attribute stores one or two pairs of coordinates defining the positions of the bend-points relative to the paper position of the ppoint to which the label is attached. The LSHA attribute defines how the values stored in BPOF are to be interpreted. These attributes may be set (and queried) directly, for example:

LSHA BENT BPOF -50 0 -75 25

When defining bend point 2 of two individual bend points, bend-point 1 will be set to Offset X0 Y0 if it does not already exist. When deleting bend point 1, bend-point 2 (if it exists) will be made the new bend-point 1. Depending on the position of the bend point, the leader line connection point may change see the bottom illustration of Figure 13:9.: Bending the Leader Line for an example. In the case of a bent leader line specified as having a horizontal or bent portion, the bend point will be at the intersection of the horizontal/vertical part of the line and a sloping line drawn at a user-specified angle to the attachment point. The first of these two portions to be specified will be at the end nearest to the attachment point. The portion of the leader line nearest to the connection point will go to a corner of the Label box if the horizontal/vertical portion is specified first, or to the middle of a box line if the horizontal/vertical portion is specified last. See Figure 13:10.: Bending the Leader Line - Horizontal/Vertical Portions for examples of the commands involved and their results.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:10. Bending the Leader Line - Horizontal/Vertical Portions

If a Labels position relative to its attachment point is changed then on Drawing regeneration the leader line, if bent, will always be drawn specially - you dont necessarily have to redefine the bend point position.

13.2.8

Varying the Leader Line Connection Point

The Leader Line connection point can be offset from its standard position using the CPOF (Connection Point Offset) attribute. This is STANDARD by default, which causes DRAFT to determine the actual leaderline connection point. Other settings are ORIGIN, which puts the connection point at the Label origin, or an explicit 2D value, which offsets the connection point relative to the Label origin. See Figure 13:11.: Varying the Leader Line Connection Point.

ABC

ABC

ABC

CPOF STAN

CPOF ORIG

CPOF -3 0

Figure 13:11. Varying the Leader Line Connection Point

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.2.9

Leader Line Gaps

A leader line may have up to 10 gaps in it. These are most easily defined using the cursor, with either the start and end points or a mid-point and a length being specified. (In the latter case a default gap length will be assumed if a value is not specified.) Examples of the relevant commands are:

GAP @ GAP AT @ GAP AT @ L 5 GAP OVER @ GAP DELETE @ GAP DEL ALL GAP TIDY

Insert gap by specifying start and finish points with cursor Insert gap of default length centred on cursor position Insert 5mm gap centred on cursor position Insert gap by specifying start and finish points with cursor, and delete all other gaps in line Delete gap specified by cursor Delete all gaps on current Sheet Deletes all unused gaps from Label

The default gap length may be set by using the SETDEFAULT GAP command, for example:

SETDEF GAP 5

Set default gap length to be 5mm

Gaps in Label leader lines can be sketched and erased in the same way as Dimension projection line gaps - see Detail Attributes of Linear Dimensions.

13.2.10 Modifying Labels through Graphical Interaction

You can modify a label graphically by making it the current element and giving the command

MODIFY @
The Annotation Modification Form will appear, and the selected Label is highlighted with pickable hot spots. These enable the APOF, BPOF, CPOF, XYPS, and ADEG attributes of the Label to be modified interactively. Note: For this functionality to be available the Annotation Modification form must be loaded. The form contains the point construction Option list button that allows positions to be defined in terms of end-points, intersection points, etc. To modify the Label, click on the hot spot that you wish to move, and click on the new position. A transient image of the Label will appear, which will move as the mouse is moved. You can then do one of the following: Click on OK on the form, to accept the changes you have made. Cancel allows the command to be aborted with no change to the Label. Reset causes the position of the current hot-spot to be reset to its database position; Delete causes the current hot-spot to be deleted or set to a default position: A bend point will be deleted The attachment point will be set to the p-point (i.e. APOF 0 0) The connection point will be set to its default value (i.e. CPOF STANDARD) The angle of the label will be set to 0. The Label position will not be affected.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.3
13.3.1

Special Labels and Label Templates

Introduction
The appearance and text contents of a Special Label (SLAB) are defined by the Label Template that it references by its Template Reference attribute (TMRF). There are two types of templates: Text Templates (TXTM) and Symbol Templates (SYTM). Both types are owned by a Label Library (LALB) which, like a SHEE, can be displayed in an area view. TXTM and SYTM have an XYPS attribute which defines their position on the Library Sheet and allows them to be laid out in a logical fashion. The templates can be picked to be used to define SLABs. See Figure 13:1.: DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Label Elements.

13.3.2

Special Labels and Text Label Templates

The Text Template element (TXTM) is similar to a GLAB, but without a leader line. The appearance of the text and frame of the SLAB is (by default) controlled by attributes of the referenced TXTM. The appearance of the leader line is controlled by attributes of the SLAB. Some of the attributes of the TXTM are duplicated at the SLAB, thus allowing the definition provided by the TXTM to be overwritten. By default their values at the SLAB will be TEMPLATE, i.e. use the value obtained from the TXTM. However, if they are set to explicit values these will be used rather than the values of the TXTM. The attributes that appear at both TXTM and SLAB are: FONT CHEIGHT ALIGNMENT JUSTIFICATION TXCOLOUR LFSTYLE LFCOLOUR Font Character height Text vertical alignment Text justification Text colour Frame linestyle (NLSTYLE at the TXTM) Frame colour (NLCOLOUR at the TXTM)

The initial values for these attributes on a newly created SLAB are cascaded from the owning Layer. See Colours and Styles for more information on colours and line styles. The text attribute of a TXTM (ie BTEX) can be an explicit or intelligent text string, but in the latter case the expanded result cannot be shown on the library Sheet (ie LALB). It can only be evaluated at the SLAB because it will depend upon the SLABs DDNM attribute. The Example Text attribute (ETEX) of a TXTM is a documentary attribute to allow, for example, a description of the template. The ATEX attribute of a SLAB has a special purpose. When the BTEX attribute of the referenced TXTM contains the hashcode #ATEX it will be replaced by the ATEX value. If the TXTM does not use #ATEX the SLABs ATEX attribute has no effect. Thus for example if TXTM /TEMPLATE has:

BTEX Number #ATEX

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Then creating a SLAB that references it and setting the ATEX attribute:

NEW SLAB DDNM /VESS-1 TMRF /TEMPLATE ATEX 99

will create a label with the text Number 99 attached to /VESS-1.

13.3.3

Special Labels and Symbol Templates

SLABs may also reference Symbol Templates (SYTMs). SYTMs are members of LALBs or SYLBs (Symbol Libraries). The appearance of SYTMs is completely user-definable, and may consist of any size and combination of basic geometrical shapes (squares, circles etc), as well as text (which may be intelligent). SYTMs are generated using DRAFTs 2D drafting facilities - see 2D Drafting. (Note also that Point Construction (see Point and Line Construction) can also be used to create SYTMs.) SYTMs are used in the same way as TXTMs. As with textual SLABs the appearance of the text and graphics of a symbolic SLAB is (by default) controlled by attributes of the referenced SYTM. The appearance of the leader line is controlled by attributes of the SLAB. At a SLAB the following three attributes may be set to overwrite the values provided by the SYTM: TXCOLOUR LFSTYLE LFCOLOUR Text colour Graphics linestyle Graphics colour

Note that a SYTM may be composed of several graphics primitives each drawn in a different style or colour. Overwriting the SYTM attribute values will cause all the graphics primitives to adopt the single linestyle or colour specified. The initial values for these attributes on a newly created SLAB are cascaded from the Layer. See Colours and Styles for more information on styles and colour.

13.3.4

Scaling and Mirroring Special Labels

The XYSCALE attribute of a SLAB allows independent scale control in the X and Y directions. Either or both values assigned to XYSCALE may be negative, which allows the SLAB to be mirrored. Instanced text is only affected by its scale in Y direction. It is not possible to produce backwards or distorted text. A negative Y value will rotate the entire text to be upside-down. The Y scale affects the overall size of the text string. It is recommended that JUSTIFICATION CENTRE be used for text. This will keep the text position unchanged with respect to the rest of the symbol when the symbol is mirrored. The SYSZ attribute may be used to change the scale uniformly in both directions, for example

SYSZ 2

is equivalent to XYSCALE 2 2

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Another variation is:

SYSZ @ @

resize SLAB using the cursor

Figure 13:12.: Varying the SLAB XYSCALE attribute illustrates the effects of varying XYSCALE. Note: Symbols (SYMB), see 2D Drafting, also have the XYSCALE attribute and may be manipulated in the same way. XYSCALE is also settable at LAYE level.

XYSCALE 1 1

XYSCALE 1 2

XYSCALE 2 1

XYSCALE -1 1

XYSCALE -1 1

XYSCALE -1 -1

Figure 13:12. Varying the SLAB XYSCALE attribute

13.3.5

SLAB Leaderline Connection Points

The leaderline connection point for SLABs is determined by the setting of its CPOF attribute. This is STANDARD by default, which causes DRAFT to determine the actual leaderline connection point. Generally, when the SLAB references a SYTM, this will be at its origin. However if the first member of the SYTMs list is: A CIRC primitive, and the SLAB is drawn undistorted (i.e. its XYSC values are equal) then the leaderline will terminate at the CIRC An MRKP primitive, then the leaderline will terminate at the MRKP. A TEXP primitive, then the leader line will terminate at the opposite corner of the test box, as occurs with GLABS.

The CPOF attribute can be set explicitly or by using the LEADERLINE CONNECTION syntax. For example:

LEAD CONN @ LEAD CONN X30 Y35 LEAD CONN OFFS X10 Y-10

allows the point to be defined by cursor allows an explicit Sheet position to be specified allows a relative position to be specified

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

LEAD CONN STAN LEAD CONN ORIG

resets CPOF to its default value sets CPOF to 0,0

The last three examples are equivalent to:

CPOF 10 -10 CPOF STAN CPOF ORIG

The values stored in CPOF define the coordinates of the connection point relative to the templates origin and they are in the axis system of the template. Hence if the SLABs orientation is changed the connection point will rotate with it. For SLABs defined by a SYTM having a TEXP as its first member the leader-line will terminate at the appropriate corner of the text-box (as occurs with GLABs) unless the SLABs CPOF attribute defines a specific leader-line connection point. Note: The CPOF attribute for a SLAB is an offset from the Label origin. For a SLAB that references a TXTM, this is defined by the JUST and ALIG attributes of the TXTM. Hence if the JUST or ALIG components of a TXTM are modified the leaderline will be connected to a different part of the Label. The selection system makes it possible to do a global change on the CPOF attribute of all SLABS that use a given TXTM, using a macro such as:

VAR !A COLLECT ALL SLAB WITH (TMRF EQ template_id ) FOR SHEE DO !B VALUES !A $!B CPOF -5 10 ENDDO
Note: Where the CPOF setting defines an offset from the new Label origin and template_id is the TXTM name (which must be followed by a space).

13.4
13.4.1

Autotagging
Introduction
DRAFTs autotagging facility enables you to generate automatically a series of Labels in one or more VIEWS of a Drawing, having defined a set of rules to control those elements that are to be labelled and the (common) appearance of the labels. The automatically generated labels (which may be GLABs or SLABs) can then be individually edited. For example, it may be necessary to reposition a label or to modify its leader line. The editing functionality is subject to a few constraints so as to prevent Labels from becoming out of line with the criteria under which the autotagging process operated. The autotagging process is under the control of a Tag Rule (TAGR) element. The relevant part of the DRAFT database hierarchy is shown overleaf. A Tag Rule exists as a member of a Layer (LAYE) or of a Tag Ruleset (TRST). Tag Rulesets are owned by Tag Rule Libraries (TRLB). The Layer element has a Tag Ruleset Reference attribute (TRSF), which if set will refer to a TRST. All automatically generated Labels will be owned by a Layer. Those Labels within a

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

given Layer will have been generated either from TAGRs owned by that Layer or from TAGRs referenced by the Layer via its TRSF attribute. Having defined a TAGR element, the Labels are generated by giving the command:

UPDATE TAGGING
The UPDATE TAGGING command should be given whenever the Design changes such that Labels move (but remain within the VIEW), or if the TAGR itself changes.

LIBY

TRLB VIEW TRST LAYE TAGR

TRSF TMRF

GLAB, SLAB or template element

IDLN

GLAB/SLAB
I d List or DESIGN element
SORF

GLAB/SLAB TAGR
TMRF SORF

GLAB, SLAB or template element

IDLN

Id List or DESIGN element

Figure 13:13. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Autotagging Elements

13.4.2

Defining the Autotagging Hierarchy and Rules

A typical sequence of commands for setting up an autotagging hierarchy would be:

NEW TRLB NEW TRST NEW TAGR /TR1 TMRF /LAB1 IDLN /ID6
define Label appearance by setting template reference attribute to point to existing GLAB, SLAB, SYTM or TXTM define elements to be labelled by setting Id List name attribute to point to existing Id List [or Design] element. [Set to /* by default.]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Note: If the TMRF attribute is set to reference a GLAB or SLAB (as opposed to a TXTM or SYTM) than that GLAB or SLAB must not have been generated by a Tag Rule. Having constructed the hierarchy and set up the necessary references, the items to be tagged are defined by the TAG command, which applies to those elements defined by the IDLN setting. Examples of the use of the TAG command are:

TAG ALL NOZZ TAG ALL BRAN MEM TAG (ALL VTWA ALL VFWA ALL VALVE) WI (STYP EQ GATE AND ABORE GE 80) TAG ALL WI (CREF NE =0)
The TAG command has the same syntax as the USE style_name FOR command. See Representation Rules and Creating Labels and Label Text in Part 1, Basic Drawing Creation & Output for more examples. The CRIT attribute for the current tag rule can be set explicitly. Example:

CRIT ALL BRAN WI (HBOR LE 80 OR TBOR LE 80)

13.4.3

Controlling Label Appearance and Elements to be Tagged

Label Appearance
This is defined by the element referenced by the TAGRs TMRF attribute. If the referenced element is a GLAB or a SLAB, the generated labels will be identical to it except for attributes DDNM and LVIS (which will be set TRUE). The GLAB or SLAB need not be in the current Drawing. If the referenced element is a TXTM or SYTM, the basic style of the generated SLABs will be defined by the referenced template, but detail appearance attributes will be cascaded down from the owning LAYE. Attributes CHEI, FONT, LFSTYLE/LFCOLOUR and TXCOLOUR may be set at LAYE level to TEMPLATE, which means that these attributes will take their values from the template referenced by the TAGR. (This applies only to SLABs; other LAYE members, for which the TEMPLATE setting would be meaningless, would be created with values of 4mm, 1, 1 and 1 (respectively) for these attributes.)

Elements to be Tagged
These are defined by the element referenced by the TAGRs IDLN attribute. By default, this is set to reference the WORLD, in which case all elements included in the owning VIEWs Id List will be considered for tagging. If the IDLN attribute is set to refer to an Id List, only those elements common to this Id List and the VIEWs Id List will be considered for tagging. Similarly, if the IDLN attribute is set to refer to a Design element, only those elements common to this element and the VIEWs Id List will be considered for tagging.

13.4.4

Querying
TMRF and IDLN are queryable in the usual way. With a TAGR as current element, the query command

Q DESC
will output the tagging rule used.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

A description of all tag rules relevant to a Layer (i.e. those owned by it and those owned by the TRST it references) may be output by:

Q TRSF DESC

(at LAYE)

13.4.5

Label Generation
Having set up a TAGR element and its associated autotagging rules, the Labels are generated by UPDATE TAGGING command. This is of the form:

UPDATE element_identifier TAGG

If element_identifier refers to a TAGR owned by a LAYE, then all Labels defined by the given Tag Rule will be generated. If element_identifier refers to a LAYE, then all Labels defined by all of the member Tag Rules of the Layer, plus those owned by the TRST referenced by the Layers TRSF attribute will be generated. If element_identifier refers to a VIEW, SHEE or DRWG then this is equivalent to giving an UPDATE TAGG command for each Layer beneath them in the hierarchy. If element_identifier is omitted then the current element is assumed and one of the three previous conditions will apply. Tag Rules will also be updated by UPDATE ALL. When a Tag Rule is updated for the first time a set of Labels will be created and drawn which can then be edited if required - see Label Editing and Copying. Each Label will have its SORF (source reference) attribute set to refer back to the TAGR. Labels will not be created for any element that is not drawn because It is not included in the VIEWs Id List It falls outside the VIEW rectangle It is excluded by the action of a Section Plane

In the latter two cases, whether or not an element is excluded depends upon the position of the p-point to which the Label is to be attached. Note that Labels will be created for elements that are not drawn because they are obscured by others. If these Labels are not required it is recommended that they are made invisible by setting LVIS FALSE. Deleting them will only cause replacements to be generated on the next UPDATE TAGG command. If a LAYE element is LOCKed then none of its TAGRs will be updated. An UPDATE ALL command will still cause the annotation of that Layer to be updated. If a GLAB or SLAB, which needs to be modified or deleted, is LOCKed then it will be UNLOCKed and the modification or deletion carried out. When a Tag Rule is updated a second (or subsequent) time, existing Labels will not be deleted and recreated from scratch unless the OVERWRITE option is used, i.e.

UPDATE TAGG OVERWRITE (or UPDATE element_identifier TAGG OVERWRITE)

Using OVERWRITE will destroy any editing of individual Labels that may have been done. Not using OVERWRITE will cause existing Labels to be updated so as to reflect any changes that may have occurred in the Design database; new Labels will only be created for those Design elements found without Labels with correctly set SORF attributes. Any existing Label (with a correctly set SORF attribute) on a Design element which no longer exists or which no longer meets the criteria of the Tag Rule (see above) will be deleted.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

The following example illustrates the effect of updating a Tag Rule a second time (without OVERWRITE): VIEW /VIEW1 has an Id List /LIST1 which calls up four Equipments, /VESS1, /VESS2, / VESS3 and /VESS4. /VIEW1/LAYE1 owns Tag Rule /TR1 which is simply defined as TAG ALL EQUI. The IDLN attribute of /TR1 is set to /*, i.e. the whole of /LIST1 is to be scanned and all EQUIs tagged. When /TR1 is updated for the first time four Labels are created in /VIEW1, one on each of / VESS1, /VESS2, /VESS3 and /VESS4. For the sake of convenience we shall refer to these Labels as /LAB1, /LAB2, /LAB3 and /LAB4, although the autotagging process would not actually give them names. The following DESIGN and DRAFT database changes are then made: /VESS1 - unaltered /VESS2 - moved by W2500 /VESS3 - deleted /VESS4 - removed from /LIST1 /VESS5 - added to /LIST1 /LAB1 - updated, but no changes /LAB2 - updated, and moved to reflect new position of /VESS2 /LAB3 - deleted /LAB4 - deleted /LAB5 - new Label, created on /VESS5

When /TR1 is subsequently updated the Labels change as follows:

13.4.6

Tracking the Autotagging Process

The command

TAGGING MESSAGES ON
will result in messages being output during a tagging update operation advising of Label creation and deletion. Other options are:

TAGG MESS ON FILE /filename TAGG MESS ON FILE /filename OVER TAGG MESS ON FILE /filename APPE TAGG MESS ON FILE EN TAGG MESS OFF

output messages to file as above, but overwrite existing file as above, but append messages to existing file close message file turn message output off

By default, messages will not be output.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.4.7

Label Editing and Copying

A GLAB or SLAB generated by the autotagging process will be the same as a conventionally created Label except that its SORF attribute (set to Nulref in the manual case) will be set to refer back to the controlling TAGR. SORF may be set to Nulref, thus breaking the link between the Label and the TAGR, but it may not be set to point to another TAGR (or to any other value). Having broken the link, a subsequent UPDATE TAGGING command will create another Label on the labelled Design element. GLABs or SLABs generated by the autotagging process can be edited, but the following safeguards are applied to ensure that the Labels will always comply with the definition set up by the TAGR: The DDNM attribute cannot be changed The BTEX attribute cannot be changed (GLABs) The TMRF attribute cannot be changed (SLABs) The Label cannot be INCLUDED in another Layer The Label cannot be deleted

If a Label with its SORF attribute set is copied, the new Label will have its SORF attribute set to Nulref. SORF may be unset by

SORF =0 SORF NULREF

or

13.4.8

Tag Rule Editing

TRLB, TRST and TAGR elements may all be modified in the usual way by changing their attribute settings (although with TRLB and TRST elements only the standard attributes, e.g. Name, are settable). Note, however, that editing these elements could cause existing Labels to no longer represent the TAGR definition. If a TAGR owned by a LAYE is deleted or included in another LAYE then the SORF attribute of all labels generated from it will be set to Nulref. It is not feasible to do this for TAGRs owned by TRSTs (because many labels in several databases may be affected) or to set to Nulref SORF attributes for any other changes to TAGRs (because a change may broaden the scope of the TAGR so that existing Labels are still valid). If changes are made to a TAGR or TRST that potentially cause database inconsistencies then a warning message will be output. If a TAGRs TMRF attribute is changed then, at the next UPDATE TAGG command, an implicit UPDATE TAGGING OVERWRITE operation will be performed, which will ensure that the correct appearance of existing labels is maintained. If the TMRF is changed from one TXTM or SYTM to another TXTM or SYTM then existing label edits will be kept. If the TMRF is changed in a different way (e.g. GLAB to GLAB or SYTM to SLAB) then existing Label edits will be lost.

13.4.9

DATAL Transfer
Note that since it is not possible to set the SORF attribute (other than to Nulref) it is not possible to reproduce the link between a Tag Rule and its GLABs and SLABs by DATAL output. RECONFIGURER must be used for correct transfer of data between databases.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.4.10 Schedule Generation

Using Autotagging, tabbing in intelligent text, and the PDMS Programmable Macro Language (PML) it is possible to generate schedules on drawings easily. The Tag Rules TMRF attribute should reference a GLAB that has been positioned absolutely (e.g. AT X1000 Y800 ABS) at the top or bottom of the required schedules position. The GLABs BTEX attribute should contain a number of code-words separated by tabbing codes (see Tab Generator Codeword). For instance for a nozzle schedule the BTEX may be

#NAME#15#P1BOR#25#CREF.
This will create a schedule of three fields giving nozzle name, bore, and connection reference. The second field will start at character column 15 and the third at column 25. The width of the fields should be made sufficient to accommodate the expanded codewords. The GLABs FONT attribute should point to a font set up with fixed-width characters (i.e. styles 6 or 7), its CHEI set to an appropriate value, and its leader line and text frame suppressed. When the Tag Rule is updated all the GLABs generated will be in the same position. A macro should be written that scans around the Layer looking for GLABs with their SORF attribute referencing the Tag Rule. Each such GLAB found should be moved up or down (depending upon whether the template GLAB was positioned at the bottom or top of the schedule). The size of the move should be calculated from the character height of the GLAB and its number in the scan. The macro should also create a TABL element to provide the frame of the schedule and its horizontal lines, a TEXP element to define the field headings, and vertical STRA elements to separate the fields. To achieve this it will be found necessary to use the Q EXTENT BTEX feature (see Entering Text from DRAFT) to determine the lengths and positions of text strings.

13.5

Intelligent Label Placement

A facility is provided to tidy up crowded labelling, so as to minimise Label overlap and leader-line crossing. As well as changing label positions the facility may also change Label orientations, text justifications and alignments, and the definition of leader-line shapes and bend-points. The facility uses two versions of the SPREAD command, which may be used to position Labels locally or remotely. With local positioning, Labels will be positioned around their significant design elements in such a way as to minimise Label overlap and leader-line crossing. Labels will not be moved from their initial positions unless it is necessary. If they are moved then, as far as possible, leader lines will be straight and at 45 to the VIEW axis. An example of 'local spreading' is shown in Figure 13:14.: Poorly positioned Labels and Figure 13:15.: Result of SPREAD command on Labels shown in Figure 4-16.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

Figure 13:14. Poorly positioned Labels

Figure 13:15. Result of SPREAD command on Labels shown in Figure 4-16

In the above example, the command

SPREAD LOCAL SELECT INSIDE @ @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:25

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

was used to define a window within which the labels to be repositioned lie. By default, the Labels will be offset by 25mm (in the X and Y directions) from the Label attachment point. The SPREAD LOCAL command can be used with the PDMS general selection syntax (see the DESIGN Reference Manual, Part 2). Other variations of the SPREAD LOCAL command are:

SPREAD LOCAL SELECT ID @ ID @ SPREAD LOCAL OFFSET 10 SPREAD LOCAL XOFFSET 15 SPREAD LOCAL RADIUS 20

Use cursor to identify (two) Labels to be spread. Change Label spread offset to 10mm (X and Y directions) Change Label spread offset to 10mm (X direction only) Specify Label spread offset indirectly by giving a diagonal length

With remote positioning, labels will be positioned around the VIEW border. It is possible to define a margin outside the VIEW frame that will define the positioning of the Labels. It is also possible to define a side of the VIEW frame alongside of which repositioned Labels will not be placed, and the minimum permissible gap between any two Labels can also be specified. Labels will be repositioned at the (allowed) VIEW side nearest to their attachment points. Labels along the top and bottom sides will be rotated through 90 (readable from the righthand side) unless otherwise specified. To avoid overlapping, some leader lines will be doglegged at 45. Examples of the SPREAD REMOTE command are:

SPREAD REMOTE SELECT ID @ ID @ SPREAD REMOTE SELECT INSIDE @ @ SPREAD REMOTE REPOSITION @ @ SPREAD REMOTE MARGIN 10 SPREAD REMOTE OMIT TOP

Use cursor to identify (two) Labels to be spread. Use cursor to specify corners of window enclosing Labels to be spread. Use cursor to specify corners of rectangle around which Labels are to be repositioned (could be outside or inside of VIEW border). Reposition Labels within 10mm of VIEW border Prevent Labels being placed alongside the top side of the rectangle around which they are to be repositioned. Specify 5mm as minimum gap between any two Labels. Prevent Labels from being rotated by 90.

SPREAD REMOTE GAP 5 SPREAD REMOTE NOROT

Note: All options must be specified on the same command line; the previous SPREAD parameter settings will not be remembered.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:26

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.6
13.6.1

Summary of Commands
Setting Label Attributes . . .

ON ID @ AT @ AT @ ABS ANG value FRA option

specify the Design element for the label attachment - sets DDNM offset the Label from the default using the cursor - sets XYPS, OSET absolute position for the Label using the cursor - sets XYPS, OSET turn the Label through an anticlockwise angle - sets ADEG set Label frame visibility - sets LFRA options: ON OFF

FRA CLEA value

- set Label frame clearance - sets GBOX

13.6.2

Aligning the Label Text . . .

JUST option

justify text options: L C R

ALIG option

set text alignment options: BB HB TB BA

13.6.3

Setting Label Frame Attributes . . .

LFSTYLE value LFCOLOUR value LLSTYLE value LLCOLOUR value

set frame drawing style set frame drawing colour set leader line drawing style set leader line drawing colour

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:27

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.6.4

Spreading Label Positions . . .

SPREAD LOCAL SELECT selection_option SPREAD LOCAL SELECT INSIDE position_options SPREAD LOCAL OFFSET distance SPREAD LOCAL XOFFSET distance SPREAD LOCAL YOFFSET distance SPREAD LOCAL RADIUS distance SPREAD REMOTE SELECT selection_option

select Labels to be spread (locally) spread Labels inside specified window specify Label spread offset (X and Y directions) specify Label spread offset (X direction only) specify Label spread offset (Y direction only) specify Label spread offset indirectly by giving a diagonal length select Labels to be spread (remotely)

SPREAD REMOTE SELECT INSIDE p spread Labels inside specified window osition_options SPREAD REMOTE REPOSITION position_options SPREAD REMOTE MARGIN distance SPREAD REMOTE OMIT (top/bottom/left/right) SPREAD REMOTE GAP distance SPREAD REMOTE NOROT spread Labels around specified rectangle spread Labels within given distance of VIEW border prevent Labels being placed alongside the specified side of the rectangle around which they are to be repositioned. specify minimum gap distance between any two Labels. prevent Labels from being rotated by 90.

13.6.5

Setting Label Text Attributes . . .

BTEX text CHEI value LHEI value CHEI TEM CSPA value LSPA value OFFS ABS

specify text string specify text height specify letter height (=0.8*character height) (Special Labels only) - set text height to that of Template (TXTM) element specify character spacing factor specify text line spacing set text position as an offset from the p-point - sets OSET TRUE (default) set text position as a specific position on the Sheet - sets OSET FALSE

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:28

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.6.6

Setting Leader Line Attributes (GLABs) . . .

LEAD option LTER option LEAD STRA TSIZ 4 LEAD BENT @ LEAD BENT AT @ OFFSET Y50 LEAD BENT CENTRE OF /CIRC1 LEAD BENT OFFS X value Y value LEAD BENT PT 2 @ LEAD BENT PT 2 X722 Y40 LEAD BENT PT 1 OFF X15 LEAD BENT PT 1 DEL LEAD value option LEAD option value LEAD CLEA ENDP OF /LINE1 QUAL X500 Y500 APOF value value LEAD ATTA X value Y value LEAD ATTA @ LEAD ATTA DELETE APOF 0 0 APOF UNSET CPOF STAN CPOF ORIG CPOF value value

set leader line visibility - sets LEAD TRUE/FALSE. option = ON or OFF. sets leader line terminator. options: OFF, ARR, DOT, OBLIQUE sets a bent leader line to straight set terminator size to 4mm (default 3mm) bend a leader line at a position set by cursor (@ @ for two bend points) bend leader line at an offset from a position set by the cursor bend a leader line at the centre of the named circle bend a leader line at a position explicitly (repeat X value Y value for two bend points) specify 2nd of two bend points using cursor specify 2nd of two bend points explicitly specify 1st of two bend points as offsets from Label attachment point delete 1st of two bend points bend a leader line at an angle then horizontal or vertical. option = HORI or VERT bend a leader line horizontal or vertical then at an angle option = HORI or VERT sets leader line clearance using a constructed point offsets attachment point from DDNM (Sheet units) specify attachment point offset explicitly

remove attachment point offset places leader line connection point at standard position places leader line connection point at Label origin allows a relative position to be specified

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:29

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

13.6.7

Setting Leader Line Attributes (SLABs) . . .

LEAD CON @ LEAD CONN X value Y value LEAD CONN OFFS X value Y value CPOF value value LEAD CONN STAN CPOF STAN LEAD CONN ORIG CPOF ORIG APOF value value LEAD ATTA X value Y value LEAD ATTA @ LEAD ATTA DELETE APOF 0 0 APOF UNSET

sets leader line connection point by cursor (sets CPOF) allows an explicit Sheet position to be specified allows a relative position to be specified resets CPOF to its default value sets CPOF to 0,0 offsets attachment point from DDNM (Sheet units) specify attachment point offset explicitly remove attachment point offset

13.6.8

Setting Gaps . . .

GAP @ GAP AT @ GAP AT @ L value GAP DELETE @ GAP DELETE ALL GAP TIDY SETDEF GAP value

specify a gap in a leader line by giving start & finish points specify a default length gap of 2mm in a leader line by a single point specify a gap of a specified length by giving a single point delete a gap identified by cursor delete all gaps on the current Sheet deletes all unused gaps from current Label set default gap length

13.6.9

Querying . . .

Q LAB option

query specified label attributes options: LEA POS leader line position, rotation and p-line attributes (latter only relevant if Structural element is being labelled) origin

ORIG

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:30

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

ATTA TEX STY Q DESC option - (at GLAB) - (at SLAB) Q TRSF DESC - (at LAYE)

point annotated text text style

gives Label attachment point, Sheet position, offset and angle of turn. gives template type, Sheet position, offset and angle of turn. gives description of all relevant tag rules

13.6.10 Deleting unwanted Labels . . .

DELETE NULL ANNO

deletes all GLAB and SLAB elements with DDNM set to NULREF

13.6.11 Autotagging . . .

TAG selection_option

sets up elements specified by selection_option to be tagged. Selection rule syntax same as USE ... FOR command sets the CRIT attribute for the current tag rule explicitly output tagging messages to screen output tagging messages to file causes Tag Rules to be evaluated and generates Labels down from current element as above, but deleted (and unrecognised) Design elements referenced in the Idlist are ignored, without the UPDATE process being aborted generates Labels down from element_identifier as above, but deleted (and unrecognised) Design elements referenced in the Idlist are ignored, without the UPDATE process being aborted as UPDATE TAGG, but all labels recreated from scratch as UPDATE element_identifier TAGG, but all labels recreated from scratch

CRIT ALL BRAN WI (HBOR LE 80 OR TBOR LE 80) TAGG MESS ON TAGG MESS ON /filename UPDATE TAGG UPDATE TAGG IGNORE

UPDATE element_identifier TAGG UPDATE element_identifier TAGG IGNORE UPDATE TAGG OVERWRITE UPDATE element_identifier TAGG OVERWRITE

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:31

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Labelling

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

13:32

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14
14.1

Intelligent Text
Introduction
Intelligent text allows data to be automatically extracted from the Design, Catalogue or Drawing databases and entered on a Drawing. Intelligent text uses codewords, which all begin with a # character. Example:

Standby pump #NAME

The advantages of intelligent text are: If the data in any of the three databases changes then when the Drawing is updated the correct new values will be automatically obtained and entered upon the Drawing. You do not have to navigate through the relevant database, retrieve the data, return to the DRAFT database and enter the data manually. The same text string with its embedded codewords can be used many times to generate text strings that are similar in format but different in detail.

The text strings where you can use intelligent text are: DMTX PLTX BTEX dimension line text (of Dimension Points and Directions, projection line text (i.e. ADIR, APPT, DPOI, DPPT, DPBA) general text string of General Labels (GLAB) and Template (TXTM). (See also Text Strings)

14.2

Codewords
The codewords fall into one of six categories: Codewords that access data associated with the Design or Catalogue element referenced by the DDNM attribute of the Drawing database element. See Accessing Data from the DESIGN or Catalogue Databases. Codewords that access data associated with the Drawing database element that owns the text string. Accessing Data from the DRAFT Database. Codewords that access dimensioning data. See Accessing Dimensioning Data. Codewords that access UDA data. See Accessing UDA Data. Codewords that access administrative data. See Accessing Administrative Data. Codewords with special functions. See Codewords with Special Functions.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.3

Accessing Data from the DESIGN or Catalogue Databases

All DESIGN and Catalogue database attributes are accessible. For example, attribute ABCD would be accessed by code #ABCD (or #abcd). In addition, any Design element can be accessed. For example:

#SITE #BRAN

Name of site owning the referenced element Name of Branch owning the referenced element

PDMS pseudo-attributes may be accessed in the same manner. The codewords for position attributes can be modified so as to provide only one of the coordinates. For example:

#POS #POSE #POSN #POSU

full 3D position, e.g. W12250 N7890 U3120 Easting coordinate only, e.g. E12250, W9675 Northing coordinate only, e.g. N7890, S22150 Upping coordinate only, e.g. U3120, D250

All DESIGN database position attributes can be modified in this way. These are POS, HPOS, TPOS, NPOS, POSS, POSE, DRPS and DELP. Note that the codeword #POSE can have two meanings, depending on the context: for SCTNs it means the POSE attribute (Section End Position), in other cases it means the Easting of the POS attribute. The position codewords generate values in World coordinates. It is possible to generate values in the coordinate systems of other elements by the use of transform keywords - see Transforming Position/Direction Data. Note: As an alternative to the standard ENU position format, positions can be output with +/ - format by appending + to the codeword. For example:

#POS #POS+

full 3D position, e.g. W12250 N7890 U3120 would give -12250 +7890 +3120

14.3.1

P-point Data
P-point data can be obtained by a codeword of the form: #Pnxa Data from p-point n of element where n = p-point number, or L for leave p-point or A for arrive p-point x = POS, DIR, BOR, BOP, TOP or CON a = blank, E, N or U (valid for x = POS, BOP or TOP only)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

For example:

#P3BOR #PLBOPU #P1POS

bore at p-point 3 Upping of leave p-point BOP position position of p-point 1

Ppoint codewords can have an optional ^ delimiter between the p-point number and the attribute, for example:

#P2^POS
The delimiter is optional, but it must be used when the number is omitted, for example:

#P^POS
in which case the value from the NPPT attribute of the relevant piece of annotation will be used.

14.3.2

P-line Data
The P-line syntax may refer to the p-line used for annotation (i.e. that defined by the PKEY attribute) or to a specified p-line. A specific codeword defining the p-line precedes strings requesting position, direction and offset. The syntax for p-lines is

#PK
(for PKEY). This syntax on its own is a request for the p-line name (e.g. NA or TOS, stored as the PKEY attribute). #PK may optionally be followed by the p-line name, for example #PKNA for p-line neutral axis. The p-line name (if present) may be 1-4 characters long. #PK may also be followed by MEML (i.e. #PKMEML) if data for the Sections member-line is required. (This is only valid if the SCTN has its MEML attribute set.) The p-line name ma

#PK^DIR

or

#PKNA^POSSU

The last format would mean Upping of Start position of Neutral axis p-line. The internal delimiter ^ is necessary to separate the p-line attribute from the p-line name. There is nothing to stop you from having p-line names such as NAPO or even DIR. Names such as these would be impossible to separate from the p-line sub-codeword without this delimiter. Spaces are not permitted between the codeword and sub-codeword. The following sub-codewords may follow the p-line codeword #PK or #PKname: ^DIR ^POSS ^POSSE ^POSSN ^POSSU ^POSE p-line direction p-line start position Easting of p-line start position Northing of p-line start position Upping of p-line start position line end position

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

^POSEE ^POSEN ^POSEU ^PKDI ^PKDIE ^PKDIN ^PKDIU For example:

Easting of p-line end position Northing of p-line end position Upping of p-line end position position of point along p line defined by PKDI attribute Easting of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute Northing of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute Upping of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute

#PKNA^POSS #PK^DIR

gives the start position of the NA p-line gives the direction of the p-line given by the PKEY attribute

The #PK^PKDI keyword will extract the position along a p-line at which a Label is attached. This will generate the position defined by the PKDI attribute of the label. Thus if PKDI = 0 the Label will be positioned at the start of the p-line (defined by the PKEY attribute) and the start position will be generated. If PKDI = 0.5 it will be at the p-lines mid-point and its midpoint position generated. Besides GLABs and SLABs, the VNOT, ADIM, DPPT, RPPT and PPPT elements also possess the PKDI attribute. Note: In DRAFT p-lines are always cut back by SCTN end-preparations and member-lines are always extended to the working point. The positions generated by these codewords reflect this functionality. The transform qualifier (see Transforming Position/Direction Data) may be used with any of these sub-codewords, but not for p-line name. For example:

#PKTOS^POSEU<WRT /DATUM> #PKTOS^POSEU+<WRT /DATUM> #DERPOS[a]

Gives the upping with respect to /DATUM of the end position of the TOS p-line As above, but gives upping in +/- format Derived position of a Joint, Fitting or Secondary Node, where a = N for Northing, E for Easting, U for Upping (optional)

14.3.3

Accessing Data in Catalogue Datasets

Data in a Catalogue Dataset is obtained by a two-part codeword of the general form: #attribute^qualifier For example:

#PROPERTY^WIDTH #PRTITLE^WIDTH

obtain Property value of WIDTH dataset entry obtain Property Title of WIDTH dataset entry

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

The Property Default (PRDEFAULT) and Property Purpose (PRPURPOSE) settings can be obtained in a similar manner. In each case the first part of the codeword (i.e. PROPERTY etc) can be abbreviated to four characters. PROPERTY values are evaluated as distances or bores if the PTYPE attribute of the relevant DDTA (or DDAT) element is set to DIST or BORE respectively.

14.4

Accessing Data from the DRAFT Database

All DRAFT (PADD) attributes are accessible. For example, attribute ABCD of the current annotation element would be accessed by code #ABCD. In addition the name of any DRAFT element can be accessed. For example: #VIEW #DRWG The name of the View owning the annotation element The name of the Drawing owning the annotation element

Attributes of other DRAFT elements can be accessed using the FROM qualifier. For example:

#AUTH<FROM DRWG>

Generates the Author of the Drawing owning the annotation elements. See Extracting Attribute Data from any Specified Element for full details of the FROM qualifier.

The following special codewords are also available: #DTITL #STITL #VTITL Drawing title, equivalent to #TITL<FR DRWG> Sheet title, equivalent to #TITL<FR SHEE> VIEW title, equivalent to #TITL<FR VIEW>

Special functionality is provided for the following codewords that extract revision data: #APPR #APDT #RVSN #RVDT #RVAU Approve Approval date Revision Revision date Revision author

These codewords extract their data from the first REVI element in the Sheets list. If the qualifier <FR DRWG> is appended then data will be extracted from the first REVI element in the Drawings list. To extract data from a specific REVI element a qualifier should be used. The REVI element can be specified by name, for example:

#RVAU<FR/REV3>

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

or the pseudo-reference array attributes SREVAY and DREVAY can be used. For example:

#RVDT<FR SREVAY[2]> #APPR<FR DREVAY[3]>

Generates the revision date from the sheet's second revision Generates the approver from the drawing's third revision

For details of the SREVAY and DREVAY attributes see Drawing Revisions. For details of the FROM qualifier see Extracting Attribute Data from any Specified Element.

14.5

Accessing Dimensioning Data

Codewords that are allowed values for the Dimension Line Text (DMTX) and Projection Line Text (PLTX) of Angular and Linear Dimensions (ADIM and LDIM) and Dimension Points/ Directions (ADIR, APPT, DPOI, DPPT, DPBA) and have special meanings: #DIM #DEF #DIR Calculated dimension value (DMTX or PLTX) Use default text string supplied by owning ADIM or LDIM (Must appear alone in a text attribute, e.g BTEX #DEF is valid, name #DEF is not.) Projection line direction (of ADIR)

The following codewords are valid in the PLTX of LDIMs and their members, and cause the 3D Dimension Point position to be generated in World coordinates. #DIMPOS #DIMPOSE, #DIMPOSN, #DIMPOSU #DIMPOSDD 3D position Easting, Northing, Upping, respectively Coordinate in the Dimension Direction of the 3D Dimension Point position

For example, if the Dimension Direction is North, the Northing of the Dimension Position will be output - i.e. exactly the same result as #DIMPOSN. If the Dimension Direction is not orthogonal, the full 3D position will be output (i.e. as would be generated by #DIMPOS) together with error message 64,399: /ldim-name: Dimension direction not orthogonal, so unable to calculate single coordinate for codeword #DIMPOSDD These codewords may be used in conjunction with the WRT qualifier (see Transforming Position/Direction Data) to generate relative positions. At a DPOI which has POS and optionally DDNM attributes set, #POS will always obtain data from the element referenced by DDNM. #POS will only obtain data from the POS attribute setting if DDNM = 0/0. Hence you should always use #DIMPOS to generate the coordinates of DPOI elements.

14.6

Accessing UDA Data

For those that extract (UDA) data from the database. The codewords to access Userdefined attribute (UDA) data have the format

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

#:uda_name For example:

#:UDA1
All relevant qualifiers (see Substrings - Extracting Attribute Data from any Specified Element) that apply to ordinary codewords may also be applied to UDAs. The output of data follows a format similar to that used by existing UDA queries. Real UDA may have distance or bore units and will be reported as such. Other uses of UDA reporting are described in Transforming Position/Direction Data.

14.7

Accessing Administrative Data

Codewords relating to administrative data are: #ADATE #BDATE #CDATE #ADATEX #BDATEX #CDATEX DFDATE #TIME #SYSUSE #PROJECT^NUMBER #PROJECT^NAME #PROJECT^DESCRIPTION #PROJECT^MESSAGE #PROJECT^CODE Date: format mm/dd/yyyy, e.g. 09/30/1998 Date: format dd/mm/yyyy, e.g. 30/09/1998 Date: format dd mon yyyy, e.g. 30 Sep 1998 Date: format mm/dd/yy, e.g. 09/30/98 Date: format dd/mm/yy, e.g. 30/09/98 Date: format dd mon yy, e.g. 30 Sep 98 Date: format specified by the DATEFOrmat attribute of the DEPT above the current element. System time: format hh:mm:ss, e.g. 09:07:57 current users System Name Project number Project name Project description Project message Project code

DEPT and LIBY elements have a DATEFOrmat attribute. It controls the format of the values of DATE (of DRWGs) and RVDT (of REVIs) attributes which are automatically generated. DATEFOrmat may be set to: DDMMYYYY DDMMYY MMDDYYYY MMDDYY which gives a format equivalent to ADATE which gives a format equivalent to ADATEX which gives a format equivalent to BDATE which gives a format equivalent to BDATEX

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

DDMONYYYY DDMONYY

which gives a format equivalent to CDATE which gives a format equivalent to CDATEX

14.8
14.8.1

Codewords with Special Functions

Template Codeword
#Tname is the Template codeword, which enables complex text strings to be defined once in a Text Template (TXTM element). This template may then be referenced from other elements. name refers to a text template TXTM. For example:

#T/TEM24
#T may be used in PLTX or DMTX attributes of Dimensions or Dimension Points, or in the BTEX attribute of Labels (GLAB or SLAB) or text primitives (TEXP). The codeword #T/name must be the only content of the text string. The referenced text string may contain intelligent text codeword strings. However the BTEX attribute of a TXTM cannot itself contain a #T codeword since this could lead to recursion.

14.8.2

Tab Generator Codeword

#n is the tab generator codeword, where n is the number of the column where the next character is to be output. The tabbing codeword controls tabbing, taking the form #n, where n is the number of the column where the next character is to be output. For example:

#NAME#24#CATR

output NAME, then output Catalogue Reference starting in column 24

The blanks in the output character string will be padded with spaces. For example:

ABC#10DEF
would appear on a drawing as

ABCvvvvvvDEF
(where v is used here to denote a space). The string

#NAME#15#CATR#25#CREF
would expand (typically) to

/PUMP1/NSvvvvv/NFJJvvvvv/PIPE1-1
If the number specified is already exceeded by the length of the output character string then a single space will be inserted. For example:

#NAME#5#CATR#10#CREF
would expand to

/PUMP1/NSv/NFJJv/PIPE1-1

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

Tabbing will take account of linefeeds within the text string, whether specified explicitly or by the new line generator code #/. Hence

#5#NAME#/#8#CATR#/#8#CREF
would expand to

vvvv/PUMP1/NS vvvvvvv/NFJJ vvvvvvv/PIPE1-1

The use of this feature in combination with a fixed-width font (e.g. style 6 or 7) allows you to arrange text neatly in a tabular form. Used in combination with Autotagging and the PDMS Programmable Macro Language (PML), it is possible to generate schedules on drawings easily. See Schedule Generation.

14.8.3

New Line Generator

The codeword #/ generates a new line.

14.8.4

# Character
The codeword ##outputs a single # character.

14.8.5

Underlining

#< #>

start underline finish underline

When a GLAB text string has been underlined, GBOX should be set to zero in order for the leaderline to meet the underline.

14.8.6

Emboldening and Italicising

%B %b %I %i

use the Bold style of the current font turn off the Bold style of the current font use the Italic style of the current font turn off the Italic style of the current font

The codes above apply only to intelligent text rendered using a TrueType font. They are not treated as codewords when the PDMS font is in use. If one of the above codes is used, when the corresponding style is already set as requested by the codeword, it is not treated as a codeword. Note: The TrueType font assigned to the element can be set upfront as Bold or Italic without having to use the above codes in the string, when selecting a True Type font from the selection form:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.9

Substrings
There are two methods of specifying that a substring of the data associated with a code word is required for output.

14.9.1

String Definition by Characters

Substrings can be extracted from text by following the code word with a substring descriptor of the form:

(Cn1:n2)
where C indicates that n1 and n2 refer to character positions and n1 and n2 are integers that indicate the leftmost and rightmost character positions of the substring respectively; if n1 is omitted then 1 is assumed by default, and if n2 is omitted then the last character of the string is assumed. For example:

If #PIPE expands to /ZONE-4/PIPE-6 then #PIPE(C2:6) expands to ZONE-

By default all PDMS names will be output with the initial slash. If you do

#PIPE(C2:) expands to ZONE-4/PIPE-6

14.9.2

Substring Definition by Parts

You can define a substring by reference to the constituent parts of the original string. A part of a string is defined by delimiters, which are user-definable. The substring required is specified by following the code word with a substring descriptor of the form:

(P-n1:n2)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

Here P indicates that n1 and n2 refer to delimiter numbers and - indicates the character used as the delimiter. If omitted, / is assumed. The delimiter must not be numeric. n1 and n2 are integers that indicate respectively the delimiter numbers at which the substring is to start and finish; the delimiter before n1 is always included in the output substring but the delimiter after n2 is always excluded. If n1 is omitted then the substring will start at the beginning of the parent string, and if n2 is omitted then the substring will end at the end of the parent string. The start and end of the parent string are always assumed to be delimiters. For example: If #PIPE expands to the parent string /ZONE-4/PIPE-6 then

#PIPE(P/2:) expands to /PIPE-6 and #PIPE(P-:2) expands to /ZONE-4/PIPE

EIt is possible to append a number of substring definitions (both character type and part type) to a code word. These are processed sequentially, left to right. Any number of substring definitions is allowed. For example:

#PIPE(P2:)(C2:) expands to PIPE-6

There is a special form of the substring descriptor,

()
This is shorthand for (C1:) This form can be used for putting codewords back to back in a text string where the other codeword delimiters are not suitable, for example, when a space is not required between codeword data. For example:

#POS #NAME #POS()#NAME

would, when expanded, have a space between the two data items: would not.

14.10 Array Indexing

The format used for the array indices is:

[n]

or

[ n,m]

where n and m are integers and m is greater than n. The first format generates a single array element; the second generates a range of array elements. For example:

#CRFA[2] #:ARRAY[4,6]
Embedded spaces are allowed within an array index but are not mandatory. In the second format, one of the integers may be omitted. Omission of the first integer implies n=1, and omission of the second implies m=K, where K is the significant length of the array. Array indices may be used (where appropriate) with both basic codewords and UDA names. Array indices cannot be used with text, position, displacement or direction attributes. Components of position attributes (Eastings, Northings and Uppings) should be extracted using the special codewords for that purpose (e.g. #POSU). The length of an array attribute can be extracted and applied to a sheet using:

codeword[SIZE]

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

SIZE may be abbreviated down to S and may be lower-case. The [SIZE] suffix may be used with any hash code-word for which array indices are valid.

14.11 Transforming Position/Direction Data

If qualified by a transform keyword, position and direction attributes will be reported in the coordinate system of the specified element. The qualifier may be used with any position or direction codeword, including those for p-points, P-lines and Structural derived attributes. The qualifier uses the keyword WRT (with respect to) to denote the coordinate system to be used. Lower case as wrt is also allowed; minimum abbreviation is W (or w). WRT must be followed by a single parameter to define the coordinate system required. This parameter may be a word or name that specifies a Design element. If a name is used, it must not contain the comma (,) or closed angle-bracket (>) characters. For example:

#P1POS<WRT /1201A>
This will output the position of p-point 1 of the DDNM element with respect to element / 1201A. The word parameter may either define an element type or a reference attribute, for example:

#POS<WRT ZONE> #POSU<WRT OWNE>

If an element type is specified, it must refer to an owner of the Design element specified in the DDNM attribute. This may be the immediate owner or an element in the database hierarchy above the DDNM element. If a reference attribute is specified, it should refer to a reference attribute of the DDNM element, for example OWNE or CREF. The reference attribute may also be a UDA

<WRT OWNE> <WRT HREF> <WRT :uda>

Individual components of reference array attributes may also be used:

<WRT CRFA[3]> <WRT :UDARR[2]>

The default coordinate system is the Design World - i.e. the implied syntax is:

<WRT WORL>
The qualifier CE must be used to refer to the coordinate system of the current element. For example, to report the position of P3 of a Box with respect to the Box origin:

#P3POS<WRT CE>
Only position, direction, displacement and orientation codewords may have transform qualifiers. This includes some P-line and p-point attributes. When outputting a qualified position in +/- format, the + must appear before the qualifier, for example:

#P1POSU+<WRT /DATUM>

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.12 Extracting Attribute Data from any Specified Element

Attribute data may be extracted from any element rather than the element defined by the DDNM attribute. This element may be specified by name, element type or reference attribute. The keyword for this navigation qualifier is FROM (or from), which may be abbreviated to F (or f). This keyword may be followed by one or more parameters separated by spaces: <FROM parameter> <FROM parameter parameter parameter> The format for each parameter is the same as that for the transform qualifier (WRT), i.e. element name, element type or reference attribute. For example:

#POS<FROM /VESS1> #POSE<FROM SITE> #DTXR<FROM TUBE> #HBOR<FROM CREF> #SPRE<FROM :fred> #PARA[3]<FROM SPRE CATR>

Outputs the position of /VESS1 (in World coordinates) Outputs the Easting of the Site above the DDNMelement Outputs detailing RTEXT for the implied Tube associated with the DDNM element. Outputs the HBOR of the Branch referred to by the CREF of the DDNM element Outputs the SPRE of the element referred to by the :fred attribute of the DDNM Outputs value of third array element of relevant PARA attribute from referenced catalogue Component. attribute from referenced catalogue Component.

#PARA[3]<FROM /VCHJJ> Outputs value of third array element of relevant PARA #DUTY<FROM CRFA[2]>
Outputs the DUTY of the Branch referred to by CRFA[2]

The first three examples refer explicitly to elements by name or type. The next three contain reference attributes of the current element, the referenced element being accessed. The last is a reference array attribute and must be followed by an array index. More than one navigation parameter may be used to enable compound navigation to acces

<FROM CRFA[2] OWNE>

means data from the owner of the element referred to by CRFA[2].

#MTXZ<FROM /VALVE1 TUBE>

The order of parameters is important:

Outputs the ZTEXT relevant to the implied tubing of /VALVE1.

<FROM CREF OWNE> <FROM OWNE CREF>

These two FROM keyword formats do not have the same meaning. The first means the owner of the element specified by the CREF attribute and the second means the element specified by the CREF attribute of the owner. Up to five parameters may be used. A complicated case might be:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

<FROM OWNE CREF OWNE :UDARR[3]>

This means that data is to be extracted from the third element referred to in the UDA reference attribute :UDARR of the owner of the CREF element of the owner of the current Design element. The starting point for navigation is the current element. This is normally the current Design element, as referred to by the DDNM attribute of the annotation element. However where the codeword obviously refers to annotation data (for example #AUTH, #TITL refer to AUTH and TITL attributes in the DRAFT database), navigation is from the annotation element. It is possible to apply both navigation and transform qualifiers. For example:

#POS<FROM OWNE, WRT /DATUM>

Note that the navigation qualifier is always applied before the transform qualifier, whatever the order of syntax. For example:

#POS<FROM /EQUIP, WRT ZONE>

Here, the position of /EQUIP will be output in the coordinate system of the ZONE which owns /EQUIP, rather than the Zone of the DDNM element. If the navigation qualifier is omitted, the appropriate current element is usually used for data extraction. However certain codewords extract data from a specific element type rather than from the current element. An example of this is #PRFL. Data is extracted from the PRFL attribute of the SUBS element which owns the current element. Standard Codewords such as #BRAN and #DRWG are equivalent to #NAME<FROM BRAN> etc. Pseudo- reference attributes can be used within codeword navigation qualifiers. For example #XXXX<FR SPREF> will extract the data for attribute XXXX of the element referenced by attribute SPREF of the current Design element. (Note that SPREF is a pseudo-attribute of NOZZ as well as being a standard attribute for all Piping Components.)

14.13 Distance, Position and Bore Data Output

14.13.1 General
The format of distance, position and bore data generated by codewords is controlled by the UCOD attribute of the Layer element. All intelligent text codewords generate the same format for FINCH and FINCH US units (as set in the UCOD attribute of the Layer):

UCOD FINCH DIST UCOD FINCH US DIST UCOD INCH BORE UCOD CM DIST UCOD CM BORE

set distance units to PDMS style feet and inches, e.g. 55.13/16 set distance units to USA style feet and inches, e.g. 5-5 13/16 set bores in inches set distances in centimetres set bores in centimetres

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

FINCH (PDMS): 253.1/2 FINCH US: 25-3 1/2

The INCH option may be qualified to allow different formats for distance, position, and bore values generated by intelligent text codewords. These are:

INCH USA INCH PDMS INCH DECIMAL

output of the form: 1/2 or 1 1/2 or 24 output of the form: 0.1/2 or 1.1/2 or 24 output of the form: 0.5 or 1.5 or 24.0

If the qualifier is omitted then DECIMAL is assumed. A nominal/actual qualifier is available for bores. For example

UCOD FINCH PDMS BORES ACT UCOD FI US BO NOM

The setting is NOMINAL by default. The UCOD setting controls the bore sizes output to a drawing by DRAFTs intelligent text system. The two qualifiers have exactly the same effect as the general PDMS PRECI BORE NOM (or PRECI BORE ACT) commands. UCOD settings can be queried by using the pseudo-attributes: Q UCODD and Q UCODB

14.13.2 Mixed Units within Intelligent Text Strings

The units used in intelligent text strings are determined by the UCOD attribute of the owning LAYE. However, it is possible to insert a switch units code in the text string, which will cause all distances and bores which follow to be output in alternate units, as defined below. Layer Units UCOD INCH DECI UCOD INCH PDMS UCOD INCH US UCOD FINCH PDMS UCOD FINCH US UCOD MM UCOD CM UCOD METRE Alternate Units MM MM MM MM MM INCH DECI INCH DECI INCH DECI

The switch units code is %U so, for example, to generate a dimension in both Imperial and metric units, with the second value in brackets, the intelligent text string:

#DIM() %U(#DIM())
should be used. The units may be switched back to the standard units by a subsequent use of a %U code.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.13.3 Controlling the Precision of the Generated Output

The precision of both linear and angular data is controlled by the Precision Code (PCODE) attribute. PCODE is an attribute of the DEPT, REGI, DRWG, LIBY, SHLB, OVER and LAYE elements, with its value being cascaded down the database hierarchy. PCODE stores four values of precision for metric (decimal) values, Imperial decimal values, imperial fractional values, and angles. By default, these four values are 0 (dp), 1 (dp), 32nds and 1 (dp) respectively. (dp = decimal places.) The following are examples of setting PCODE:

PCODE LIN MM TO 2 DPLS PCODE LIN IN TO 2 DPLS PCODE LIN FRA TO 32 NDS PCODE ANG DEG PCODE ANG TO 2 DPLS

Set linear (metric) precision to two decimal places Set linear (Imperial) precision to two decimal places Set linear (Imperial, fractional) precision to 32nds Set angular precision to nearest whole number of degrees Set linear angular precision to two decimal places

Angles output in degrees, minutes or seconds will be in the standard format (i.e. using , or ). Angles output in the decimal format will have no symbols. If required a symbol can be accessed from DRAFTs alternative character set by using the code ~0. Data output in metre or centimetre format will be to the precision specified by the PCODE MM option. Thus if the MM precision is set to 1 dp, output will be set to 4 dp for metre output and 2 dp for centimetre output. Four pseudo-attributes exist to allow the querying of the individual parts of the PCODE attribute: Q PCODMms Q PCODInches Q PCODFractions Q PCODAngles query metric (mm) precision query Imperial (inch) precision query fraction precision query angle precision

14.14 Position Output Formats

Marine users do not use the ENU (East North Up) coordinate system. Instead they use the ship reference coordinate system or the XYZ format to describe the position of design model objects. The same coordinate system is used through a particular layer. To control the output formats of the positional codewords, attributes POSFOR (positional code word format) and GRSYS (grid system) are provided for the following PADD data elements: DEPT LIBY REGI SHLB DRWG OVER SHEE DRTMLB VIEW DRTMPL LAYE SHTMPL

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

These two attributes control the output format of the positional codewords that request the position of certain elements (e.g. #POS, #P2POS, #PKNA^POSS, #PKTOP^POSE).

14.14.1 POSFOR (Positional Code Word Format) Attribute

This attribute specifies the output format for the positional codewords used by elements owned by the layer (LAYE). The following values are defined for the attribute: Value 0 1 2 3 Test equivalent (query system) ENU XYZ SHIP NUM/BERS Description Default ENU output style (e.g. E 1000, S 2000) The XYZ output style (e.g. X=1000, Y=-2000) Ship reference coordinate format (e.g. X=FR20+200, Y=LP-5, Z=DECK02+1500) Numerical output style (e.g. 1000, -2000), as if the + suffix was present in the code word

If the project does not define the FR or LP positions along one or more of the axes, the request for a corresponding coordinate expressed in the Ship Reference System will return instead the coordinate expressed as a pure number in millimetres, as if the XYZ expansion had been requested (e.g. X=FR40, Y=LP4, Z=5000). The value of the attribute will cascade down from the DEPT or LIBY element to their child elements when they are created. If the + modifier follows the position code word (e.g. #POS+), it overrides the expansion format setting defined by the LAYE, requesting a purely numerical output (NUMBERS format). Other than using the + suffix, there is no other way to override the expansion format individually for a given code word. However, a separate LAYE with different settings can be created, and the element using intelligent text placed there. Example:

POSFOR SHIP
sets the output format for positional codewords to ship reference coordinate format.

14.14.2 GRSYS (Grid System) Attribute

This attribute specifies the grid system to use during a search for the nearest GRIDLN element, when generating the output from positional codewords used by elements whose POSFOR attribute has a value of 2 (Ship Reference System). If the POSFOR atttribute has a different value, the GRSYS attribute is ignored. If the search for the GRIDLN element fails (no suitable grid lines), the XYZ output is generated instead.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

The value of the attribute will cascade down from the DEPT or LIBY element to their child elements when they are created. Example:

GRSYS NULREF
tells DRAFT to use all available grid systems with the default orientation (0, 0, 0) and the purpose SHIP when searching for the nearest GRIDLN element

GRSYS /RO-RO
tells DRAFT to use the grid system /RO-RO exclusively when searching for the nearest GRIDLN element.

14.15 Customizing Error Text

When it is not possible to extract data from an attribute, the intelligent text system returns an error and (by default) substitutes the text --- for the missing data. The NTEXT attribute allows you to substitute your own null text. For example:

NTEXT No data
NTEXT may consist of up to 12 characters. It is an attribute of DEPT, REGI and DRWG. LIBY, SHLB, OVER and LAYE elements, and its setting will be cascaded down the hierarchy.

14.16 Intelligent Text Syntax - Summary

The combined format for a codeword string may be summarised as follows:

#wor d + ^ wor d + [n ,m ] + <qu a lifier s> + (Cn 1:n 2) (P /n 1:n 2) su bst r in g edit in g by pa r t s su bst r in g edit in g by ch a r a ct er s da t a qu a lifier a r r a y in dex su b-codewor d (a ft er #P K on ly) ba sic codewor d or UDA n a m e
(The + signs are not literal.) All components except the first are optional. The substring editing qualifiers may appear more than once in any order. Some combinations have no meaning. All qualifiers may contain embedded spaces; therefore the closing delimiters cannot be omitted. The combined format for the data qualifier list is: <FROM parameter [parameter], WRT parameter>

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

Examples of Codeword Strings

#POS<FROM OWNE, WRT SITE> #CRFA[2]<FROM /VFWA1> #HREF<FROM OWNE>(P/2:3) #PKNA^POSE<WRT FRMW> #PK^POSSE

position of owner in Site coordinates name of second element of CRFA attribute of /VFWA1 parts 2 and 3, delimited by '/', of the HREF of the owner end position of P-line NA in framework coordinates Easting of P-line start position in world coordinates. The P-line name has been omitted, meaning the P-line used to position annotation At a SCTN this means the POSE attribute, otherwise it means the Easting of the POS attribute owner of element 2 of CRFA attribute name of element specified in :udarr[2] of element specified in CREF array element 3 of UDA attribute :FRED of the owning Equipment. use the value of the BTEX attribute of text template / T24 detailing RTEXT from the implied rod of the current element outputs VIEW scale as a ratio, as specified by the VRATIO attribute.

#POSE #OWNE<FROM CRFA[2]> #NAME<FROM CREF :udarr[2]> #:FRED[3]<FROM EQUI> #T/T24 #DTXR<FROM ROD> #VRAT[1]<FR VIEW> to #VRAT[1]<FR VIEW>

14.17 Notes
In the codeword descriptions given in this section, the words owner or owning (enclosed in quotes) refer to the element of the type described equal to or above the referenced element in the database hierarchy - not necessarily the true owner. Where the word owner appears (unenclosed by quotes) then this means the true owner. General points: All text strings have a maximum length of 120 characters in unexpanded form, 180 characters in their expanded form. Lower case and upper case (but not mixed case) forms of all codewords are valid. When a piece of text generated from a # code word itself contains a # code (or a ~ code or % code, see Miscellaneous Text Facilities) then this code is not expanded unless the original piece of text comes from either a DRAFT or DESIGN database text attribute or a text user-defined attribute (UDA) from any database.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.18 Summary of Commands

14.18.1 Design World Hash Codes (examples)...

#NAME #EQUI #HPOSa #HREF #DSCO #PRES #TCON

#TREF #CATR #TPOSa #HDIR #INSC #LNTP

#TDIR #LBOR #BRAN #PRFL #STEX #HBOR

#OWNER #PIPE #HPOS #FUNC #LENG #TBOR

#SPREF #POS #CREF #PTSP #BORE #FLOW

#ABOR #POSa #TPOS #DUTY #TEMP #HCON

a = N, E or U
Pnxu, where n = integer 0-99 or L or A x = POS, DIR, BOR, BOP, TOP or CON u = blank, E, N or U (for x = POS, BOP, TOP only

e.g. P3BOR

#CRFA #LSRO #GRA #ANTY #NPOS #POSS #POSE #DERCUT

#JOIS #STSP #FIRE #DESC #NPOSE #POSSE #POSEE #DERLEN

#JOIE #MATR #ZDIS #FIXT #NPOSN #POSSN #POSEN #DRPS

#LSTU #ISPE #CUTB

#HSTU #INRE

#HSRO

#NPOSU #POSSU #POSEU #DRPSE #DRPSN #DRPSU

14.18.2 DRAFT Drawing World Hash Codes...

#DTITL #STITL #VTITL

Drawing title Sheet title VIEW title

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

#DRWG #DIMPOSa #AUTH #ADATE, #BDATE, #CDATE #APPR #APDT #RVSN #RVDT #RVAU

Drawing name 3D Dimension Point position, where a = N, E or U Author (of DRWG or SHEE) date of creation (of DRWG) approver date of approval revision date of revision revision author

14.18.3 Special Characters...

#Tname #/ ## #< #> #n +

template codeword new line single # start underline finish underline tabbing codeword. Next character to be output in column n. when appended to position codeword, gives position in +/- format instead of ENU. This is only available for position-generating codewords.

14.18.4 Hash Code Delimiters...

( , SPACE or RETURN)

14.18.5 Sub-Strings...

(Cn1:n2) (P/n1:n2) ()

Substring by characters Substring by parts remove gap between subsequent hash codes

14.18.6 Array Indexing...

#codeword[n] or #codeword[n,m] where n and m are integers and m is greater than n. The first format generates a single array element; the second generates a range of array elements.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

14.18.7 Transforming Position/Direction Data...

<WRT qualifier> where qualifier is a word or a name that specifies a Design element. The ship reference format (POSFOR SHIP) is handled in a special way. If the WRT qualifier indicates a particular grid system, the position will be determined with respect to its origin, taking into account also its orientation. If this qualifier is neither a grid system, nor a world, the XYZ output format is chosen instead.

14.18.8 Attribute Navigation...

<FROM parameter> <FROM parameter parameter parameter> The format for each parameter is the same as that for the transform qualifier (WRT), i.e. element name, element type or reference attribute.

14.18.9 Extraction of P-line Data...

#PK[p-line name][p-line sub-codeword] The available sub-codewords are:

^DIR ^POSS ^POSSE ^POSSN ^POSSU ^POSE ^POSEE ^POSEN ^POSEU ^PKDI ^PKDIE ^PKDIN ^PKDIU

p-line direction p-line start position Easting of p-line start position Northing of p-line start position Upping of p-line start position p-line end position Easting of p-line end position Northing of p-line end position Upping of p-line end position position of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute Easting of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute Northing of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute Upping of point along p-line defined by PKDI attribute

14.18.10 Querying...

Q EXBTEX

Query expanded form of BTEX attribute

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

Q EXPLTX Q EXDMTX

Query expanded form of PLTX attribute Query expanded form of DMTX attribute

14.18.11 Updating...

UPDATE option ANNO

update attributes holding hash codes options: DRAW, SHEE, VIEW, LAYE

14.18.12 Setting Units (at LAYE)...

UCODE FINCH US DIST UCODE FINCH DIST UCODE METRE DIST UCODE INCH BORE UCODE INCH USA UCODE INCH PDMS UCODE INCH DECIMAL UCODE MM BORE UCODE METRE BORE Q UCODD Q UCODB

set distance units in feet & inches, USA styl set distance units in feet & inches, PDMS style set distance units in metres set bores in inches

set inch output to appropriate format set bores in mm set bores in metres query distance units query bore units

14.18.13 Controlling the Precision of the Generated Output...

PCODE LINEAR MM TO integer DPLS PCODE LINEAR NCHES TO integer DPLS PCODE LINEAR FRACTIONS TO integer [THS | NDS] PCODE ANGLES TO integer [DPLS | DEGREES | MINUTES | SECONDS] Q PCODMms Q PCODInches

set linear (metric) precision to integer decimal places set linear (Imperial) precision to integer decimal places set linear (fractional, Imperial) precision to integer 32ths (or 32nds) set angular precision to integer decimal places (or degrees, or minutes, or seconds). query metric (mm) precision query Imperial (inch) precision

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Intelligent Text

Q PCODFractions Q PCODAngles

query fraction precision query angle precision

14.18.14 Setting Position Output Format

POSFOR ENU POSFOR XYZ POSFOR SHIP POSFOR NUMbers

set output format to ENU (default) set output format to XYZ set output format to ship reference coordinates set output format to numeric output style

14.18.15 Specifying the Grid System (for GRIDLIN search)

GRSYS NULREF

when searching for the nearest GRIDLN, consider all available grid systems with the default orientation (0, 0, 0) and purpose SHIP when searching for the nearest GRIDLN, consider exclusively the grid system given in the command. It is an error to pass a name or reference to something other than a GRIDSY element.

GRSYS name/reference

Note: The GRIDSY attribute is taken into account only if the POSFOR attribute has the value SHIP.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

14:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

15

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

Within DRAFT, text is used by Dimensions (dimension line and projection line text), Labels, and as part of the 2D-drafting facilities (TEXP elements). The text is set using the BTEX, DMTX or PLTX attribute of those elements, as appropriate. (See Special Labels and Text Label Templates for other uses of BTEX, also the ATEX, DMTX, PLTX and ETEX text attributes.) The AVEVA system now supports both PDMS (native) fonts, which are supplied with the AVEVA product, and standard Windows True Type fonts.

15.1

True Type Fonts

True Type fonts are only available if they are present on each workstation running AVEVA Plant and are registered in the projects SYSTEM database. The installation and configuration of True Type fonts is a system administration function.

15.2

PDMS Fonts
DRAFT makes use of the four PDMS font families. These can include user-defined fonts, which can be set up in ADMIN. (See the ADMIN Command Reference Manual for details.). There are three text font attributes - FONT, DFON, and PFON. These are used to define the appearance of the various text strings that can appear on Drawings. These font attributes can be set to 1, 2, 3, or 4 in which case the normal version of the relevant font family will be obtained. Variations on these normal versions can be obtained by setting the font attributes to a value obtained from the table below. Normal Upward 1 2 3 4 11 21 31 41 Forward 12 22 32 42 Reverse 13 23 33 43 Bold Upward 14 24 34 44 Forward 15 25 35 45 Reverse 16 26 36 46

For example, font 35 is variation 5 of font family 3. Variation 5 is always bold and forwardsloping. From the table it will be seen that fonts 11, 21, 31, and 41 are equivalent to 1, 2, 3, and 4. (For completeness the font attributes can also be set to 10, 20, 30, and 40 which are also equivalent to 1, 2, 3, and 4). Bold fonts are not provided for all font families. In such cases the selection of a bold option will result in the use of the appropriate normal font.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

15.3

Multiple Fonts within Text Strings

It is possible to switch from one font to another within a single text string, subject to a maximum of four fonts per string. This will allow sub-strings, individual words, or even parts of words to be emphasised. Note that the extension character set, which provides the special symbols, counts as a font. The string will start to be output using the principal font; this is the one specified by the relevant FONT, DFON, or PFON attribute. Font switching is controlled by a set of special characters embedded in the string. This set will be composed of an escape character (%) followed by either two numeric digits or one alpha character. These sets are best demonstrated by examples: %24 %46 %02 %30 %37 %51 %2 %P %T %C - switch to font 24 (i.e. variation 4 of font family 2 - switch to font 46 - switch to variation 2 of the current font family - switch to font family 3 maintaining the current variation - invalid, variation 7 is not defined (only variations 1 - 6) - invalid, font family 5 is not defined (only families 1 - 4) - invalid, two numeric digits are required - switch to principal font (i.e. that defined by the font attribute - switch back to previous font (i.e. toggle) - invalid, only %P, %p, %T, and %t are currently allowed

Font switching can be prevented and the escape character output by doubling it (i.e. %%). Invalid codes (e.g. %51) will be output literally. The font switching character sequence does not have to be preceded or followed by blank characters. For example ABC%04DEF%pGHI will be output as the 9-character string ABCDEFGHI with the two sub-strings ABC and GHI in the principal font, and the middle three characters (i.e. DEF) in variation 4 (i.e. upright bold) of the principal font. The special handling of the '0' digit (preserving the current font family or variation) applies to PDMS fonts only. Since the font numbers 05, 06, 07, 08, and 09 are reserved for TrueType fonts, the font switching sequences %05, %06, %07, %08, and %09 are interpreted literally, as the font switch to a TrueType font specified after the '%' character.

15.3.1

Alternative Character Set

DRAFT incorporates an alternative character set that provides useful symbols. An alternative character is specified by preceding one of a set of normal alphanumeric characters by the tilde (~) sign. For example, the steelwork I-beam symbol could be defined as a TEXP by setting the BTEX attribute as:

BTEX ~I
The tilde may be input as normal text by doubling it (i.e. ~~ produces a single tilde). Normal text, intelligent text and alternative characters may be input in any combination. See Figure 15:1.: Alternative Character Set for the full list of available symbols.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

Symbol

Code B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V

Meaning Footnote symbol Centreline symbol Diameter symbol

Symbol

Code W X Y Z

Meaning Omega Superscript `1' Superscript `2' Superscript `3' Degrees symbol or superscript 0

Steelwork Channel Steelwork Angle Steelwork H-Section Steelwork I-Section Steelwork T-Section Steelwork Double Angle Steelwork L-Section Mu Yen sign Steelwork hollow circular Section Plate symbol Copyright symbol Registered trademark symbol Steelwork hollow rectangular Section Trademark symbol

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 * + / < = > [

Line

Left arrow Hash Right arrow Much less than Much greater than Up arrow

Down arrow

] ^

Figure 15:1. Alternative Character Set

15.4

Editing Text
Editing a text attribute is achieved through use of the EDTEXT command, which gives a simple case-sensitive, string exchange facility operating on the attribute in question (see below).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

The EDTEXT command takes the general forms: EDT text_type numberstring_1 string_2 text_type is the text attribute in question, which can be any DRAFT text attribute, including the name attributes OSFN and BSFN. If text_type is not specified, BTEX is assumed. is the order of occurrence of string_1 within the target string. If this is omitted then the first occurrence, is assumed, if a value of 0 is specified then all occurrences of string_1 are processed (i.e. replaced by string_2).

number

Several editing instructions may be given in the same command line. The command EDT text_type APP string will append the given string to the specified text attribute. The different syntax options of the EDTEXT command are illustrated by the examples given below. Target string: The dog, the cat and the rabbit were in the garden EDT the that gives: (change first occurrence of the to that)

The dog, that cat and the rabbit were in the garden

EDT the rabbit Dolores gives: The dog, the cat and Dolores were in the garden (change second occurrence of the to that)

EDT 2 the that gives:

The dog, the cat and that rabbit were in the garden (change all occurrences of the to that)

EDT 0 the that gives:

The dog, that cat and that rabbit were in that garden

EDT dog horse at ow 3 the my gives: The horse, the cow and the rabbit were in my garden (no change, fox is not found) (attribute PLTX would be altered, if found) (OSFN would be altered, if found) (DATE would be altered, if found)

EDT fox fish EDT PLTX 3 we a EDT OSFN A3 A4 EDT DATE 1990 1991

Note: When editing intelligent text the intelligent text code itself must be specified, not the resultant text.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

15.5

Querying Fonts
You can display information about all the fonts configured on the system using the command: Q FONTS This may provide, for example the following information:

Fontdirectory /%PDMSEXE% Fontfamily Fontfamily Fontfamily Fontfamily TrueType fonts: Font no. 6 face Font no. 5 face
The commands Q FONTS PDMS Q FONTS TRUETYPE will show either PDMS or TrueType fonts only.

1 IR 2 IR 3 IR 4 IR

6 Style 6 Style 4 Style 6 Style

1 Angle 2 Angle 3 Angle 6 Angle

17 17 17 17

Times New Roman Arial (Arial)

(Times)

15.6

Assigning Fonts
The attributes FONT, DFON, and PFON identify the font to be used for displaying textual information in a drawing. They can be assigned the font number directly, as in the following examples:

FONT 1
or

PFON 5 DFON 19
In the above example, the FONT attribute is assigned a PDMS font no. 1, whereas PFON and DFON identify TrueType fonts (see the ADMIN User Guide). For TrueType fonts it is possible to preset the fonts as Bold and/or Italic. Therefore:

PFON 1005 PFON 2005 PFON 3005

Bold version of the TrueType font no. 5 Italic version of the TrueType font no. 5 Bold and Italic version of the TrueType font no. 5

Note that for PDMS fonts the font itself determines its style (Bold, Italic, etc.).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

For TrueType fonts it is also possible to specify the font by name:

FONT FONT FONT FONT

'BOM 'BOM 'BOM 'BOM

font' font Bold' font Italic' font Bold Italic'

The above commands select the TrueType font, whose description is 'BOM font', either in its basic style, or with the Bold or Italic attributes correspondingly. Note that the words 'Bold' and 'Italic' must be spelled as shown above to be recognised.

FONT FONT FONT FONT

FACE FACE FACE FACE

'Times 'Times 'Times 'Times

New New New New

Roman' Roman Bold' Roman Italic' Roman Bold Italic'

The addition of the FACE keyword instructs the system to search for the font face name instead of its description. This new syntax is compatible with the querying syntax:

Q FONTNAME Q PFONTNAME Q DFONTNAME

which return the string containing the description of the font followed by the possible 'Bold' and 'Italic' style descriptions. Note that if the font description is empty, its face name is used instead.

15.7

Character Height
DRAFT measures character height from the character base line to the top of the character body. See Figure 15:2.: Character Height.

Top of body Ca pit a ls lin e

Ba se lin e Bot t om of body

= LHEI (Label Text) DTLH (Dimension Line Text) PTLH (Projection Line Text) CHEI (Label Text) DTCH (Dim Line Text) PTCH (Proj Line Text

Let t er H eigh t

Ch a r a ct er H eigh t

Figure 15:2. Character Height

The gap between the capitals line and the top of the character body is 20% of the character height, so the letter height = 0.8* character height. The gap for descenders between the base line and the bottom of body is one third of the character height. (These proportions do not apply to the SCRIPT font.) Letter Height

Character Height

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Miscellaneous Text Facilities

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

15:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

16
16.1

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

Basic Annotation
Structural elements, like other Design elements, may be labelled, dimensioned and used in 2D drafting. This means that positions and directions in the Design World must be obtained for these elements. Annotation elements which (may) require a 3D position include labels (GLAB, SLAB); View Notes (VNOT), drafting primitives whose drafting point references (PTRF or PTFA) use a PPPT (drafting point with design data); Angular Dimension elements (ADIM) and two types of dimension points: DPPT and DPBA. Dimension points of type DPBA do not require p-line data since they are concerned with the limits of a Design element. Annotation elements that require a 3D direction include Linear dimension elements (LDIM) and Dimension Points of type APPT. In addition, where the direction of a p-line is used for position on a Label or View Note, it may also be used to define the angle of the Label or View Note to the horizontal in the view region. Fittings, Nodes and Joints with p-points are treated in the same way as other elements. There is no change in the functionality for annotating these.

16.2

3D Position from a P-line

Wherever a Design element or p-point may be used for position, a p-line may also be used. However, a p-line is a line in a given direction between two points, and does not define a single position. In order to use p-line for position, it is necessary to specify a distance along that p-line. This may be done using syntax based on that in DESIGN, as follows: PPLINe word OF element_identifier STart PPLINe word OF element_identifier ENd The start and end of a p-line are the points at which the p-line crosses the two end-cutting planes of a Section. These are proportional distances 0.0 and 1.0 respectively. The start and end of the neutral axis are coincident with the points defined by the POSS and POSE attributes of the Section. PPLINe word OF element_identifier units_value This syntax defines an absolute distance from the start of the p-line. PPLINe word OF element_identifier PROPortion value This syntax defines a proportional distance along the p-line from its start. PPLINe word OF element_identifier

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

When no p-line position is stated explicitly the default value for proportional distance is used. This default may be altered by using the PKDI SETD command (see P-line Distance). The initial value is 0.5, meaning the mid-point of the p-line.

16.3

3D Direction from a P-line

Wherever a Design element or p-point is used for a direction, a p-line may also be used. The p-line itself may be used for direction, or an axis of the p-line may be used. The syntax for p-line direction is based on that in DESIGN, as follows: PPLINe word OF element_identifier This defines the direction along the p-line in the Design. This syntax must be used if you wish to store the p-line in the annotation element. PPLINe word OF element_identifier NEGative This syntax specifies the negative or reverse direction along the p-line in the Design. This is equivalent to specifying the p-line -Y direction. A direction parallel to an axis of the p-line itself may also be selected: PPLINe word [OF element_identifier] [+] plxyz PPLINe word [OF element_identifier] - plxyz where plxyz is any one of: X [DIRection] Y [DIRection] Z [DIRection] LEAve [DIRection] The axis of the p-line along the length of the Section is its Y direction. The Z or Leave direction and the X direction both lie in the plane of the perpendicular cross-section of the Section. The reverse of these directions may be obtained by the use of the minus sign. Syntax for p-line direction qualified by <plxyz> cannot be used to set p-line attributes in the annotation. DIRECTION syntax of this form will be used to set the DIR attribute rather than p-line attributes. The following commands are examples of this: NEW LDIM DIRection PPLINe word OF element_identifier LEAVE [DIRection] NEW ADIM ON ... FROM DIRection PPLINe word OF element_identifier -Z [DIRection] TO DIRection PPLINe word OF element_identifier NEGative However, the following command would actually store p-line data in the annotation element: TO DIRection PPLINe word OF element_identifier In this case the p-line direction has not been qualified by specifying an axis. Therefore the axis along the length of the Section is what is required and will be stored directly in the database as such.

16.4

Angle from a P-line

The p-line direction as defined above may be used to set an angle. This is true of any element with an ADEG attribute, such as a drafting primitive.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

However, for Labels (GLAB, SLAB) and View Notes (VNOT), there is an additional possibility. If the p-line is used for position, then the same p-line may also be used instead of the ADEG attribute to store angle. The syntax for p-line angle is as follows. This is normally used to set the ADEG attribute: ANGle PPLINe word OF element_identifier [+] plxyz ANGle PPLINe word OF element_identifier - plxyz ADEGrees PPLINe word OF element_identifier [+] plxyz If p-line is required for angle on a Label or View Note, there is a simple way of setting it. This is done using the following syntax: ANGle PKEY or ADEGrees PKEY This command first checks that a p-line is in use for position, and uses it to define the angle of the Label or View Note. The ANGle PPLINe syntax may also be used to store p-line for angle in the database. However this will only be done if both of the following criteria are satisfied: The p-line identified must be that used for p-line position The p-line direction syntax must not be qualified by a p-line axis

16.5

P-line Attributes
The syntax for position, direction and angle described above is stored in the database using the following attributes: DDNM for the Design element name PKEY for p-line name PKDI for proportional distance along a p-line under special circumstances, PPDI will be used to specify p-line for angle.

These attributes and associated syntax are described further below.

16.5.1

P-line Design Element

The name of the Design element to which the p-line applies is stored in the DDNM attribute of the annotation element. When a p-line is in use, the p-point attributes (NPPT or PPDI) are normally unset (value -1). The exception to this is where p-line is used for angle. This case is described further in the section on p-line angle (see below). If p-line data for an annotation element is replaced by a direct reference to a Design element or p-point, then the p-line attributes (PKEY and PKDI) are set back to the default values.

16.5.2

P-line Name
The p-line name is identified by the PKEY attribute of the annotation element. Where no pline name is specified, the value 0 is taken to mean the neutral axis of the specified Design element. This may be NA, NAXI or ZAXI as set up in the Catalogue data. The value 0 is the default value for the PKEY attribute. The PKEY attribute may be set directly using the following syntax: PKEY word The word given should refer to an existing p-line of the Design element, if that is set.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

PKEY PPLINe word OF element_identifier The specified p-line must exist. The specified element should be that given in the DDNM, if set.

16.5.3

P-line Distance
P-line distance is stored in the PKDI attribute of the appropriate annotation elements (GLAB, SLAB, VNOT, ADIM, DPPT and PPPT). This stores the proportional distance along the pline from its start. The default value for this attribute may be altered by the user. Its initial value is 0.5, meaning the midpoint of the p-line. The PKDI attribute may be set directly using the syntax: PKDIstance STart PKDIstance ENd These commands set the values 0.0 and 1.0 respectively. PKDIstance [PROPortion] value This value may also be obtained by cursor using the PKEY and DDNM attributes of the current element (if suitable): PKDIstance @ The point input is converted to a proportional distance. PKDIstance DEFault This command resets the PKDI attribute to the default value. The default value may be altered using the syntax: SETDefault PKDIstance value The current value of the PKDI default setting may be queried: Query SETDefault PKDIstance

16.5.4

P-line Direction
No additional attributes are required to define this. The p-line is defined by the PKEY and DDNM attributes. The p-line direction is along the length of the p-line. P-line direction is used on LDIM and APPT elements.

16.5.5

P-line Position
P-line position is defined by the p-line attributes PKEY and DDNM, with the addition of the distance attribute PKDI to define a position on that p-line. P-line position is used on the following elements: GLAB, SLAB, VNOT, ADIM, DPPT and PPPT.

16.5.6

P-line Angle
A p-line may be used for angle on the following elements: GLAB, SLAB and VNOT. It is defined by the p-line attributes (PKEY and DDNM) together with a special value of the PPDI attribute. The value

PPDI -2

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

means that the p-line used to position the annotation is also used for angle.

16.6

Representation of SCTN Ends

Note: The functionality described in this section will be removed at a future release of DRAFT. The DRGP (Drawing Priority) SCTN attribute is used by DRAFT to determine how to draw SCTN ends in hidden-lines-removed views. DRGP may be set (in the Design Database) to any integer value between 0 (highest priority) and 50. The effect is demonstrated in the diagrams below, which show plan views of four SCTNs meeting at a node point. The top flanges of the SCTNs are coplanar and none of the SCTN ends have been cut back. In Figure 16:1.: Effect of SCTN DRGP Attribute (a) the DRGP attributes of all four SCTNs have been left at 0; as a result DRAFT is unable to determine how to draw the intersection lines between the SCTNs and so draws the full outlines of all SCTNs. In Figure 16:1.: Effect of SCTN DRGP Attribute (b) the DRGP attributes of the four SCTNs have been set as indicated, which confers a priority order on them. As a result, DRAFT is able to determine the representation that is intended.

DRGP=2

DRGP=0

DRGP=1 DRGP=0

(a) Figure 16:1. Effect of SCTN DRGP Attribute

(b)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Annotating Structural Elements in DRAFT

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

16:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Underlays and Overlays

17
17.1

Underlays and Overlays

Introduction
DRAFT gives you the ability to use underlays and overlays on a Sheet. These may take the form of plotfiles held in the system database, or may be DRAFT database elements. They can be used as backing sheets for a title block and border, or as overlay sheets for placing such items as keyplans or standard notation. A backing sheet has its origin coincident with, and must be the same size as, the Sheet being underlayed. An overlay sheet can be placed anywhere on the Sheet, and can be of any size. Any number of Overlay Sheets may be used on the one SHEE, but it is only possible to have one backing sheet on a SHEE.

17.2

Using Plotfiles
The command syntax for underlaying and overlaying a plotfile is as follows: BSHEE FILE /plotfile name OSHEE FILE /plotfile name Sets Sheets BSFN attribute Sets Overlays OSFN attribute, see next section

To remove an underlay or overlay from a Sheet, the following commands can be used: BSHEE UNSET OSHEE UNSET Note that BSHEE is valid at LAYE or below, whereas OSHEE is only valid at OLAYs. An overlay is positioned on the current Sheet by changing the OPOS and OANG attributes of the Overlay element (see next section), which determine the position and angle respectively. For example:

OPOS @ OPOS X250 Y300

Set overlay origin using cursor Set overlay origin explicitly (relative to the Sheet origin

OPOS ENDP OF /LINE1 Set overlay origin to a constructed position OANG 30

Rotate the overlay 30 degrees anticlockwise about its origin

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

17:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Underlays and Overlays

Alternatively, file specification and positioning may be combined into a single OSHEE command, for example:

OSHEE FILE /OS1 ANGLE 90 @ OSHEE ANGLE 60 @ OSHEE @ OSHEE BY @

Define, position and orientate overlay sheet Reposition and reorientate currently defined overlay sheet Position Overlay absolutely Position relative to old position

These commands may also be used to position Overlay Sheet templates. Note that you can query the size of a plotfile using the command: Query PLOTFile name SIZE The response will be the size rectangle of the plot.

17.3

Database Elements for Underlays and Overlays

LIBY

DRWG BSRF

SHLB

SHEE BSRF OLAY

BACK

OVER

OSRF

NOTE

VIEW

NOTE

Figure 17:1. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Overlay/Underlay Elements

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

17:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Underlays and Overlays

Elements for use as backing and overlay sheets may be created in DRAFT and stored in the DRAFT database. The relevant part of the database hierarchy is shown DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Overlay/Underlay Elements. The SHLB (Sheet Library) exists as a member of a LIBY and is used as an administrative element to group together BACK (Backing Sheet template) and OVER (Overlay Sheet template elements. A BACK would probably be used as a frame sheet and would contain frame lines, authorisation boxes etc. These would exist as (member) NOTE elements created via DRAFTs geometric 2D drafting facilities. Any hash codewords defined by TEXP elements will be expanded when the BACK is referenced. These codewords will typically extract data from the DRAFT database. See Accessing Data from the DRAFT Database. OVER elements may also own NOTEs as well as VIEW elements, and would probably be used to overlay graphic details such as keyplans on drawing sheets. An OVER shares many of the attributes of a SHEE. Note that Point Construction (see Section 11) can be used to create BACK and SHEE elements. Most Overlay Sheet attributes are held by the Overlay (OLAY) element. BACKs and OVERs are referred to by the relevant drawing Sheets BSRF and the relevant Overlays OSRF attributes (respectively). (BSRF may also be set at Drawing level.) The BACK/OVER to be used may be specified by using commands such as:

BSHEE /BS1 OSHEE /OS1

Underlay specified backing sheet element Overlay specified overlay sheet element

The Overlays OSLV (overlay sheet view layers visible) attribute defines those Layers of the overlay sheet (i.e. the LAYE element(s) owned by the VIEW(s) owned by the OVER referenced by the drawing Sheet) that are to be visible. The Overlays XYSCALE attribute allows independent scaling in the X and Y directions of the instanced overlay sheet or plotfile. For example:

XYSCALE 2 1
Either or both values may be negative, but zero is not allowed. Note that when an Overlay Sheet is instanced (i.e. attribute OSRF is set), text is only affected by the scale in the Y direction. It is not possible to generate backwards or distorted text. However, when a plotfile is used (i.e. attribute OSFN is set), then there is no such safeguard and text could be distorted if differing X and Y scales are specified. See also Scaling and Mirroring Special Labels. Control of complex overlays may be achieved by using multiple OLAY elements. The Layers which are to be visible may be referred to either by Layer purpose (i.e. the PURP attribute) or by their member list position under the VIEW(s) owned by the OVER. Up to 12 Layers may be made visible at once. The Layers that are to be visible are specified by a further option of the OSHEET command. For example:

OSHEE LAYERS 1 LABS OSHEE ALL OSHEE ALL OFF

Make all Layers at list position 1 and all Layers with PURP LABS visible Make all Layers visible (default) Make all Layers invisible

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

17:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Underlays and Overlays

The Design graphics may be made visible by including Layer DESI. If the overlay sheet has more than one VIEW then the Layer visibility statement will apply across all VIEWs. (It is not possible to specify, for example, a Layer with PURP DIMS to be visible for /VIEW1 but not for /VIEW2, assuming both VIEWs own such Layers.) The setting of a Layers LVIS attribute has no bearing on the visibility questions discussed in this section. The above functionality is only available when an overlay sheet template reference is used. No distinction between Layers can be made when using overlay sheet graphics from a file.

17.4
17.4.1

Summary of Commands
Underlays...

BSHEE FILE /plotfile name BSHEE UNSET UPDATE BSHEETS

underlay a specified plotfile on the current SHEE. Must be at SHEE level or below. Sets SHEE BSFN attribute delete SHEE underlay (valid at SHEET and above) Updates Backing Sheets. Will ensure that the latest version of the referenced BACK is used and will re-evaluate hash codewords.

17.4.2

Overlays...

OSHEE FILE /plotfile name OSHEE UNSET

overlay a specified plotfile on the current SHEE. Must be at OLAY level. Sets OLAYs OSFN attribute. delete OLAY overlay

17.4.3

Manipulating Overlays...

OPOS xpos ypos OPOS @ OANG value XYSCALE value value OSHEE FILE name ANGLE value @ OSHEE ANGLE value @ OSHEE @ OSHEE BY @

set overlay origin explicitly (relative to the Sheet origin) set overlay origin using cursor rotate the overlay anticlockwise about its origin rescale overlay sheet define, position and orient overlay sheet reposition and reorient currently defined overlay sheet position Overlay absolutely position relative to old position

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

17:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

18
18.1

2D Drafting
Introduction
DRAFTs 2D drafting facilities are designed to be complementary to its main drawing production facilities. 2D drafting allows you to add to drawings such features as notes, plane and boundary lines, keyplans, tables of symbols etc. In addition, backing sheets, overlay sheets and symbol templates may be created. 2D drafting shapes (or primitives) may be positioned explicitly, with a cursor hit or by a construction. Because the principle of point construction can be applied to all DRAFT primitives that have a position attribute, point construction is described in Point and Line Construction. 2D positions generated by a cursor hit will be snapped to a grid position if snapping is ON. See Snapping 2D Points to a Grid. Note: For 2D drafting purposes, it is possible to enter DRAFT having specified a multiple database (MDB) that does not contain a DESIGN database. Clearly, in this draftingonly mode, intelligent text that extracts data from a Design database cannot be used.

18.2

Where 2D Drafting is Used

The 2D drafting application can be used for creating: Backing and overlay Sheets. See Backing and Overlay Sheets. Symbol templates. See Symbol Templates. ISODRAFT symbol templates. See ISODRAFT Symbols.

18.2.1

Backing and Overlay Sheets

2D drafting may be used to create backing and overlay sheets, or may be used to annotate overlay sheets that exist as VIEW elements. The relevant part of the DRAFT database hierarchy is shown in Figure 18:1.: DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Sheet Library/2D Drafting Elements.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

SHLB

SHEE

NOTE

VIEW

BACK

OVER

LAYE

VNOT

VIEW

LAYE

NOTE

NOTE

VNOT

CIRC ELLI RECT TABL ETRI DMND HEXA MRKP STRA ARC OUTL

TEXP

SYMB

Figure 18:1. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Sheet Library/2D Drafting Elements

A BACK (backing sheet template) element would probably be used as a frame sheet and would contain frame lines, authorisation boxes etc. These would exist as (member) NOTE elements (see below). OVER (overlay sheet template) elements may also own NOTEs as well as VIEW elements, and would probably be used to overlay graphic details such as keyplans on drawing sheets. An OVER shares many of the attributes of a SHEE. Sheet Note (NOTE) elements exist to own the 2D drafting elements themselves (see The Drafting Elements). This means that NOTEs can be used to group drafting elements together - changes to the NOTEs position and orientation will affect all of its member drafting elements. As well as the basic attributes of XYPS (2D Sheet position), ADEG

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

(orientation) and LVIS (visibility), NOTEs/VNOTs have a set of attributes that are used to store defaults values that are cascaded down to their members. These are: NLSTYLE/NLCOLOUR FSTYLE/FCOLOUR MSTYLE/MCOLOUR TXCOLOUR JUST ALIG FONT CHEI CSPA/LSPA Note line style and colour Fill style and colour Marker style and colour Text colour Horizontal justification Vertical alignment Text font Character height Character spacing

The first three are cascaded to geometric primitives and the others to text primitives. View Note (VNOT) elements are similar to NOTEs, the only difference being that VNOTs may be positioned using 3D Design World coordinates or on a Design item, p-point or p-line (or using 2D Sheet coordinates). Having created a NOTE or VNOT in accordance with the hierarchy shown in Figure 18:1.: DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Sheet Library/2D Drafting Elements, drafting elements may be created and manipulated as desired - see The Drafting Elements.

18.2.2

Symbol Templates
User-defined symbols (consisting only of 2D drafting elements) may be created as Symbol Templates (SYTMs). These can then be picked from a Library sheet element, with position, size and orientation attributes being altered to suit. The relevant part of the DRAFT database hierarchy is shown overleaf. Symbol Library (SYLB) and Label Library (LALB) elements can be regarded as Sheets that can be displayed in an area view. Symbol Templates can then be created on the Library sheet using the 2D drafting elements. Setting the TMRF (Template Reference) attribute of a SYMB (Symbol Instance) element or SLAB (Special Label) will cause the referenced SYTM to appear on the relevant Sheet. The Symbol can then be positioned, sized and orientated to suit - see the description of scaling and mirroring SLAB elements in Scaling and Mirroring Special Labels for details of how to do this.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

SYLB

LAYE

SYTM

SLAB TMRF

NOTE LALB SYMB SYTM TMRF

CIRC ELLI RECT TABL ETRI DMND HEXA MRKP STRA ARC OUTL

TEXP

SYMB

Figure 18:2. DRAFT Database Hierarchy - Symbol Template and Related Elements

18.3

The Drafting Elements

The 2D drafting elements are primitives, Text Strings (TEXP) and Symbol Instances (SYMB). Primitives are basic geometric shapes (rectangle, circle, straight, arc etc). Text Strings may be up to 120 characters in length, may be multi-line and may incorporate intelligent text codes. Four fonts are available, and character height, spacing and alignment may be varied in the same way as for Label text. Symbol Instances (SYMB) are particular instances of Symbol Templates (SYTM). The SYTM defines the composition of the symbol; the SYMB defines its size, position, and orientation.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Symbol instances can be nested - the instanced SYTM may itself own SYMBs that reference other SYTMs. However, second-level and higher SYTMs must be owned by SYLBs, not LALBs. Any intelligent text codes in TEXPs owned by such SYTMs will not be expanded.

18.4

2D Drafting Primitives
These are basic geometric shapes that can be drawn on a Sheet or a VIEW Layer. The primitives exist in the hierarchy as members of NOTEs, VNOTEs or SYTMs. Primitives that exist as members of VNOTs may have their dimensions and positions defined in terms of 3D Design values There are eleven types of geometric primitive element corresponding to the shapes shown in Figure 18:3.: Drafting Primitives.

Figure 18:3. Drafting Primitives

Note: The denotes the shapes (default) origin and is not part of the shape itself. Note: The Outline (OUTL) primitive consists of a number of connected straight lines and circular arcs, as defined by the user. The shape shown above is an example only.)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

As a primitive element is created, its position is stored separately, with a reference to the position being stored as the primitives PTRF (or PTFA) attribute. An important feature of this system is that if a series of primitives is created, each primitives position reference (or drafting point) will (initially) be the same, enabling a series of connected shapes to be quickly and easily created. For example, the command sequence

NEW CIRCLE DIAM 100 AT @ NEW CIRCLE DIAM 150 NEW CIRCLE DIAM 200
would create a series of concentric circles. In a similar way, a series of connected straight lines could be created. (A line may have two position references, one at either end; the start position reference of one line would be set equal to the end position reference of the previous line - see description of STRA primitive below.) A set of primitives connected in this way may be moved as a group by using the DRAG command - see below. DRAFT offers you a variety of methods of defining, identifying, sizing, positioning, orienting, moving and querying drafting primitives. Many methods of carrying out these operations are common to all (or most) of the drafting primitives. These methods are described in the next section; methods that apply to particular primitives (and to Symbols) are described in Creating and Manipulating Drafting Primitives - Common Operations.

18.4.1

Creating and Manipulating Drafting Primitives - Common Operations

Note: See the Graphical Feedback later in this Section for details of the easiest way of creating drafting primitives.

Creating Primitives and Varying Basic Attributes

At NOTE (or VNOT) level, and with a Sheet (or VIEW Layer) in a SHOWn form, the simplest way of creating a circle (for example) would be by giving the commands:

NEW CIRCLE DEF @

The cursor would then be used to mark the centre and a circumference point of the circle, which would then be drawn. Hitting a key produces a command line giving the (Sheet) coordinates of the cursor position; such a command line could, of course, be typed in directly.) All the different shapes can be created in a similar way, with a self-explanatory prompt being output in each case. Note that macros driven from forms and menus are particularly useful for 2D drafting. Attributes common to all primitives (except Markers, Lines, Arcs and Outlines) are orientation (ADEG, relative to a line drawn through the shapes origin parallel to the x-axis) and origin code (OCOD). The origin code determines the position of a primitives origin relative to the primitive itself - for example, a circles origin may be placed at its centre or on its circumference. Arcs and Straight Lines have a TCOD (Type Code) attribute instead of OCOD. TCOD can be set to the endpoint or midpoint of a line, and to the endpoint or centre of an arc. The TCOD setting defines how to interpret the other attributes of the primitive. Straight lines also have an ADEG attribute. See below (STRA and ARC elements). Clearly, attributes such as orientation cannot be set using the cursor, so if these require settings other than their defaults they must be set afterwards. (Default orientation is 0 and default origin code is CENTRE. For straights and arcs the default TCODE is ENDPOINT.) Alternatively, primitives may be created using one-line commands such as:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

NEW CIRC RAD 50 ORIG CIRCUM ADEG 45 AT X900 Y750 NEW RECT XLEN 40 YLEN 20 ANG 45 ORIG CORNER AT @ NEW TABL XLEN 60 YLEN 60 NROW 10 NCOL 5 RPEN 2 CPEN 3 ORIG TS ADEG 45 AT @
The effects of varying the attributes of the different primitives are illustrated in Figure 18:4.: Drafting Primitives - Varying Attributes and Figure 18:5.: Drafting Primitives - Varying Attributes (continued).

Figure 18:4. Drafting Primitives - Varying Attributes

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Figure 18:5. Drafting Primitives - Varying Attributes (continued)

Shifting the Origin

The origin code may be set in two ways. If the ORIG keyword is used (for example, ORIG @ to set by cursor), the Sheet coordinates of the origin change such that the origin moves to the specified part of the primitive - the primitive itself does not move. The origin code may also be changed by the OCOD keyword, for example

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

OCOD CEN OCOD @

In this case the Sheet coordinates of the origin remain unchanged and the primitive moves so as to place itself correctly according to the new origin code. In either case the origin position may be changed at the same time by using commands such as

ORIG X300 Y250 OCOD TRIGHT @ OCOD BLEFT @

The origin is normally invisible, but may be made visible by the SKETCH command:

SKETCH ORIGIN SKETCH ORIGIN ALL

The command

At primitive level, displays primitive origin At NOTE level, displays origins of all member primitives

ERASE ORIG
erases the display of the origin(s).

Moving Individual Primitives

Primitives may be moved using commands such as

AT @ AT X300 Y250 POS ID @ POS W5500 N12345 D1200 ON ON ON ON ID @ IDP @ /PUMP1 P1 OF /PUMP2/NS

Move to new 2D position Move to new 3D position (VNOT members only) Move to specified element origin or p-point (VNOT members only)

BY @ BY X10.5 BY N500 W1200

Move relative to current 2D position Move relative to current 3D position (VNOT members only)

Moving Groups of Primitives

The DRAG command is used to move a group of primitives that share a common drafting point. The concentric circles described in the introduction to 2D Drafting Primitives are an example of a group of primitives that use the default drafting point - the drafting points position is not specified explicitly, so it is taken as at that of the last-created primitive. ORIGIN node_identifier or FPT node_identifier

Examples of the DRAG command (showing examples of node_identifier) are:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

DRAG BY @ DRAG BY X120 Y-45 DRAG BY S3500 D500 DRAG DRAG DRAG DRAG DRAG DRAG TO TO TO TO TO TO @ POS @ IDP @ X120 Y-45 S3500 D500 P1 OF /VESS2/N6

FPT DRAG TO @
(The above DRAG operations have similar interpretations to the AT/ON/BY/POS commands listed previously.)

Querying Primitives
The primitives with drafting points in common with the current element may be queried by giving the command Q COMMON This lists the primitives that will be dragged with the current element. The primitives that may be dragged with any named drafting node of a STRAIGHT or an ARC may be queried by Q node_id COMMON where node-id is the FPT or TPT (etc) of a STRAIGHT or ARC. The origin and position of a primitive may be queried by Q ORIG The offset of a drafting node or primitive origin from the note origin may be set and queried: Q node_id OFFSET Q OFFSET node_id OFFSET X value Y value ORIGIN OFFSET X value Y value where node_id is the node of a straight or arc primitive, i.e. FPT, TPT, MPT, THPT or CPT. (See list of DRAG commands above for examples of node_id.) The principal dimensional and positional attributes of a primitive may be listed by using the Q DESC command at the primitive concerned (or at the owning View Note (position and angle)). A drafting point on a STRAIGHT, ARC or span of an OUTLINE may be queried using Q IDNN @ This allows you to pick one of these points by picking an appropriate position on the primitive. The query reports the appropriate point, the identity of the primitive picked and the position of the picked point. For example:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

FPT OF /STRAIGHT3 X 123 Y 456 TPT OF /ARC1 E 3000 N 4000 U 0 VPT /VERT1 NEAR /VERT2 X 495 Y200
In the last case where a span of an OUTLINE was picked, the first vertex identified is the endpoint of the span, and the second is the Vertex (VRTX element) that owns the span. The two Vertex identifiers may be the same. For STRAIGHTS and ARCS, the point identified will be the same as that returned by the Q IDN @ command where the current element is a STRA or ARC. Q IDNN @ allows both the point and the primitive to be picked by one cursor hit. The database reference ID and the cursor-hit position of any linear element on the Sheet (for example a STRA, side of a RECT, part of Design item, etc) may be queried using: Q IDLINE @ The query returns the database of the picked element (DRAFT or DESIGN), the identity of the element, the pair of 2D coordinates that define the linear element, and the 2D position of the cursor hit. For example, if the query were applied to a STRA element with FPT X100 Y100 and TPT X200 Y200, the following could be returned:

DRA =151/4636 LINE X 100mm Y 100mm X 200mm Y 200mm QUAL X 167mm Y 166mm
If the query were applied to a part of a Design element, the following could be returned:

DES =35/222 LINE X 6.5/16 Y 7.19/32 X 5.3/32 Y 7.19/32 QUAL X 6.1/32 Y 7.19/32 Handling Common Drafting Primitives
When the DRAG command is used on a specified drafting primitive, this causes its drafting points to move. Other primitives that use the same drafting points will also change position. (Straights and Arcs may also change in shape.) These primitives are the common drafting primitives for specified primitive. In order to help predict the effect that a DRAG command will have, the common drafting primitives may be highlighted or queried. The basic syntax is as follows: HIGhlight [prim_id] COMmon Query COMmon- at a primitive where prim_id identifies a drafting primitive. If prim_id is omitted, the common primitives for the current element are highlighted/queried. The DRAG command may also be used on an individual node of a Straight or Arc. The common primitives of a node may be highlighted or queried, using the following syntax: HIGhlight prim_id COMmon prim_id Query node_id COMmon Query COMmon node_id At a primitive At a primitive

For a Straight these are FPT (from point), TPT (to point) or MPT (midpoint); and for an Arc these are FPT, TPT, CPT (centre point) or THPT (through point).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

The node must be currently used by the Straight or Arc. A Straight has a single node, MPT or two nodes, FPT and TPT. An Arc has an FPT, TPT and either a CPT or a THPT. If an unset node or an illegal node is specified, then an error is output.

Moving all Primitives in a NOTE or VNOT

Moving all of the member primitives of a NOTE or VNOT is done simply by changing the NOTE/VNOTs origin position (XYPO attribute). This is the offset of the origin from the origin of the NOTE/VNOTs owner (i.e. SHEE/VIEW respectively). The origin of a SHEE is at its bottom left-hand corner and that of a VIEW at the centre of the VIEW rectangle. XYPO may be changed directly or by the OFFSET command, for example

OFFSET X50 Y50

position NOTE VNOTs origin at given offset owners origin

AT @ AT X400 Y400
position NOTE/VNOTs origin at given position on SHEE

BY @ BY X60 Y-20
shift NOTE/VNOTs origin by given amount

ADEG 30
rotate NOTE to 30 from horizontal Note: If a VNOT is moved or rotated, only primitives positioned in 2D will move with it. The positions of primitives positioned in 3D or on Design elements will remain unchanged.

Rotating a Primitive
A primitive of type ARC, CIRC, STRA, ELLI, RECT, HEXA, TABL, DMND, ETRI, OUTL or MRKP can be rotated using the ROTATE command to specify an angle of rotation and a point to rotate about. Any position reference may be used to specify the rotation point. For example:

ROTATE 45 @
Use cursor to specify the 2D point to rotate it about

ROTATE 45 IDP@
Use cursor to specify the Design p-point to rotate about

Mirroring a Primitive
A primitive of type ARC, CIRC, STRA, ELLI, RECT, HEXA, TABL, DMND, ETRI, OUTL or MRKP can be mirrored using the MIRROR command to specify a mirror axis. The current element may be mirrored in an existing linear element or two independent points may be specified to define the mirror axis. In the latter case, any position reference may be used to specify the axis points. For example:

MIRROR IN @
Use cursor to specify existing linear element to mirror in

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

MIRROR ABOUT @ @
Use cursor to specify two points to define mirror axis

Copying a Primitive
Copying a primitive to another position or series of positions is done by using the REPEAT command with the primitive you wish to copy as current element. The REPEAT command has three syntax variations, illustrated by the following examples:

REPEAT 5 BY X20 Y20

Produce five copies of the current primitive, each displaced (X20, Y20) from the last

REPEAT 5 BY @
Produce five copies of the current primitive, using the cursor to define displacement

REPEAT 5 @
Produce five copies of the current primitive, but with first copy at cursor position, displacement of second and subsequent copies equal to that of first copy from original

REPEAT @
Produce five copies of the current primitive, but just one repetition Figure 18:6.: Drafting Primitives - Use of the REPEAT Command illustrates the use of the REPEAT command.
25 REPE 10 BY Y -25

Figure 18:6. Drafting Primitives - Use of the REPEAT Command

Graphical Feedback
Many cursor commands generate graphical feedback (rubber banding) which makes the interaction process easy - holding down the left-hand mouse button and moving the mouse enables the primitive being created to be dragged out to the required size/orientation. Use of the commands listed below gives the Point Construction Option form, from which you can choose to define point(s) not only as simple 2D cursor hits but also as line end-points, circle centre-points, intersection points etc. The relevant commands are:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Command REGN @ DEF @ ADEF @ DIAMETER @ SPAN @ RADIUS @ ASUB @ TPT @ FPT @ MPT @ CPT @ THPT @

Valid Elements VIEW All 2D drafting primitives ARC CIRC, HEXA VRTX CIRC, HEXA, ARC ARC STRA, ARC STRA, ARC STRA ARC ARC

18.4.2

Re-use of Drafting Points

In order for a DRAG command to drag a group of primitives that have the same initial position they must share a drafting point. The primitives that do so may be listed using the Q COMMON command or flashed by the HIGHLIGHT COMMON command. The use of a shared drafting point may be achieved in one of the following ways: When a drafting point is created without specifying its position it will be positioned using the default drafting point. This is normally the last point used. (This applies to the initial node for a Straight or an Arc.) For example the series of commands:

NEW CIRC RAD 50 AT @ NEW CIRC RAD 25 NEW ARC TCODE CENTRE RAD 75 ASUB 90
would create two concentric circles and a concentric arc. If the arc were moved using the DRAG command then the two circles would also move. When a primitive is positioned very close to an existing drafting point in the same NOTE, VNOT or SYTM then the point will be re-used to position the new primitive. The default tolerance for re-use of points is 1 mm on the Sheet, although some commands (e.g. BY) work to a tolerance of 0.001 mm. The tolerance used may be controlled by the TOLERANCE command, for example:

TOLERANCE 0.5 Set tolerance to .5 mm

TOLERANCE may be reset to its default value by the command

TOL DEF
Control over the TOLERANCE setting is particularly important for the re-input of DATAL macros. The re-use of drafting points within the TOLERANCE limit can lead to unsatisfactory performance when a NOTE contains a large number of points. This may happen, for example, when Symbol definitions or Backing Sheets are input from macros.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

The current TOLERANCE status and value may be queried by

Q TOL
The current tolerance will also be output to file by the RECREATE DISPLAY macro. If neither of these methods is appropriate, the current primitive must be explicitly positioned on the required drafting point. The drafting points used by a specified primitive may be identified by querying its PTRF attribute (PTFA attribute for a Straight or Arc) or by using the IDDP @ command. The current primitive may then be positioned on the required drafting point by commands such as: ORIGIN point_identifier, e.g. ORIG IDDP@ ORIGIN IDDP @ FPT point_identifier e.g. FPT IDP@ DRAG TO IDDP @ (The Q IDN @ command may be used to identify the FPT or TPT of a STRAIGHT.)

18.4.3

Visibility of Drafting Primitives

The derived visibility of a drafting primitive may be extracted into expressions. The attribute name is PRMVISIBILITY. This is TRUE if all owners of a primitive are visible. For a primitive or Vertex below a VNOT, this means that PRMVIS is TRUE if the VNOT, LAYER and VIEW are all visible (i.e. if their LVIS attributes are all TRUE). PRMVIS is true below a NOTE if the NOTE is visible, and PRMVIS is always true below SYTMs. For example

(ALL NOTE MEMBERS WITH PRMVIS TRUE)

18.4.4

Enhancing Drafting Primitives

Drafting primitives may be emphasised in a more permanent fashion than the flashing provided by the HIGHLIGHT command, see Section 6.6, Part 1, Basic Drawing Creation & Output. This is controlled by the ENHANCE command, which has the general form: ENHANce [SOLEly] selection_criterion selection_criterion ... For example:

ENHANCE ENHANCE ENHANCE ENHANCE

SOLELY CE SOLELY ALL CIRC FOR LAYER ALL STRA WI ( ATTRIB LENG GT 400 ) FOR /SHEET12 ALL WI ( NLPN GE 11 AND NLPN LE 20 ) FOR NOTE

If the SOLELY option is used then all existing enhancing will be removed, otherwise existing enhanced elements will be unaffected by this command. The FOR element_identifier command option is important; without it the selection system will scan around the entire MDB. Enhancing may be removed by the UNENHance command, which may optionally specify a selection criterion. The brief command

UNENHANCE
removes all enhancing and should always be used for that purpose.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

The command

UNENHANCE ALL
should NOT be used as it causes the entire MDB to be scanned. The list of currently enhanced elements may be queried by: Q ENHAnce [LIst] The colour in which elements are enhanced may be changed and reset by: SETENHAnce COLour integer SETENHA COL BRIGHTORANGE SETENHA COL DEFAULT (sets enhance colour back to default of aquamarine) Overlay (OLAY) elements can also be enhanced. Entering MDB mode causes all chosen elements to be unenhanced and the enhanced element list cleared out. When doing a SAVEWORK or a module change the enhancing will not be permanently written to the picture file. However after a SAVEWORK command the enhanced element list will still exist and the elements will remain enhanced on the screen. When creating plotfiles, enhancing will be ignored. Enhanced elements may also be HIGHLIGHTed.

18.4.5

Creating and Manipulating Drafting Primitives - Specific Operations

This section describes primitive-specific operations. If an operation is not specified then it is universal (i.e. applies to all primitives and as such is described in the previous section) or it is similar to the same operation as described for the CIRCLE primitive see CIRCLE (CIRC).

ARC (ARC)
Attributes PTFA NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR RADI ASUB TCOD Point references (3) Note line style Note line colour Radius Angle subtended Type code (defines how to interpret attributes). Either set to ENDPOINT or CENTRE.

Basic Creation Method An ARC can be defined in three ways: by defining the positions of the end-points and a through point (from which the values of Radius (RADI) and Angle Subtended (ASUB) can be derived if required). by defining the position of the centre point, from point and Angle Subtended (from which the position of the to points and the value of RADI can be derived if required). by defining the position of the centre point and two end points.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

The method: NEW ARC DEF @ results in three points being prompted for (the start, end and through points). A line is drawn through the points and TCOD is set to ENDPOINT. See Positioning (absolute) overleaf for the second method. If used with an existing ARC any existing values of RADI and ASUB are altered accordingly. Defining or redefining an Arc with a centre- and two endpoints is achieved using the command: ADEFine <dfnpt> <dfnpt> <dfnpt> where <dfnpt> defines a position (2D, 3D, p-point etc). The first two points are the centre - (CPT) and from point (FPT) of the Arc. These two points define the radius. The third point defines the angle subtended by the arc. The TOpoint (TPT) lies in this direction from the Centre (CPT) at the same distance as the FPT from the CPT. The TCOD attribute is set to CENTRE. This command may also be used with the cursor: ADEFine @ A prompt requests three 2D points to be input for CPT, FPT and angle subtended. 3D points may also be input using the cursor: ADEFine ID@ ID@ ID@ DEFine IDP@ IDP@ IDP@ Changing Radius and Angle Subtended RADIUS value [DESIGN] Sets RADI. For TCOD CENT this moves the from and to points radially (by the change in the value of the radius). Centre point position and ASUB are not altered. For TCOD ENDP this moves the through point and changes ASUB; the positions of from and to points are unchanged. RADIUS X value Y value RADIUS E value N value U value RADIUS IDP @ etc. For TCOD ENDP this is like THPT @. ASUBTENDED value [ANTICLOCKWISE] ASUBTENDED value CLOCKWISE Sets ASUB. (A positive angle is anticlockwise, a negative one clockwise.) For TCOD ENDP this repositions the through point (mid-way along the Arc) and changes RADI; from and to point positions are unaltered. For TCOD CENT this moves the to point of the arc. Centre and from points and radius are unchanged.

ASUBTENDED CLOCKWISE ASUBTENDED ANTICLOCKWISE

Sets the value of ASUB to be negative or positive, respectively. ASUBTENDED @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

For TCOD ENDP this is like THPT @; For TCOD CENT this alters the angle subtended and hence moves the to point of the Arc. The new position of the to point lies on the line joining the centre-point and the cursor position; centre and from points and radius are unaltered. Positioning (absolute) (of an arc point) The syntax is similar to that for FPTs of STRAs. Possible points are CPT (centre point), FPT (from point), TPT (to point) and THPT (through point).

CPT @ etc.
This changes the arc to be one with TCOD CENT (if not already so). The Centre is moved whilst keeping the from point and ASUB unaltered. The to-point and radius are recalculated.

THPT @ etc.
This changes the Arc to be one with TCOD ENDP (if not already so). The position of the through point is moved whilst keeping the from and to points fixed - i.e. both radius and angle subtended are altered.

FPT @ TPT @ etc.

For arcs with TCOD ENDP, the from or to point of the Arc (as appropriate) is moved whilst maintaining the positions of the other end point and the through point. For Arcs with TCOD CENTRE, the from or to point of the Arc (as appropriate) is moved whilst maintaining the position of the centre and the angle subtended. Thus the radius may change and the position of the other end point will be moved to preserve the angle subtended. Repeated Copying See Circles. Querying Similar to Straights, but referring to RADIUS, ASUBTENDED, CPT, FPT, TPT and THPT as appropriate. The Q IDN @ command may also be used Dragging another primitive to which the Arc is connected During the course of a DRAG operation on another primitive, the points of the Arc may move. The effect on the Arc is as follows. for arcs with TCOD ENDP, Radius and Angle subtended are changed. for Arcs with TCOD CENT, if the centre point is dragged, then the positions of the from and to points are also moved to preserve the Arcs appearance. For Arcs with TCOD CENT, if an end point is dragged, then a rotation about the other endpoint takes place, i.e. the centre point is moved and the radius changed.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

CIRCLE (CIRC)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG DIAM Point Reference for origin Note Line style Note Line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin Code (CENTRE, CIRCUMFERENCE) Angle in owner (useful for OCOD = CIRCU) Circle diameter

Basic Creation Method NEW CIRCLE DEF X value Y value X value Y value (manual method of NEW CIRCLE DEF @ command described in section 14.4.1. This method applies to all primitives described below, except where otherwise specified.) Note: If used with an existing Circle the DEF command always sets ADEG=0 and ORIG=CENTRE Identification ID CIRC @ This method applies to all primitives described below, for example ID ELLI @ (ellipse), ID RECT @ (rectangle) etc. Resizing DIAMETER value [DESIGN] RADIUS value [DESIGN] If DESIGN specified and if underneath a VIEW from which a scale can be obtained, a scaled circle will be drawn and the diameter stored in the database as a Design value. DIAM @ Sets DIAM equal to the distance between the two points, ADEG equal to the angle to this line from X axis; if ORIG is CIRCUMFERENCE, origin is positioned at the first hit. DIAM X value Y value X value Y value Manual method Redefining the Origin ORIGIN @ Prompts: Select a possible origin of the CIRC

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:19

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

ORIG CENTRE Sets ORIG as required and changes position of origin to point specified. The Circle itself does not move. ORIG CIRCUMFERENCE Positioning (absolute) ORIG X value Y value ORIG CENTRE @ ORIG CIRCUMFERENCE @ ORIG IDP @ ORIG POS @ ORIG ID @ ORIG IDDP @ The last option (ORIG IDDP @) places the primitive on the drafting point used by another primitive and hence ensures connectivity for the DRAG command. Moving about the origin OCOD CIRCUMFERENCE Moves origin to circumference of Circle. See Figure 18:7.: Moving about the Origin Use of the ORIG Command.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:20

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Figure 18:7. Moving about the Origin - Use of the ORIG Command

Rotating about the origin ADEGREE value Sets ADEG as specified, causing the circle to rotate about its origin. (If this is at the centre then no visible change is seen.) Querying In addition to the standard attribute queries the following are provided: Q DESC Queries the origin, position and diameter Q DIAM Queries the diameter in Annotation or Design coordinates as appropriate Q ORIG Queries the origin and its position

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:21

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Q OFFS Queries the position relative to the NOTE origin

DIAMOND (DMND)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG XLEN YLEN Resizing As for Ellipses. All other operations are as for Circles. Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin code (CENTRE, TSIDE, BSIDE, LSIDE, RSIDE) Angle in owner X axis length Y axis length

ELLIPSE (ELLI)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG XLEN YLEN Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin code (CENTRE, FOCUS TSIDE, BSIDE, LSIDE, RSIDE) Angle in owner X axis length Y axis length

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:22

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Resizing XLEN value [DESIGN] YLEN value [DESIGN] DESIGN option applies to VNOT members only

XLEN @ XLEN IDDP @ XLEN IDG @ XLEN IDP @ XLEN ID @ YLEN @ YLEN IDDP @ YLEN IDG @ YLEN IDP @ YLEN ID @ Redefining the Origin ORIGIN @

Changes the XLEN by distance along the X axis of the primitive from the origin. Note that this is not necessarily the Sheet or Note axis. If the origin is at the midpoint of the X axis (i.e.ORIG CENTRE) then XLEN will be twice this distance. If appropriate a Design distance will be used Changes the YLEN by distance along the Y axis of the primitive from the origin. Note that this is not necessarily the Sheet or Note axis. If the origin is at the midpoint of the Y axis (i.e.ORIG CENTRE) then YLEN will be twice this distance. If appropriate a Design distance will be used

Sets ORIG as required and changes position of origin to point specified. The ellipse itself does not move ORIG CENTRE ORIG RSIDE ORIG LSIDE ORIG TSIDE ORIG BSIDE All other operations are as for Circles.

EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE (ETRI)

Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG FRAD LENG Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin code (CENTRE, LSID, APEX, BRIGHT, BLEFT, RSIDE, BASE) Angle in owner Fillet radius Side length

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:23

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Resizing LENGTH value [DESIGN] Sets side length THROUGH @ THRU @ Prompts: Input a point on the current sheet Sets LENG so that the triangle passes through the point specified. This may not necessarily be a corner - ADEG will not be altered. THR X value Y value Manual method FRADIUS value [DESIGN] Sets FRAD to value specified. If this is too big for the existing value of LENG then a warning is output, the triangle is drawn sharp-cornered, but the FRAD attribute is set as specified and will be used when the LENG value is made large enough. Redefining the Origin ORIG @ prompts: Select a possible origin for the ETRI ORIG APEX ORIG BASE ORIG LSIDE ORIG RSIDE ORIG BLEFT ORIG BRIGHT All other operations are as for Circles.

HEXAGON (HEXA)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG DIAM Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin code (CENTRE, CIRCUMFERENCE) Angle in owner Diameter of the enclosing circle

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:24

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Redefining the Origin As for Circles. ORIG CIRCUM refers to a vertex of the Hexagon All other operations are as for Circles.

MARKER PRIMITIVE (MRKP)

Attributes PTRF MSTYLE MCOLOUR Point reference for origin Marker style Marker colour

All other operations on Markers are similar to those for Circles (where relevant).

OUTLINE (OUTL) and VERTEX (VRTX)

An Outline consists of a user-defined series of connected straight lines and circular arcs (collectively known as spans). OUTL elements do not have any geometry or positional data themselves, because they are of indeterminate complexity. This is provided by a list of owned Vertex (VRTX) elements. The origin of an OUTL is considered to be at the position of its first VRTX. As an alternative to straight lines and circular arcs, a smooth quadratic curve may be drawn through the vertex points of the OUTL (see CURFIT below). Attributes (OUTL) NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR MSTYLE MCOLOUR CURFIT Note line style Note line colour Fill style (used to hatch the area enclosed by the OUTL) Fill colour Marker style Marker colour Curve fitting control

Setting CURFIT to CUBICFIT will cause a smooth quadratic curve (which approximates a series of cubic curves) to be drawn through the vertex points of the OUTL. CURFIT DEFAULT turns off the curve-fit function.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:25

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

(VRTX) PTRF BULG NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR MSTYLE MCOLOUR CHAM FRAD Bulge Factor The BULG attribute is unique to the VRTX element, and is the ratio of the maximum departure of the arc from the chord joining two VRTXs to the chord half-length. It is positive when the span lies to the right of the chord when viewed in the direction VRTX1 to VRTX2, negative when it lies to the left. A straight span has a BULG of 0, a counter-clockwise semicircle a BULG of 1.0, and a clockwise semicircle a BULG of -1.0. BULG would not normally be set explicitly, but indirectly by the SPAN command (see below). Chamfering A chamfer may be applied between two VRTXs using CHAMFER value [value] The value(s) supplied in the above syntax must be greater than or equal to 0. If two values are supplied then the first chamfer distance will correspond to the chamfer joining the current VRTX to the previous one, and the second will correspond to the chamfer joining the current VRTX to the next. If only one chamfer distance is supplied, then both chamfer distances will be set equal. Setting the chamfer distance to 0 is equivalent to setting it to OFF. If the chamfer distance is set on a VRTX then the spans on either side of it will be drawn straight, i.e. the BULG attribute of the current and next VRTX will be ignored. CHAMFER OFF will remove the chamfer. Filleting A fillet may be applied to a VRTX using FRADIUS value Any value may be supplied in the above syntax. A positive value will correspond to a convex fillet radius at the VRTX, a negative value to a concave fillet. Setting FRAD to 0 is equivalent to setting it to OFF. If the fillet radius is set on a VRTX then the spans on either side of it will be drawn straight, i.e. the BULG attribute of the current and next VRTX will be ignored. VRTX Basic Creation Method The OUTL and VRTX elements may be created and deleted in the usual manner, e.g. NEW OUTLine NEW VRTX AT @ DELETE VRTX Point reference Bulge factor Note line style Not in colour Marker style Marker colour Chamfer distances Fillet radius (Can override settings at OUTL)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:26

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

The position of a VRTX and the shape of the span drawn to it from the previous VRTX are defined by the SPAN command. This command is valid at any VRTX except the first in list order. Variations of the SPAN command are: SPAN TO position Vertex point defined by <position> SPAN THROUGH position Span defined as a circular arc passing through position. Defines BULG. SPAN TO position THROUGH position SPAN THROUGH position TO position SPAN TO CLOSE Vertex point coincident with starting vertex. SPAN STRAIGHT TO position Straight line span with vertex at <position> SPAN RADIUS value Set radius of circle of which (arc) span forms a part. Converts straight line span to an arc. SPAN ASUB value Sets angle subtended by (arc) span. Converts straight line span to an arc. SPAN BY xypos Move the two VRTXS of the current span by the given displacements. SPAN DRAG BY xypos Move the two VRTXS and all connected drafting primitives of the current span by the given displacements. position can be a Design p-point, a 3D point or an explicit Sheet coordinate. A cursor hit can be used with all except the CLOSE, RADIUS, ASUB and STRAIGHT options. The position of a VRTX can also be constructed - see Point and Line Construction. If a VRTX is made coincident with the drafting point of another 2D primitive then a logical connection will be established and the DRAG command will affect the VRTX and the other 2D primitive. The TO option defines the position of the VRTX without affecting the bulge factor and is thus similar to the standard DEF command. The CLOSE option positions the current VRTX to be coincident with the first VRTX of the OUTL and thus closes the Outline. This does not have to be the last VRTX though - subsequent VRTXs can be created. The BY and DRAG BY options move the VRTXs at the start and finish of the span by the specified amount - bulge factor and curvature are unaffected. The THROUGH, RADIUS and ASUB options only define the bulge factor - knowledge of the through point, radius and angle subtended are lost. They do not change the position of VRTXs, only the curvature of the span. The RADIUS option can have a negative value - this will result in a negative BULG and hence a span drawn in a clockwise direction. If the radius specified is not large enough to define the curvature of the span between two VRTXs then the command will be ignored and Above two commands combined. Also SPAN @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:27

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

a warning message output, giving the minimum possible radius. By default the command gives the minor arc, the major arc being given by SPAN RADius value MAJor The command SPAN @ (or NEW VRTX SPAN @) gives a simplified way of defining the span. By default, you must define the TO position by a cursor hit, a straight-line span being assumed. The Outline Span Construction form will appear, giving you various span definition options. See the on-line help for details. Querying Q DESCription is valid at OUTLs and VRTXs, giving details of origin coordinates and span radius and angle subtended (if appropriate). Q SPAN RADius and Q SPAN ASUBtended are valid at VRTXs only (but not at the first VRTX in an OUTL). Miscellaneous Commands The Q COMmon, HIGhlight, SKEtch POInts, SKEtch ORIgins and ID @ commands are all valid at OUTLs and/or VRTXs. Note that SKETCH ORIG ALL does not sketch all VRTX origins - only the origins of the owning OUTLs - i.e. the first VRTX below each OUTL.

RECTANGLE (RECT)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR FSTYLE FCOLOUR OCOD ADEG XLEN YLEN FRAD Resizing XLEN value [DESIGN] YLEN value [DESIGN] SQUARE value [DESIGN] XLEN @ YLEN @ DESIGN option applies to VNOT members only Sets XLEN and YLEN to value specified. Uses relevant offset from origin of primitive to define XLEN or YLEN as required. Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Fill style Fill colour Origin code (CENTRE, LSID, TLEFT, TSIDE, BSIDE, RSIDE, TRIGHT, BLEFT, BRIGHT) Angle in owner X axis length Y axis length Fillet radius

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:28

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

XLEN X value Y value YLEN X value Y value THROUGH @ THRU @ THR X value Y value FRADIUS value [DESIGN]

Manual method Prompts: Input a point on the current Sheet Sets XLEN and YLEN so that a corner of the rectangle is positioned at the point specified. Manual method Sets FRAD to value specified. If this is too big for the existing XLEN or YLEN values then a warning is output and the rectangle is drawn square-cornered. FRAD will be set as specified and will be used when XLEN and YLEN are made large enough.

Redefining the Origin As for ELLIPSE, but also: ORIG TLEFT ORIG TRIGHT ORIG BLEFT ORIG BRIGHT Creating Rectangles and Squares Rectangles can be created using the commands: ADEFine dfnpt1 dfnpt2 Defines a rectangle where dfnpt1 defines a position (2D, 3D, p-point etc) which is the centre of the rectangle, and dfnpt2 defines the position of a corner. Defines a square where dfnpt1 defines the centre of the rectangle, and dfnpt2 defines the position of a corner. Defines a square where dfnpt1 and dfnpt2 define the positions of the corners

ASDEFine dfnpt1 dfnpt2 SDEFine dfnpt1 dfnpt2

For example:

ADEF X400 Y400 X500 Y450 SDEF X400 Y400 X500 Y450

Defines a RECT 200 by 100 with its centre at X400 Y400 and a corner at X500 Y450. Defines a RECT 100 square with one corner at X400 Y400 and the other at X500 Y500. X400 Y400 and a corner at X500 Y500.

ASDEF X400 Y400 X500 Y450 Defines a RECT 200 square with its centre at
These commands may also be used with the cursor, for example: ADEFine @ A prompt requests two 2D points to be input. All other operations are as for Circles.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:29

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

STRAIGHT (STRA)
Attributes PTFA NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR LENG ADEG TCOD Point references (2) Note line style Note line colour Length Angle in owner Type code (defines how to interpret attributes). Set either to ENDPOINT or MIDPOINT..

Basic Creation Methods A STRA can be defined in two ways: By defining the positions of the end-points (from which the values of length and angle can be derived if required). By defining the position of the mid-point and values of LENG and ADEG (from which the positions of the end-points can be derived if required).

The commands: NEW STRA DEF @ results in two points being prompted for; a line is drawn between the two points and TCOD is set to ENDPOINT. See the section on Positioning (absolute) below for the second method. The command: ODEF @ prompts for two points. The straight will be vertical or horizontal depending on the relative sizes of the horizontal and vertical offsets between the two points given. Changing Length or Slope LENGTH value [DESIGN] ADEG value LENGTH @ ALENGTH @ Moves the From point of the STRA, changing its LENG and ADEG attributes. Moves the To point of the STRA, changing its LENG and ADEG attributes. Changing LENG or ADEG for a two-point STRA will move the to point.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:30

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

Positioning (absolute) A STRA may have its from point, mid point or to point positioned or moved. Apart from the initial keyword (FPT, MPT, TPT) specifying which point you are setting the syntax is similar throughout, as the following examples show:: To position at a 2D (i.e. X,Y) position

FPT @ FPT X 50 Y -250

prompts: Enter a 2-d position

To position at a 3D (i.e. ENU position):

FPT POS @ FPT E12500 S5000 U0

To position on a p-point:

prompts: Input a point in a View

FPT FPT FPT FPT

ID @ IDP @ /PUMP2/N1 P1 OF /PUMP2/N1

prompts: Identify element prompts: Identify design p-point

If the MPT command is used, the TCOD will be set to MIDPOINT. This is a single point STRAIGHT and must have its LENGTH set. A straight can also be created by giving an orthogonal To point:

OPPT x 50 y 97 OTPT @
The straight will be vertical or horizontal depending on the relative sizes of the horizontal and vertical offsets between the From point and the To point. Points on a STRA (FPT, TPT etc) may be identified using the command: Q IDN @ Positioning (relative) It is possible to move a STRA or one of its points by a given amount. For a single point STRA (i.e. one with a mid-point) there will be no difference between moving the STRA itself or its mid-point, but for a two point STRA moving its from or to point will cause its length and/or its slope to change; the position of the other point will remain unchanged. BY @ prompts: or: Input two points on a sheet Input two points in the same View

depending upon whether the STRA is currently positioned on a 2D point or a 3D/p-point.

BY X55 Y-678 BY N500 W1200 DRAG BY @ DRAG BY X120 Y-45 DRAG BY S3500 D500
FPT BY @ prompts: or:

STR As positioned at a 3D point cannot be

shifted by an X,Y amount, and vice versa. see comments for BY command

Input two points on a sheet Input two points in the same View

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:31

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

depending upon whether the point is currently positioned on a 2D point or 3D/p-point.

FPT BY X55 Y-678 FPT BY N500 W1200 FPT DRAG [BY] @

Points positioned at a 3d point cannot be shifted by an XY amount, and vice versa. These commands change the position of drafting point FPT DRAG TO @ to which FPT is attached and hence will change position of other primitives attached to same point. the the the the

Repeated Copying See Circles. Querying Q DESC queries the Length and point attributes, i.e. LENGTH value ADEG value FPT X value Y value TPT X value Y value Q FPT Queries the position of the 'from' point if set. Similarly for TPT, MPT Q OFFS Queries the offset positions of the points set (relative to the Note origin) Q FPT OFFS Queries the offset of the 'from' point relative to the Note origin (similarly for TPT, MPT) SKETCH POINTS Sketches all points currently in use for the STRA SKETCH FPT Sketches the from point (if set) - similarly for the TPT and MPT SKETCH ORIG Sketches first node SKETCH POINTS ALL At NOTE level, displays all the points currently in use for all member primitives

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:32

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

SYMBOL INSTANCE (SYMB)

Attributes PTRF TMRF XYSCALE ADEG Point reference for origin Template reference Scale in X, Y directions Angle in owner

When instancing a symbol (SYMB), the TMRF attribute should reference a symbol template (SYTM) in the symbol library (SYLB). If this attribute is not set, nothing will be drawn. Changing Size and Orientation XYSCALE value value SYSIZE value SYSZ @ @ SYSIZE @ @ ALENGTH value ALENGTH @ Changes the length of a straight by moving its From Point Changes the length of a straight by moving the end nearest to the cursor Negative values give a mirroring effect Sets X and Y scales equally

You are requested to input two points; the first point selects a position on the symbol, the second point sets a new position for the selected point. The new symbol size is calculated from the ratio of the distances of those two points from the symbol origin. SHIFT @ @ as above, but alters ADEG as well as the symbol size.

All other operations are as for Circles. Updating Symbol Instances The command UPDATE INSTANCES valid at SHEE, BACK, OVER, SYLB, LALB or above, scans the database hierarchy and updates all those parts of picture files that use the graphics instancing mechanism. For example, a SYMB is an instance of a SYTM. OLAY and BACK elements are in the same category.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:33

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

TABLE (TABL)
Attributes PTRF NLSTYLE NLCOLOUR OCOD ADEG XLEN YLEN NROW NCOL ROWSTYLE ROWCOLOUR COLSTYLE COLCOLOUR Point reference for origin Note line style Note line colour Origin code (CENTRE, LSID, TLEFT, RSIDE, TSIDE, BSIDE, TRIGHT, BLEFT, BRIGHT) Angle in owner axis length Y axis length No.of rows No.of columns Style for Internal Rows (if set) Colour for Internal Rows (if set) Style for Internal Columns (if set) Colour for Internal Columns (if set)

All operations, including definition using the ADEFine, ASDEFine and SDEFine commands, are similar to those for Rectangles, except that FRAD does not apply. Internal rows and columns are drawn using NLSTYLE/NLCOLOUR by default. If ROWSTYLE/ ROWCOLOUR or COLSTYLE/COLCOLOUR are set, internal rows and columns may be drawn in a different style and colour to the outline rectangle.

TEXT PRIMITIVE (TEXP)

Attributes PTRF BTEX ADEG FONT TXCOLOUR CHEI LHEI CSPA LSPA Point reference for origin Text string (may include # codes) Angle in owner Text font Text colour Character height Letter height Character spacing factor Text line spacing factor

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:34

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

JUST ALIG Resizing

Justification Vertical alignment

Set the CHEI, LHEI, CSPA or LSPA attributes. Redefining the Origin Set JUST (justification) or ALIG (alignment). All other positioning operations are as for Circles (see CIRCLE (CIRC)).

18.5
18.5.1

Text Strings
Entering Text from DRAFT
Text for use with the DRAFT 2D drafting facilities takes the form of TEXP elements that must be created (as NOTE, VNOT or SYTM members) before the text itself can be input. The text itself is input as the BTEX attribute of the TEXP, being positioned (by default) at the default drafting point. The text can be repositioned by an AT @ command. The text size will probably need to be increased, which is done by setting the CHEI (character height) or LHEI (letter height) attribute to a suitable value. A TEXP has attributes governing its orientation (ADEG), text colour (TXCOLOUR), font (FONT), horizontal justification (JUST), character/letter height and spacing (CHEI/LHEI, CSPA) and line spacing and alignment (LSPA, ALIG). All these attributes are the same as those for Label Text - see Labelling for details. In addition to the facilities outlined above, TEXP elements which are NOTE/VNOT members may incorporate intelligent text codes - see Intelligent Text. TEXP elements that are SYTM members may also incorporate intelligent text codes, but these will only be expanded when the SYTM is referenced by a SLAB. The command Q EXTENT BTEX may be used to give the extent of the BTEX text string. Four pairs of coordinates are output, giving the coordinates of the corners of the rectangular area occupied by the text in Top-left, Top-right, Bottom-right, Bottom left order with respect to the direction of the drawn text string. These coordinate pairs may be used to align another string of text with the queried text string. The pair of coordinates to be used depends on the Justification and Alignment attributes of the text to be aligned. Thus if JUSTIFICATION LEFT, ALIGNMENT TBODY is being used, then the position of the next line of text is given by the fourth pair of coordinates. This is true whatever the text orientation.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:35

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

18.5.2

Displaying Text from a File on the Drawing

The contents of a text file may be read in and placed on a drawing using Programmable Macro Language (PML) file handling facilities. For example (when at a NOTE):

ALIG TB JUST L OPENFILE /filename READ !TOKEN READFILE $!TOKEN !RECORD NEW TEXP AT @ BTEX $!RECORD VAR !EXTENT EXTENT BTEX
The EXTENT query (together with PML array and string-handling commands) may be used to calculate the position of the next line of text. Successive READFILE and TEXP commands may be used until the file is exhausted. The file may then be closed using:

CLOSEFILE $!TOKEN
Note that any $ characters in the file should be doubled. PML is detailed in the Software Customisation Guide.

18.6
18.6.1

Summary of Commands
Creating Primitives . . .

NEW CIRCLE DEF @ NEW CIRC RAD 50 ORIG CIRCUM ADEG 45 AT X900 Y750

use cursor to mark (in this case) circle centre and point on circumference define circle size and position explicitly

18.6.2

Shifting the Origin . . .

ORIG @ OCOD @ OCOD CEN ORIG X300 Y250 OCOD TRIGHT @ SKETCH ORIG

origin Sheet coordinates change; primitive does not move origin Sheet coordinates remain unchanged; primitive moves to place itself according to new origin code origin Sheet coordinates and origin code change; primitive moves display primitive origin

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:36

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

18.6.3

Moving Individual Primitives . . .

AT @ AT X300 Y250 POS ID @ POS W5500 N12345 D120 ON ID @ ON IDP @ ON /PUMP1 ON P1 OF /PUMP2/NS BY @ BY X10.5 BY N500 W1200

move to new 2D position move to new 3D position (VNOT members only) move to specified element origin or p-point (VNOT members only)

move relative to current 2D position move relative to current 3D position (VNOT members only)

18.6.4

Rotating Individual Primitives . . .

ROTATE 45 @ ROTATE 45 IDP@

use cursor to specify 2D point to rotate about use cursor to specify Design p-point to rotate about

18.6.5

Mirroring Individual Primitives . . .

MIRROR IN @ MIRROR ABOUT @ @

use cursor to specify existing linear element to mirror in use cursor to specify two points to define mirror axis

18.6.6

Moving Groups of Primitives . . .

DRAG TO @ DRAG TO X120 Y-45 DRAG TO POS @ DRAG TO IDP @ DRAG TO S3500 D500 DRAG TO P1 OF /VESS2/N6 DRAG BY @ DRAG BY X120 Y-45 DRAG BY S3500 D500

move to new 2D position move to new 3D position (VNOT members only) move relative to current 2D position

move relative to current 3D position (VNOT members only)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:37

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

18.6.7

Querying Primitives . . .

Q ORIG Q COMMON Q OFFSET Q DESC Q IDN @ Q IDNN @

queries origin and position of a primitive queries primitives with drafting points in common with the current element queries offset of a primitive origin from the Note origin queries principal dimensional and positional attributes of a primitive queries point on the current STRA or ARC queries point on hit primitive

18.6.8

Copying Primitives . . .

REPEAT 5 BY X20 Y20 REPEAT 5 BY @ REPEAT 5 @

produce five copies of the current primitive, each displaced (X20, Y20) from the last as above, but use cursor to define displacement s above, but with first copy at cursor position, displacement of second and subsequent copies equal to that of first copy from original as above, but just one repetition

REPEAT @

18.6.9

Outlines . . .

NEW OUTL NEW VRTX AT @ SPAN TO @ SPAN TO IDP @

creates a new Outline element creates a new Vertex; use the cursor to define its position. vertex point defined by 2D cursor hit vertex point defined by 3D Design p-point cursor hit (similarly SPAN TO, SPAN THROUGH, SPAN THROUGH . . . TO, SPAN TO . . . THROUGH) vertex point coincident with starting vertex; closes Outline. straight line span with vertex at given Sheet coordinates. sets radius of circle of which (arc) span forms a part to given value. sets angle subtended by (arc) span to given value. moves the two VRTXs of the current span by the given displacements.

SPAN TO CLOSE SPAN STRAIGHT TO X value Y value SPAN RADIUS value SPAN ASUB value SPAN BY X value Y value

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:38

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

SPAN DRAG BY Y value CURFIT CUBICFIT CURFIT DEFAULT CHAMFER value [value] FRAD value

moves the two VRTXs and all connected drafting primitives of the current span by the given displacement. (at OUTL) draws quadratic curve through vertex points turns off curve fit function applies chamfer between two VRTXs applies fillet to current VRTX

18.6.10 Sketching Drafting Points . . .

SKETCH ORIGIN SKETCH ORIGIN ALL SKETCH ORIGIN ALL IN identifier SKETCH POINTS SKETCH POINTS ALL

at primitive level, displays primitive origin at NOTE level, displays origins of all member primitives displays origins of all drafting primitives at/below the specified element sketches all points in use for the current primitive at NOTE level, sketches all points currently in use

SKETCH POINTS ALL IN identifier d drafting points of all drafting primitives at/below the isplays specified element SKETCH FPT will sketch the from point (if set) - similarly for the TPT and MPT

18.6.11 Enhancing Display of Primitives . . .

ENHANce [SOLEly] selection_criterion . . UNENHANce Q ENHAnce [LIst] SETENHAnce COLour integer SETENHAnce COLour col-name

enhances display of specified primitives removes all enhancing lists enhanced elements sets enhancement colour

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:39

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

2D Drafting

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

18:40

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

ISODRAFT Symbols

19

ISODRAFT Symbols
You can create symbols in DRAFT to be used on the isometrics produced by ISODRAFT. The symbols are created as ISODRAFT Symbol Templates (ISOTMs), which are similar to normal symbol templates, except that they can only own STRAs and MRKPs. They have additional attributes, described in Creating ISODRAFT Symbol Templates. ISOTMs are stored in ISODRAFT Symbol Libraries (ISOLBs), which are identical to SYLBs except that they can only own ISOTMs. The relevant part of the DRAFT database is shown in Figure 19:1.: ISODRAFT Symbol Libraries and Related Elements.

ISOLB

ISOTM

MRKP STRA
Figure 19:1. ISODRAFT Symbol Libraries and Related Elements

19.1

Creating ISODRAFT Symbol Templates

ISODRAFT Symbol templates can only own STRAs, which define the geometry of the symbol, and MRKP elements, which define the start, end, spindle and tee points on the symbol. These elements should have their PURP attributes set as follows: STRAs owned by ISOTMs should have their PURP attributes set to LINE, INSU or TRAC (to describe whether the straight represents the pipeline, its insulation or its tracing). MRKPs owned by ISOTMs should have their PURP attributes set to one of ARRI, LEAV, TEE or SPIN.

The Arrive and Leave points of the symbol will be used as the reference points for dimensioning.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

19:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

ISODRAFT Symbols

19.1.1

Attributes of ISODRAFT Symbol Templates

The attributes of ISODRAFT Symbol Templates that are additional to the attributes of normal symbol templates are as follows: SKEY Symbol key: the SKEY of the new Symbol. If this attribute is set to the SKEY of an existing symbol, the existing symbol will be redefined. You can use wildcards to define a symbol for several similar SKEYs, see Wildcards in SKEYs. Base symbol key. If a new SKEY is being defined, the BKEY must be set to a standard SKEY. Wildcards can be used, see Wildcards in SKEYs Changes the size of the symbol without redefining the coordinates of the plotted shape (100 = full size). Spindle symbol key. If this attribute is set, the Symbol Template will include a spindle symbol. For more information, see the ISODRAFT Reference Manual. Default NONE. Specifies a symmetrical fitting which the flow direction is not relevant Specifies a fitting for which the flow direction is important, such as check valves Specifies a reducing fitting Specifies a fitting which begins with a flange; that is, one which is preceded by a gasket Plots flow arrows on the symbol Suppresses flow arrows Plots dimensions alongside the symbol. Default Suppresses the plotting of dimensions Insulation shown on symbol if specified. Default Insulation representation suppressed Tracing shown on symbol if specified. Default Tracing representation suppressed Symbol to be filled Symbol not filled. Default Marker style (see Colours and Styles) Marker colour (see Colours and Styles)

BKEY

SCALe value SPINdle

ORIN NONE ORIN FLOW ORIN REDUCER ORIN FLANGE FLWArrow TRUE FLWArrow FALSE DIMEnsion TRUE DIMEnsion FALSE INSL TRUE INSL FALSE TRCG TRUE TRCG FALSE FILL TRUE FILL FALSE MSTYLE MCOLOUR

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

19:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

ISODRAFT Symbols

19.1.2

Wildcards in SKEYs
You can use the * character as a wildcard to define a symbol for several similar SKEYs. For example:

SKEY VB**
This illustrates the use of the ** characters to cover all end conditions, i.e. BW (butt weld), CP (compression), SW (socket weld), FL (flanged), SC (screwed) and PL (plain), when defining a new range of SKEYs. This sequence therefore defines the SKEYs VBBW, VBCP, VBSW, VBFL, VBSC and VBPL in a single operation. Note: The wildcard option applies only to the definition of SKEYs. You must specify a particular end condition when you set the SKEY attribute of a DTEX element in the Catalogue DB; for example, by setting it to VBBW or VBCP but not to VB**.

19.1.3

Example
The following commands are an example of how to create an ISODRAFT Symbol Library and an ISODRAFT Symbol Template:

NEW ISOLB NEW ISOTM XYPS X200 Y200 SKEY SSSS SPIN NONE FLWA TRUE BKEY VV** SCAL 100 FILL TRUE NEW MRKP PURP TEE ORIG OFFS X0 Y0 NEW STRA PURP LINE TPT OFFS X4.0 Y1.0 NEW STRA PURP LINE TPT OFFS X8.0 Y1.0 NEW STRA PURP LINE TPT OFFS X8.0 Y-1.0 NEW STRA PURP LINE

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

19:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

ISODRAFT Symbols

TPT OFFS X4.0 Y-1.0 NEW STRA PURP LINE TPT OFFS X0 Y0 NEW MRKP PURP LEAVE ORIG OFFS X8.0 Y0

19.2

Outputting ISODRAFT Symbols

When you have defined the symbols you require in the Symbol Library, you must output the Symbols to an ISODRAFT Symbol File using the ISOSYMBOL command. You can open a new (or existing) file by giving the command: ISOSYMBOL filename The current symbol (i.e. ISOTM) can be added to the file by: ISOSYMBOL ADD A symbol that has been added but is not required can be removed from the file by giving the command: ISOSYMBOL DELETE skey When all the symbols have been added, the file is closed by giving the command: ISOSYMBOL CLOSE This will overwrite an existing file. Note: PDMS Release 12 now user double precision floating point representation for numbers; previously single precision was used. Double precision provides increased accuracy in floating point numbers from six significant digits to 8. Symbol files written by single precision (pre 12.0) releases of DRAFT cannot be reopened for modification in double precision releases. Such files must be regenerated from the symbol elements using the ISOSYMBOL command to create a new file in a double precision release of DRAFT.

19.3

Querying ISODRAFT Symbol Templates

The following querying commands are available: Q ALL ISOTM Q ALL ISOLB Q ISOSYM Q ISOSYM NUMBER Q ISOSYM n lists all ISODRAFT Symbol Templates lists all ISODRAFT Symbol Libraries list symbol keys and base symbol keys in the library file gives the number of symbols in the library file gives the symbol key and base key for entry number n.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

19:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

20

Point and Line Construction

You can define a position in terms of other positions rather than defining it explicitly using the point construction facilities in DRAFT. Point construction is available for Positioning of 2D drafting primitives Labelling, where a 2D position is required, e.g. positioning of gaps Dimensioning, where a 2D (or, if appropriate, a 3D) position is required, e.g. positioning of a point through which a dimension line should pass Positioning of Overlay Sheets VIEW position attributes, e.g. THPO, FRPO, ONPO, VREG command SYTM and TXTM positioning.

As well as points, it is also possible to construct lines and arcs.

20.1

Introduction
A drafting point position may be specified explicitly, for example

ORIG X300 Y250

It is also possible to construct a drafting point position, using commands such as: ORIG MIDP position position ORIG OFFSET 2D_vector ORIG position DIST distance Here, position may be any of: A 2D position: An existing drafting point: A 3D position: A Design Item: A p-point: A position on a p-line: ORIG MIDP X100 Y100 X800 Y800 ORIG MIDP ID@ ID@ ORIG MIDP E150 N7400 U1200 E2150 N4400 U3550 ORIG MIDP /PUMP1/IN /PUMP1/ON ORIG MIDP P0 OF /PUMP1/IN P0 OF /PUMP1/ON ORIG PLIN TOS OF /SECT1 START DIST 150

The 3D position of a Design item, p-point or p-line position

2D_vector specifies an offset position from the owner origin of the primitive concerned, for example

ORIG OFFS X50 Y50

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

distance gives a distance and a direction from a point, and may be one of the following in a NOTE or SYTM: units_value ANGLE value HORIZONTAL VERTICAL 2D_vector

For example:

ORIG ORIG ORIG ORIG

X50 X50 X50 X50

Y50 Y50 Y50 Y50

DIST DIST DIST DIST

200MM ANG 30 200 HORI 200 VERT 100 X100 Y100

For a VNOT, distance may be expressed as units_value DESIGN direction where direction is a 3D, p-point or p-line direction. The distance specified is a Design distance in the current View. The above syntax may also be used in most drafting commands, e.g. FPT, TPT, CPT, DEFINE, DRAG TO, LENGTH, RADIUS etc. All point constructions are carried out in the context of the current database position. If the current element is owned by a NOTE or SYTM, a point construction will give a 2D point. 3D point constructions (for example, positioning the centre of a circle on a Design element position) are only allowed for drafting below VNOT elements. In some cases there could be ambiguity about the point to be constructed, for example if the point were defined using a tangent to a circle, or the intersection of two circles. In cases such as this the point to be used can be qualified with a cursor hit. The following sections describe the various types of point construction, with examples. The symbol @ denotes a cursor hit.

20.2

X, Y Filtering
A 2D position may be defined in terms of the X or Y coordinates of other points. For example, rather than an explicit point definition such as:

AT X200 Y200
a constructed point could be defined by:

AT X200 Y OF point
The above command would define a position whose Y coordinate would be the Y coordinate of point, where point could include: The endpoint of a line or an arc The centre of a circle or an arc A tangency point An intersection points The point on a line or an arc nearest to a given point The point defined by the perpendicular from a given point

The constructed point could also be defined explicitly or by a cursor hit. For example:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

AT X200 Y OF @
Set the Y coordinate to the Y coordinate of the cursor hit

AT X OF @ Y OF @
X coordinate from first cursor hit, Y coordinate from second cursor hit The process of deriving a coordinate from a coordinate of another point is known as X, Y filtering. X and Y filters may be used in any command that requires a 2D position on a Sheet, including edits on various Dimension attributes. For example:

PTOF X OF /VALV1 Y @ DTOF X @ Y250 PLCL X @ Y OF POS E3000 S2000 U0

Y coordinate set to the Y coordinate of 2D projection of given 3D position. 3D positions may also be constructed, but this only applies to 2D drafting primitives that are members of VNOT elements. X, Y filtering can be used with any 2D element which has a position attribute, e.g. VIEWs, Labels, Dimension Points etc. Examples

1. NEW STRA FPT X100 Y100 TPT X OF @ Y OF @ (or NEW STRA DEF X100 Y100 X OF @ Y OF @)
Here a straight line is created with one of its endpoints defined explicitly and the other constructed using cursor hits. See Figure 20:1.: X, Y Filtering - General 2D Position.

500 2 1

100 100 500

Figure 20:1. X, Y Filtering - General 2D Position

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:3

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

Here, the to point of the line takes its X coordinate from the X coordinate of hit 1 (at 200, 300) and its Y coordinate from the Y coordinate of hit 2 (at 500, 400). The to point is therefore (200, 400). 2. DTOF X @ Y250 With a cursor hit at (400, 900), the above command would move a Dimension text origin to (400, 250). 3. PLCL X @ Y OF POS E3000 S2000 U0 Here, a projection line clearance X coordinate would be set to the X coordinate of the cursor hit, the Y coordinate being set to the Y coordinate of the 2D projection of the given 3D position.

20.3

Construction of 3D Positions
A specified 2D point may be projected into 3D, enabling 3D positions to be constructed by picks on any line in the Design graphics. This is done using the POSition OF <point> syntax. For example:

NEW STRA DEF @ TPT POS OF ENDP OF @

Position TO point at end of 3D line. A Q DESC command would return a 3D coordinate for the TPT of the line. This facility is only valid in Plan or Elevation VIEWs. Note that the Q ENUPOS and Q SHPOS commands (see Querying Position Data) also calculate conversions between 2D and 3D positions.

20.4

Midpoint Position
This form of construction derives a position as the midpoint of two other positions, which may be defined explicitly or by cursor hits.

20.4.1

Midpoint of Two Defined Points

A drafting point position may be constructed as the midpoint of two other points using the following command syntax: MIDPOINT position position where position is as described in Introduction.

20.4.2

Midpoint of an Existing Straight Line or Arc

Example

1. NEW STRA FPT MIDPOINT OF @ TPT MIDPOINT OF @ (or NEW STRA DEF MIDPOINT OF @ MIDPOINT OF @)
Here, the line would take its endpoints as the midpoints of the two hit items. If the two hit items were an arc and another straight line then the situation could be as shown in Figure 20:2.: Use of the MIDPOINT Construction.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:4

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

newly defined STRA

Figure 20:2. Use of the MIDPOINT Construction

The required midpoint could also be that of one side of a closed polyline primitive, e.g. a rectangle. Line definitions of other elements (such as a line that comprises a piece of a design item shown in a VIEW) can be extracted by cursor. As well as using a cursor hit, the STRA or ARC may be identified explicitly. Note: Note that with this variation of the MIDPOINT syntax, the presence of the OF keyword is mandatory.

20.5

Quadrant Point Position

A quadrant point of an existing circle can be used for point construction. This will be the extreme TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT or RIGHT of the circle. For example

NEW STRA FPT @ TPT TOP OF ID @

constructed point

Figure 20:3. Use of the Quadrant Construction (i)

Quadrant points of an arc or ellipse may also be identified. If an ellipse is rotated, the nearest extreme of the ellipse will be selected. For example

NEW STRA FPT @ TPT TOP ELLI /ELLI1

constructed point

Figure 20:4. Use of the Quadrant Construction (ii)

The syntax will always construct a 2D position.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:5

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

20.6

Endpoint Position
This form of construction derives a position as the endpoint of an identified element (typically a line or an arc). A qualifier may be added if there is any ambiguity about which endpoint is to be used. If there is any ambiguity, and if the qualifier is omitted, then a solution will be chosen and returned arbitrarily. The required endpoint could also be that of one side of a closed polyline primitive, e.g. a rectangle. Line definitions of other elements (such as one side of an EQUI, or a line that comprises a piece of a design item shown in a VIEW) may be extracted by cursor. Examples

1. NEW MRKP DEF ENDPOINT @

Here, a MRKP is positioned on the end of the STRA closest to the cursor hit. Note that the cursor hit acts as the qualifier. Note that endpoints of lines and arcs can also be picked directly using the IDPT @ command.

2. NEW STRA FPT X150 Y250 TPT ENDPOINT OF @ (or NEW STRA DEF X150 Y250 ENDPOINT @)
Here, the line has one of its endpoints defined explicitly, the other as the endpoint of the hit arc.

500

(150, 250) 100 100

newly defined STRA X

500

Figure 20:5. Use of the ENDPOINT Construction

Here, the cursor hit also acts as the qualifier.

3. NEW STRA FPT X150 Y150 TPT ENDPOINT OF PREV ARC QUAL X400 Y400
Here, the line has its from point defined explicitly and its to point as the endpoint of the previous ARC in the list order closest to (X400, Y400).

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:6

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

Y previous ARC in list order

500 (400, 400)

(150, 250) 100 100

newly defined STRA X

500

Figure 20:6. Use of the ENDPOINT Construction, with Qualifier

20.7

Centre or Focus Position

This form of construction derives a position as the centre of a specified circle, arc, ellipse, rectangle, hexagon, table, diamond or equilateral triangle. A point may also be constructed using the focus of an ellipse. Example

1. NEW STRA FPT X150 Y250 TPT CEN OF @ (or NEW STRA DEF X150 Y250 CEN OF @)
Here, the line has one of its endpoints defined explicitly, the other as the centre of the element (in this case a circle) hit by the cursor.

500

(150, 250) 100 100

newly defined STRA X

500

Figure 20:7. Use of the CENTRE Construction

2. NEW TEXP text DEF CENTRE PREV CIRCLE

Here, the text origin is placed at the centre of the previous circle element in list order.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:7

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

3. NEW STRA FPT @ TPT FOC OF /ELLI1 QUAL @

Here, the to point of the line is placed at the focus of ellipse /ELLI1 qualified by a cursor hit.

constructed point

1
Figure 20:8. Use of the FOCUS Construction

20.8

Nearest To Position
This form of construction derives the point on a primitive that is nearest to a specified qualifying point. Example

1. NEW MRKP DEF NEAREST PREV STRA QUAL X150 Y250

In the left-hand case shown below, the MRKP element and the position (X150, Y250) lie on the perpendicular to the STRA. In the right-hand case, the MRKP lies at the endpoint of the STRA. In both cases, the MRKP element is the nearest point that lies on the previous STRA in the list order to the given qualifying point.
Y newly defined MRKP Y newly defined MRKP

(150, 250) 100 100 500 100

(150, 250)

100

500

Figure 20:9. Use of the NEAREST Construction (1)

2. NEW STRA FPT X150 Y250 TPT NEAREST PREV ARC QUAL @
Here, the STRA has its from point defined explicitly, its to point being defined as the nearest point which lies on the previous ARC in list order to the given qualifying point.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:8

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

Y newly defined STRA

(150, 250) 100 100 500

Figure 20:10. Use of the NEAREST Construction (2)

3. NEW MRKP DEF NEAR @

Here, the MRKP element would be snapped to the primitive nearest the cursor hit. Note that in this case a qualifying point is not needed.

20.9

Intersection
Here, a point is constructed which is at the intersection of two primitives. The primitives should be chosen from STRA, ARC, or CIRC, although line-parts of more complex primitives may be identified by cursor. An ellipse (ELLI) is also an allowable primitive, but it is only possible to calculate the intersection point between an ellipse and a straight line. A qualifying point may also be specified when there is more than one point of intersection (cf. use of qualifier in Endpoint Position) Examples

1. INT @
This variation uses a single cursor hit to pick the intersection point explicitly.

constructed point

2. INT BETW @ @
This constructs a point at the intersection of two hit primitives:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:9

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

con st r u ct ed poin t

3. INT BETW @ @
In this case the second cursor hit acts as a qualifier:

constructed point
1 2

4. INT /CIRC1 AND /STRA1 QUAL X100 Y100

Here, the intersection point is the one closest to (X100, Y100)

constructed point

(100, 100)

5. NEW STRA FPT INT BETW PREV ARC AND PREV CIRC QUAL X200 Y300 TPT MIDP OF PREV STRA
Here, the STRA has one endpoint defined as that intersection between the specified arc and the specified circle which is the nearest to the qualifying point, the other endpoint being the midpoint of a specified line.

Y newly defined STRA

500

(200, 300) 100 100 500

Figure 20:11. Use of the INTERSECTION BETWEEN Construction

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:10

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

20.10 Tangency Point

This construction generates a point at which a tangent line from a specified reference point meets a specified arc, circle or ellipse. Examples

1. NEW STRA FPT X100 Y100 TPT X300 Y200 TAN @

500

(300, 200) (reference point) 100 (100, 100) 100

newly defined STRA X

500

Figure 20:12. Use of the TANGENCY Point Construction

This STRA element has an explicit FPT; its TPT is the point on the ARC that, together with (X300, Y200), forms a tangent to the ARC. Here the cursor hit acts as a qualifying point. Notice that the STRA produced here is not a tangent line.

2. NEW STRA FPT X200 Y100 TPT X200 Y100 TAN PREV CIRC QUAL @
Here, the STRA has one endpoint defined explicitly and the other defined as the point where the tangent line through (X200, Y100) intersects the previous CIRC in list order which is closest to the cursor-specified qualifying point.

500

100 (200, 100) 100 500

newly defined STRA X

Figure 20:13. Use of the TANGENT Construction to give a Tangential Line

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:11

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

The qualifier is necessary since in this case there are two possible tangents. (Other tangent shown dashed.) Other cases would not need a qualifier since only one tangent would be possible (see below).

generated point

(200, 100)
3. NEW STRA DEF @ @ TAN @
In this case, the first cursor hit defines one endpoint of the STRA, the second defines one end of a tangent, and the third picks the circle and also acts as a qualifier. The resulting STRA intersects the tangent. See below.
1

newly defined STRA

3

Figure 20:14. Use of the TANGENT Construction to give a Line perpendicular to a Tangent

20.11 Tangent Lines

The TANLINE command can be used to draw a tangent line between any two ARC or CIRC elements. Provided that the current element is a STRA, the syntax to create a tangent line would be, for example:

TANLINE @ @
Figure 20:15.: Use of the TANLINE command to give a Tangent Line shows various examples of the use of the tangent line facility. Notice how (right-most illustration) the tangent line may lie on the complement of an ARC.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:12

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

Figure 20:15. Use of the TANLINE command to give a Tangent Line

20.12 Perpendicular Intersection Point

This construction generates a point that is the intersection point between a selected primitive (a line, arc, or circle) and the perpendicular from a specified point to the primitive. The perpendicular will always lie in the plane of the paper. If there is more than one possible constructed point, that nearest the specified point is generated (unless this is overruled by the presence of a qualifier.) Examples

1. NEW STRA FPT X300 Y100 TPT X300 Y100 PERP PREV STRA
Here, the STRA has one endpoint defined explicitly and the other defined as the intersection of the perpendicular from the specified reference point to the previous STRA in list order. See Figure 20:16.: Use of the PERPENDICULAR Construction.

500

100 (300, 100) 100 500

newly defined STRA X

Figure 20:16. Use of the PERPENDICULAR Construction

Where the specified primitive is a line, the constructed point may lie beyond the ends of the line (as above). Other variations of the PERPENDICULAR Construction are shown below.

2. NEW STRA FPT X0 Y0 TPT X0 Y0 PERP PREV CIRC QUAL @

Here (see opposite), two constructed points are possible and so a qualifying cursor hit is used.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:13

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

500

100 100

newly defined STRA

500

3. NEW STRA DEF X0 Y0 PERP @ X0 Y0

Here (see below), the cursor hit selects the primitive and acts as a qualifier.

500

100 100

newly defined STRA

500

4. NEW STRA DEF @ @ PERP @

In this case, the first cursor hit defines one endpoint of the STRA, the second defines one end of the line that intersects the circle, and the third picks the circle (and also acts as a qualifier). See below.

newly defined STRA

1 3

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:14

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

20.13 Reflected Points

A point may be reflected in another point using the REFLECT syntax. The position of the reflected point is along the axis of the two specified points. For example:

NEW CIRC DIAM 10 AT @ REFL @

1 2

newly defined CIRC

The first point to be specified must be explicit, i.e. it cannot itself be a constructed point. A 3D position may be constructed if appropriate.

20.14 Fillet Arcs

The FILLETRADIUS command can be used to draw a fillet arc between any two linear elements. (A linear element includes a STRA element, or any other element on the drawing that is composed of straight lines (e.g. 3D design elements, the side of a RECT, etc). Provided that the current element is an ARC, the syntax to create a fillet arc would be, for example:

FILLETRAD 10 @ @
Figure 20:17. Creation of fillet arcs

FILLETRAD -10 @ @

FILLETRAD -5 @ @

20.15 Constructed Lines, Ray Lines and Bisector Lines

20.15.1 Constructed Lines
A constructed line in this context is a STRA element whose endpoints lie on the SHEE boundary. Starting with a STRA as the current element, a constructed line is created using the CONLINE command to define a Through point (which may be any of the position options, see Section 11.1) and an angle. For example:

CONLINE @ 30
This would give:

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:15

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

Sheet boundary

Figure 20:18. A Constructed Line

Note: that if the current SHEE size is changed, the FPT (From point) and TPT (To point) of the STRA will not be updated.

20.15.2 Ray Lines

A ray line in this context is a STRA element whose FPT is user defined, and whose TPT lies on the SHEE boundary. Starting with a STRA as the current element, a ray line is created using the RAYLINE command to define a From point (which may be any of the position options, see Introduction) and an angle. For example:

RAYLINE @ 30
Figure 20:19. Ray Lines

RAYLINE @ 210

Note: that if the current SHEE size is changed, the TPT of the STRA will not be updated.

20.15.3 Bisector Lines

A bisector line in this context is a STRA element that bisects the angle included between two existing linear elements. Its FPT is the intersection point of the two existing linear elements and its TPT lies on a line joining the FPT to the SHEE boundary. (The two elements need not actually intersect; the intersection point is derived by projecting the elements if necessary.) Starting with a STRA as the current element, a bisector line is created using the BISECT command to define the two lines to be intersected. For example:

BISECT @ @
Figure 20:20. Bisector Lines

BISECT @ @

BISECT @ @ LEN 100

Note: that if the current SHEE size is changed, the TPT of the STRA will not be updated.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:16

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

20.16 Chamfer Lines

A chamfer line can be drawn between any two linear elements, using the CHAMFERDIST command to specify the two lines to be chamfered and the chamfer distances. For example:

CHAMFERD 20 @ @
Figure 20:21. Chamfer Lines

CHAMFERD 20 40 @ @

CHAMFERD 20 40 @ @

Note: in the above example the effect of changing the order in which the lines to be chamfered are identified. (The same effect could be achieved by leaving the order of identification unchanged but switching the chamfer distances values in the command.) If a single value is specified, this is used for both chamfer distances.

20.17 Non-Drafting Applications of Point Construction

The point construction facilities can be used not only with 2D drafting but also with other functional areas of DRAFT such as dimensioning and labelling. These uses of point construction are most useful, and in some cases can only be used, with the cursor; a linear piece of the design, a dimension line, a label line, for example, can only be picked, for use with point construction, directly with the cursor.

20.17.1 Labelling
Point construction is available in all syntax that requires the input of a single 2D position. For example,

GAP AT INT @
could be used to introduce a gap in a leader line at the point at which it crosses another line (which may be part of the design graphics or annotation).

20.17.2 Dimensioning
Point construction is available in all syntax that requires the input of a single 2D (or, if appropriate, a 3D position). For example,

DIM CENTRE OF @
could be used to position a Dimension line to run through the centre of an existing CIRC element. When creating linear and angular Dimensions, it is possible to dimension to a constructed 2D point using the

TO POS OF @
syntax. (Similarly FROM POS OF @. This procedure is possible provided the current VIEW is orthogonal, and the 2D position lies in the current VIEW. For example, the syntax

FROM POS OF INT @

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:17

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Point and Line Construction

will create a Dimension point at the intersection of two (valid) elements.

20.17.3 Overlay Sheets

An Overlay Sheet can be positioned at a constructed point using the OPOS and OSHEE commands.

20.17.4 Drawing the Design

At VIEW level point construction methods can be used to: position the VIEW using the AT command set the VIEW size and position using the VREGION command set the THPO, FRPO and ONPO positions of the VIEW.

The THPO OF @ syntax (similarly FRPO OF @ allows input of a 2D constructed point, provided the current VIEW is orthogonal, and the 2D position lies in the current VIEW.

20.17.5 Other Non-Drafting uses of Point Construction

The XYPOS attribute of SYTMs and TXTMs under Label Libraries (LALBs) and Symbol Libraries (SYLBs) can be set to a constructed point position (using the XYPS, XYPO or AT commands).

20.17.6 Point Construction Option Form

When the Point Construction Option form is displayed the default option is the 2D Cursor Hit option. The default can be changed using the PCOPTION command: PCOPTION TWODhit PCOPTION ENDOF PCOPTION CENTReof PCOPTION MIDOF PCOPTION MIDBEtween PCOPTION INTAT PCOPTION INTBEtween PCOPTION NEAREST PCOPTION REPEAT The first eight commands cause the specified option to be presented as the default. REPEAT causes the last picked option to be presented.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

20:18

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

DRAFT Database Hierarchy

A
A.1

DRAFT Database Hierarchy

Basic Hierarchy
WORLD

STYLWL

LIBY

DEPT

GLYTB GLYPH

LSTYTB LINEST OLINES

FSTYTB FILLST HPATTE

(see overleaf)

REGI

REPO TEXT

DRWG LIBY

(see overleaf) SHEE REVI TEXT

OLAY

NOTE

REVI

VIEW

(see overleaf) LAYE RRUL HRUL VSEC

ADIM

LDIM

PDIM

RDIM

VNOT

GLAB

SLAB

TAGR

(see overleaf)

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

A:1

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

DRAFT Database Hierarchy

Note: Automatically created system' elements are not shown.

Note: Automatically created system elements are not shown.

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

A:2

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Picture File Naming Conventions

Picture File Naming Conventions

Picture file names incorporate the database reference and version number (PVNO attribute) of the picture element. Picture file names have the form:

M46-2107-20-13
where the first two numbers are the database reference of the picture element. The third number is the value of the EXFI attribute (which is normally the database/extract file number at the time the picture was saved). The final number is the picture version number (PVNO attribute). This is incremented every time the picture is modified. Only those picture elements that may include design graphics (that is SHEEs and OVERs) have picture files. The graphics for other picture elements (LALBs, BACKs etc.) are created when required. The picture file name may be queried at the picture element (SHEE, OVER) using the command: Q PICFilename This returns the picture directory and file name, for example:

%ABCPIC%/M46-2107-20-13

AVEVA Solutions Ltd 1993-2007

B:1

PDMS 12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Picture File Naming Conventions

AVEVA Solutions Ltd 1993-2007

B:2

PDMS 12.0

DRAFT User Guide

Index

Numerics
2D Symbolic Representation 3:16, 4:6, 11:3 3D view direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12

A
ABSOLUTE command . . . . . . . 13:5, 13:28 ACDISPLAY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5 ADD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 3:23 ADEFINE command . . . . . . . . 18:17, 18:29 ADEG attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 ADIM (Angular Dimension) element . . 12:35 ADIR angular dimension direction element . 12:36 AKEY attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:23 ALARM command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3, 2:6 ALENGTH command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:30 ALIG (text alignment) attribute . 12:26, 13:8, 13:27 ALPHA command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 ANGLE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:6 Angle of turn (ADEG) attribute . 13:6, 13:14, 13:27, 18:2, 18:6, 18:12 Angle Subtended (ASUB) attribute 12:31, 12:47 Angular Dimension (ADIM) Elements . 12:2, 12:34, 12:43 APPT angular dimension direction element . 12:36 ARC element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:16 Arc tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 Arc tolerance (ATOL) attribute . . . . . . . 3:12 AT command .13:5, 13:27, 18:9, 18:10, 20:2 Attachment point of Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2

Attachment point offset . . . . . . . 13:3, 13:14 Attribute Key (AKEY) attribute . 12:23, 12:46 Autoblanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 AUTOSCALE command 3:3, 3:5, 3:10, 3:13, 3:25 Autotagging exclusions from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:21

B
BACK (Backing Sheet Template) element 17:3, 18:2 Background Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19 Before/After linear dimension . . . . . . . . 12:3 Bent leader lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10 BISECT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16 Blank areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 BPOF (Bend Point Offset) attribute 13:12, 13:14 BSHEE command . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3, 17:4 BSRF (Backing Sheet Reference) attribute 17:3 BTEX (Body Text) attribute 13:4, 13:23, 13:28, 14:1, 18:35 Bulge factor (BULG) attribute . . . . . . . 18:26 BY command . . . . . .5:10, 5:12, 18:9, 18:10

C
CENTRE keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:7 Chained dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 12:6, 12:36 CHAMFERDIST command . . . . . . . . 20:17 CHANGE ACTION command . . . . 5:9, 5:11 Character Height (CHEI) attribute 12:19, 13:7, 13:28 CHECK REFERENCES command . . . 12:5 CIRC (Circle) element . . . . . . . . 18:6, 18:19

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page i

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

CLMO (Centreline Mode) attribute . . . . . 5:3 Colours, default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3 COLSTYLE, COLCOLOUR attribute . 18:34 Common draughting primitives handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:11 CONLINE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Connection Point Offset (CPOF) attribute . . 13:13, 13:14, 13:17 CPT (centre point) command . . 18:18, 20:2 CRIT command . . . . . . . . . . 4:12, 4:13, 10:8 Crosshairs Colour (CHCOLOUR) attribute . 12:46 Crosshairs Line style (CHSTYLE) attribute . 12:46 Crosshairs Line Style/Colour (CHSTYLE/CHCOLOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:31 Crosshairs Overshoot (CHOSHT) attribute . 12:31 CSPA (Character Spacing) attribute 13:7, 13:28 Curve fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:25

D
Databases switching between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 DDNM attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2, 12:5 DDNX system attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 DEFINE command 18:17, 18:19, 18:30, 20:2 DELETE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 DELETE NULL ANNO command . . . . 12:48 DELETE NULL IDLI command . . . 3:7, 3:27 DELETE STEP command . . . . . . 5:10, 5:12 DESADD command . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5, 3:23 Design Data Name (DDNM) attribute . 12:5, 12:12, 12:23, 12:35, 12:43, 12:47, 12:48, 13:3, 13:20, 13:23, 13:27, 13:31 Design elements hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Design Symbol (DESSYM) . . . . . . . . . . 3:16 Design Symbol Layer (DSLAYE) element 3:16 Design Symbol Link (DRSYLK) . . . . . . 3:17 DESREMOVE command . . . . . . . 3:5, 3:23 DESSYM (Design Symbol) element . . . 3:16 DFLAG attribute . . . . . . . . . . . 12:24, 12:46 DGN Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:15 DIM @ command . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:42 Dimension arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:35 Dimension attribute key (AKEY) . . . . . 12:23 Dimension Line Angle (DDEG) Attribute 12:25, 12:32, 12:42, 12:46 Dimension Line Direction (DIR) . . . . . . 12:9 Dimension Line Position (DPOS) attribute 12:9, 12:38, 12:41 Dimension Line Spacing (DMSP) attribute .

12:12, 12:39, 12:45 Dimension line terminators . . . . 12:20, 12:45 Dimension lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2, 12:41 truncating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:45 Dimension Offset (DOFF) attribute 12:4, 12:8, 12:9, 12:38, 12:41, 12:43 Dimension origin (of angular dimension) 12:34 DIMENSION PEN command . . . . . . . 12:21 Dimension points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2, 12:3 deleting unwanted . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:48 DIMENSION RADIUS command 12:38, 12:43 DIMENSION SEPARATION command 12:12 Dimension Style of radial dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 12:29 Dimension text . . . . . . . 12:13, 12:19, 12:43 Dimension text angle . . . . . . . . 12:14, 12:26 Dimension Text Character Height (DTCH) attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:43 DIMENSION TEXT command . . . . . . 12:13 Dimension Text Font (DFONT) attribute 12:31 Dimension Text Letter Height (DTLH) attribute 12:19, 12:43 Dimension Text Offset (DTOF) attribute 12:14, 12:26, 12:32, 12:42, 12:43 Dimension text underlining in radial dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 12:29 DIMENSION OFFSET command . . . . . 12:9 Dimension, Text, Character, Height (DTCH) attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:19 DIR attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11, 12:9 Direction of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Display preserving, recovering . . . . . . . . 2:1, 2:5 DLFG attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:39, 12:46 DLLB (Id List Library) element . . . . . . . . 3:4 DMND (Diamond) element . . . . . . . . . 18:22 DMTX (Dimension Line Text) attribute 12:13, 12:24, 12:39, 12:43, 14:1, 14:6 DOFF attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:9 Double Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4 DPBA (Dimension Point Before/After) element 12:3, 12:48 DPOI (Dimension Point) element 12:3, 12:36 DPOS attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:9 DPPT (Dimension Point/P-Point) element 12:3, 12:35, 12:48 DRAFT entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 DRAFT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 DRAG command 18:6, 18:9, 18:18, 18:31, 20:2 Draughting origin shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:8 Draughting points . . . . . . . 18:6, 18:14, 20:1

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page ii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1 Draughting primitives copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:13 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6 mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:12 moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:9, 18:12 moving groups of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:9 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:10 rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:12 Drawing (DRWG) element . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 DRSYLK (Design Symbol Link) element 3:17 DSLAYE (Design Symbol Layer) element 3:16 DSTYE (Dimension Line Style) attribute 12:46 DSTYLE (Dimension Line Style) attribute 12:29 DTANG attribute . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:46 DTANGLE attribute 12:14, 12:26, 12:39, 12:44 DTER (Dimension Line Terminator) attribute 12:20, 12:45 DTFL (Text Radius Flag) attribute 12:25, 12:46 DTOF (Dimension Text Offset) attribute 12:14, 12:43 DTRA (Text Radius) attribute . 12:25, 12:32, 12:42, 12:46 DTUL (Dimension Text Underline) attribute . 12:29 DXF output scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6

FRPO (From Point) VIEW attribute . . . 3:11

G
GAP command . .12:21, 12:45, 13:14, 13:30 Gaps, sketching and erasing . . . . . . . 12:21 GBOX (frame clearance) attribute . . . 13:27 General Label (GLAB) element . . . . . . 13:1 GETWORK command . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2, 2:5 Grid snapping to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4 GRSYS attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17 GTYP attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7, 5:11

H
Hatch pattern in automatic hatching . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11 Hatching automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Hatching Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Hatching Ruleset Reference (HRSF) attribute 3:12 HEXA (Hexagon) element . . . . . . . . . 18:24 Hidden line views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15 Hidden lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 HIGHLIGHT command . . . 6:6, 18:11, 18:14

I E
EDTEXT command . 12:20, 13:4, 15:3, 15:4 ELLI (ellipse) element . . . . . . . 18:19, 18:22 Enclosed planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 ENDPOINT keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:6 ENHANCE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 ERASE command . . . . . . . . 5:11, 5:13, 18:9 ETRI (Equilateral Triangle) element . . 18:23 ID ADIM, ID LDIM commands . . . . . . 12:39 Id List cleaning up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 Id List Library (DLLB) element . . . . . . . . 3:4 Id List Name (IDLN) attribute . . . . . . 3:3, 5:3 IDDP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 IDLI (Id List) elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 IDLN attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 IDLX system attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 IDNM attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 IDNX system attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 INSERT command . . . . . 12:6, 12:37, 12:41 INSTALL SETUP command . . . . . . . 2:1, 2:5 Intelligent text 11:2, 12:13, 12:24, 13:4, 14:1 Intelligent text sub-strings . . . . . . . . . 14:10 INTERSECTION keyword . . . . . . . . . 20:10 ISODRAFT symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4 ISOLB element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 ISOTM element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1

F
Fill Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15 FILLETRADIUS command . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Filtering X,Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3 Flat Plane (FPLA) element . . . . . . . 5:1, 5:5 FONT attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:9, 15:1 FPLA element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5 FPT (From Point) command 18:9, 18:18, 18:31, 20:2 FRAD (fillet radius) attribute . . 18:23, 18:28 Frame clearance (GBOX) attribute . . . 13:27 FROM command . . 12:3, 12:5, 12:35, 12:41, 12:43

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page iii

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

J
JUST (text justification) attribute 13:8, 13:27

M
Marker Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19 Marker Style/Colour (MSTYLE/MCOLOUR) 12:31 MIDPOINT keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4 MIRROR command . . . . . . . . . 18:12, 18:37 MLNP (Member line style/colour) attribute 4:4 Modelled wireline view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14 MODIFY @ command . 12:32, 12:42, 13:14 MPT (midpoint) command . . . . . . . . . 18:31 MRKP (marker) element . . . . . . . . . . 18:25

L
Label attachment point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2 Label attributes querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:30 Label frame attributes setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27 Label leader lines . . . . . 13:10, 13:29, 13:30 Label Library (LALB) element 13:1, 13:16, 18:3 Label text font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:9 Labels deleting unwanted . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:31 for Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:14 orienting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:6 LAYE (Layer) element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16 Layer (LAYE) element . . . . . . . . . 11:2, 18:5 LCHA attribute . . . . . . . . 12:8, 12:38, 12:45 Leader Line Clearance (LLCL) attribute 13:10 Leader Line connection point . . . . . . . 13:12 Leader Line Spacing (LSPA) attribute 13:7, 13:28 Leader Line Terminator (LTER) attribute 13:10, 13:29 Leader Line Visibility (LLEA) attribute . 13:10 Leader lines bent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10 with Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . 12:29 Legibility improving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 LENG (length) attribute . . 18:23, 18:30, 20:2 LENGTH command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:30 Letter height (LHEI) attribute . . . 13:7, 13:28 LFRA attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 LFRA keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:6 Lframe (LFRA) attribute . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27 LFSTYLE (Label Frame style) attribute 13:27 Limits of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6 Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6 Linear Dimension (LDIM) elements 12:1, 12:41 Linestyles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:21 LLSTYLE (Leader line style) attribute . 13:27 Local hidden lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14 Local Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Looking direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 LSHA (Leader Line Shape) attribute . . 13:12 LVIS (Layer Visibility) attribute 3:27, 17:4, 18:3

N
NCOL, NROWS attributes (of Table) . 18:34 NEAREST keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:8 NORM attribute . . . . . . . . . . . 5:5, 5:9, 5:11 NOTE (Sheet Note) element 18:2, 18:5, 18:6, 18:12, 18:35 NPPT attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:35, 13:3 NSIZE attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17

O
OANG (Overlay Sheet Angle) attribute 17:1, 17:4 Obstruction (OBST) level control . . . . . 12:3 OCOD (origin code) attribute 18:6, 18:8, 18:19 ODEF command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:30 OFFSET command . . . . . . . . . . 13:5, 18:12 Omitting from RRULEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6 ON command 6:3, 12:24, 12:35, 12:36, 12:43, 13:3, 18:9, 18:10 Orientation view contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 OSET (offset) attribute . . 13:5, 13:27, 13:28 OSHEE command . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3, 17:4 OSLV attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3 OSRF (Overlay Sheet Reference) attribute 17:3 OTPT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:31 Outline (OUTL) element . . . . . . . 18:5, 18:25 OVER (Overlay Sheet Template) element 17:3 Overlay (OLAY) element . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3 Overlay Sheet Position (OPOS) attribute 17:1 Overshoot (OSHT) attribute 12:4, 12:8, 12:9, 12:38, 12:45

P
Parallel dimensions 12:6, 12:12, 12:38, 12:45 PCENTRE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:33 PCIRCUMFERENCE command . . . . 12:34 PCOPTION command . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:18

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page iv

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

PDIM element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32 Perpendicular Flat Plane (PPLA) element 5:1, 5:4 PERPENDICULAR keyword . . . . . . . . 20:13 PERS attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B:1 Pitch Circle Dimension (PDIM) elements 12:2, 12:32, 12:42 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:42 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:42 PJUS (projection line text justification) command 12:17, 12:44 PKDI (p-line distance) attribute 13:3, 14:4, 16:3, 16:4 PKEY (p-line name) attribute . . . 13:3, 16:3 Plane editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10, 5:12 Plane querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12 Plane retained/discarded side determining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12 switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11 Plane sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10, 5:13 Planes Library (PLLB) element . . . . . . . . 5:3 Planes, erasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11, 5:13 PLCL (projection line clearance) attribute 12:8, 12:38, 12:45 PLDI (projection line direction) attribute 12:9, 12:10, 12:41 P-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:12 PLLB element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 PLMP (P-line style/colour) attribute . . . . 4:4 PLOT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Plotfiles size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 PLRF (Plane Reference) attribute . 5:3, 5:10, 5:12 PLTX (Projection Line Text) attribute 14:1, 14:6 PMOD (Plane Mode) attribute . . . . 5:3, 5:12 Point construction defaults . . . . . . . . . 20:18 POS attribute 5:4, 5:5, 5:7, 5:10, 5:11, 18:10 POSFOR attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17 Position converting 2D/3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4 PPDI (p-point direction) attribute 3:17, 12:12, 12:36, 12:43, 13:6 PPLINE command . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3, 16:1 P-point Direction (PPDI) attribute . . . . . 3:17 P-point Number (%NUM) attribute . . . . 3:17 PPOINTS command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2 PROJECTION DIRECTION command 12:10, 12:41 PROJECTION JUSTIFICATION command . 12:17

Projection line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2 Projection line direction (PLDI) . . . . . . . 12:9 Projection Line Style/Colour (PLSTYLE/PLCOLOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:31 Projection line text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:44 Projection text angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:18 Projection Text Character Height (PTCH) attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:19, 12:44 Projection Text Letter Height (PTLH) attribute 12:19, 12:44 PROJLINE CLEARANCE command . . 12:8 PROJLINE OVERSHOOT command . . 12:9 PROJLINE PEN command . . . . . . . . 12:21 PTANG attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:44 PTANGLE attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:18 PTFA (point reference) attribute 18:6, 18:15, 18:16, 18:30 PTRF (point reference) attribute 18:6, 18:15, 18:19 PURP (Purpose) attribute . . . . . . 11:2, 17:3

Q
Qualifiers:in point construction . . . . . . . 20:6 Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:20 AKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:23 Id Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 spatial map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4 view contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18 view direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 QUIT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

R
Radial Dimension (RDIM) elements 12:2, 12:42 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:42 modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:42 Radial Dimension Position Point (RPOI) element 12:32 Radial Dimension P-Point (RPPT) element . 12:32 Radial Dimensions including projection arcs with . . . . 12:31 Radius Dimension obtaining from Diameter . . . . . . . 12:24 RAYLINE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16 RCOD (rotation code) attribute . 3:11, 12:25 Recipient (RECI) element . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2 Recipient name (RNAM) attribute . . 9:2, 9:4 RECREATE command . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1, 2:5 RECT (rectangle) element . . . . 18:19, 18:28 Reflected points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15 Registry (REGI) element . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page v

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

REMOVE command . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 3:23 Remove Entry (REME) element . . . . . . . 3:4 REPEAT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:13 Report (REPO) element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Representation Rules Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11 Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5, 10:3 Representation Ruleset Reference (RRSF) attribute . . . . . . . 3:12, 3:27, 4:8, 10:2 Representation Style assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5, 10:3 Representation Style (STYL) element 4:2, 10:2 Revision element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3 ROTATE command . . . . . . . . . 18:12, 18:37 Rotation sense (SENSE) attribute . . . 12:38 ROWSTYLE, ROWCOLOUR attribute 18:34 RPOI element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:48 RPPT element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:32, 12:48 Rubber banding . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20, 18:13 Rubber banding colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20 Rules in defining ID Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6

Style attributes use of to define representation style 4:2, 10:2, 10:3, 10:4 Styles, selective allocation . . . . . . . . . . . 4:7 Sub-strings of intelligent text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:10 SWITCH command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 SYMB (Symbol Instance) element 18:3, 18:33 Symbol libraries: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 Symbol Library (SYLB) element . 18:3, 18:33 Symbol templates ISODRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 Symbol Templates (SYTM) . . . . . . . . . 3:16 Symbolic representation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16 SYTM (Symbolic Label Template) elements 13:1, 13:16, 18:3, 18:33, 18:35

T
Tabbing within intelligent text . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:8 TABL (Table) element . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:34 TAG command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:20, 13:31 Tag Rule (TAGR) element . . . . . . . . . 13:18 Tag Rule Library (TRLB) element . . . 13:18 Tag Ruleset (TRST) element . . . . . . . 13:18 TAGGING MESSAGES command 13:22, 13:31 TANGENCY keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:11 TANLINE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12 TCOD (Type Code) attribute . . . 18:6, 18:30 Terminator size controlling . .12:21, 12:45, 13:10, 13:29 TEXP (Text Primitive) element . 18:34, 18:35 Text alternative character set . . . . . . . . 15:2 Text Alignment (ALIG) attribute 12:26, 13:8, 13:27 Text extent querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:35 Text justification (JUST) attribute 13:8, 13:27 Text Label Templates (TXTM) . . . . . . . 3:16 Text Radius (DTRA) attribute . . . . . . . 12:25 Text Radius Flag (DTFL) attribute . . . 12:25 Text colour:defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:34 Text, editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:3 THPO (Through Point) VIEW attribute . 3:11 THPT (Through Point) command 18:17, 18:18 TLIN (true length) attribute . . . . 12:10, 12:12 TMRF (Template Reference) attribute 13:19, 13:23, 18:3, 18:33 TO command . . . . .12:3, 12:6, 12:41, 12:43 TOLERANCE setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:14 TPT (To Point) command 18:18, 18:31, 20:2 TRACE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3

S
SAVEWORK command . . . . . . . . . 2:2, 2:5 Scale, of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 SCALFG (Scaling Flag) element . . . . . . 3:17 Scaling Flag (SCALFG) element . . . . . . 3:17 SCTN ends representation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:5 Selective styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:7 SENSE attribute . . . . . . . . . . . 12:38, 12:43 SETFEEDBACK command . . . . . . . . . . 8:20 Sheet (SHEE) element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Sheet Library (SHLB) element . . . . . . . 17:3 SIZE attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 SKETCH command . 5:10, 5:13, 18:9, 18:32, 18:39 SLAB (Special Label) element . . . . . . . 3:16 SMOD (Section Mode) attribute . . . . . . . 5:3 SNAP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4 SORT DIMENSIONPOINTS command 12:7, 12:37, 12:41 SPAN command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:27 Spatial map use of by ADD WITHIN command . . 3:6 Special Label (SLAB) element 3:16, 13:1, 18:3, 18:35 SPLA element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7 STEP command . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7, 5:8, 5:11 Stepped Plane (SPLA) element . . . 5:1, 5:7 STRA (straight line) element . . . . . . . . 18:30 Straight leader lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page vi

12.0

DRAFT User Guide

True length (TLIN) attribute 12:10, 12:38, 12:41 Truncated dimension 12:12, 12:35, 12:38, 12:45 TXCOLOUR (Text Colour) attribute 13:9, 18:3, 18:34, 18:35 TXTM (Text Label Template) element 13:1, 13:23

U
UCOD attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:14 UDA (User-defined attribute) codewords 14:19 Units Code (UCOD) attribute . . 11:2, 14:14 Universal representation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15 UPDATE ALL command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24 UPDATE ANNO command . . . . 3:24, 12:40 UPDATE BSHEETS command . . . . . . . 3:24 UPDATE command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3, 3:24 UPDATE DESIGN command . . . . . . . . 3:12 UPDATE IGNORE command . . . . . . . . 3:24 UPDATE INSTANCES command 2:3, 18:33 UPDATE NAMES command . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 UPDATE NOWAIT command . . . . . . . . 3:24 UPDATE PICTURE command . . . . . . . 3:25 UPDATE REFRESH command . . . . . . 3:24 UPDATE REFS command . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 UPDATE TAGGING command 13:19, 13:21, 13:31 USE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:7

Visibility of primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:15 VNOT (View Note) element 18:3, 18:5, 18:6, 18:12, 18:35 VRAT attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 VREGION command . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8, 3:25 VSCA (View Scale) attribute . . . . . . . . 3:17 VSCALE attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 VTYP (View type) attribute . . . . . . . . . . 3:13

W
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 WigwamtoAutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5 Wireline views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 WPOS element . . . . . . . . . . . 5:7, 5:9, 5:11

X
X, Y filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3 XMLEXPORT command . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5 XY position (XYPS) attribute 13:5, 13:14, 13:27 XYPS attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9 XYSC (XY scaling) attribute . . . . . . . . . 3:17 XYSCALE attribute . . . . . 13:16, 17:3, 18:33

Z
Z-coordinates in DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6

V
Vertex (VERT) element . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:25 VGRID command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16 centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9 direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 gap length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6 orientation of on Sheet . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13 View contents orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17 VIEW element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:2 View Gap (VGAP) attribute . . . . . . . . . . 3:12 View Scale (VSCA) attribute . . . . . . . . . 3:17 View Section (VSEC) element . . . . 5:3, 5:9 Views labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18

2007 AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Index page vii

12.0